Home

NE Programmer Ver. 2.0 Operation Manual

1. When sending data from X to Z Link Path Port A 3 Port C 1 Send data from the network port of X Port A to 3 on that circuit and the data reaches Y Then send it from the network port of Y Port C to 1 on that circuit Through this procedure the destination node Z can be designated 231 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Description by EPATH Type For CIP EPATH type is employed for describing Link Path and IOI This is the method of dividing Link Path or IOI into segments and assigning a value to each of them Therefore Link Path description indicates the final destination by joining data called segments The segment includes the segment type information and the segment data Details of Segment Type The interpretation method of a segment is included in the first 1 byte which consists of tow parts 3 bits of Segment Type and 5 bits of Segment Format 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 According to CIP Specifications the Segment Type specifications are decided as follows Segment Type Description 7 6 5 Port Segment Logical Segment Network Segment Symbolic Segment Data Segment Data Type Data Type Reserved af alal aln olol aja ol ol al o o Oj O Oj OoO The specifications of Segment Format are different for each Segment Type The following sections describe Port Segment Logical Segment and Data Segment which are to be requ
2. Items Added to the View Menu at Ladder Program Editing Menu Shortcut Function Rung Number and Program Displays hides the rung number and program address Address Instruction Description Displays hides the instruction description Grid Displays hides the grid 4 4 4 Ladder Menu The Ladder Menu is displayed only when the Ladder Editor is active Insert Open Contact Inserts a NO input condition at the specified position Insert Closed Contact Inserts a NC input condition at the specified position 65 Menu Item Lists Section 4 4 Menu Insert Open Contact OR Shortcut Function Inserts an ORed NO condition at the specified position Insert Closed Contact OR Inserts an ORed NC condition at the specified position Insert Coil Inserts an output instruction at the specified position Insert Negative Coil Inserts a negative output instruction at the specified position Insert Instruction Inserts an instruction at the specified position Insert Function Block Inserts a function block at the specified position Insert Insert Line Comment Inserts a line comment at the specified position Mode Select Switches the editing mode to Select Mode Mode Open Contact Switches the editing mode to NO Input Condition Mode Mode Closed Contact Switches the editing mode to NC Input Condition Mode Mode
3. 000 191 7 8 4 Monitoring in the Watch Window 0000 191 7 9 Saving and Restoring Variable PVs 00 00 0000 ce eee ee eee 194 7 921 PUMCHON pieta e ee ea a Oe ea hae ea 194 T9225 PYOCEAULES 4 eis ee ais eee Bie Bee Re EO EAS Meta vite 194 7 10 Forcing Bits ON and OFF Force set and Force reset 4 195 TALOR1 QVErvVIlW ios ct 6 hbk 4k a bg a i Meee dager S 195 7 10 2 Turning Bits ON OFF Forcing Bits ON OFF and Clearing Forced Status 00 00 0000 0 000005 196 165 166 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 23 7 24 7 10 3 Forced Status Display Changing the PVs of Variables Changing Timer Counter Set Values Differential Monitor Online Editing 7 14 1 Online Editing 7 14 2 Online Editing Procedures 7 14 3 Adding Global Variables 7 14 4 Editing Function Block Parameters Online Clearing Errors Clearing Memory Restarting Services Displaying Errors and the Error Log 7 18 1 Displaying Current Errors 7 18 2 Displaying the Error log 7 18 3 Displaying Messages 7 18 4 Displaying Ethernet Errors Change Log 7 19 1 Overview NEIS CPU Units Only 0 00022 a ee 7 19 2 Enabling Disabling the Change Log 002 7 19 3 Change Log Input Examples
4. 0 0 0 0 00 0008 7 19 4 Change Log Display Displaying the Cycle Time Data Tracing 7 21 1 Data Tracing 7 21 2 Opening and Closing the Data Trace Window 7 21 3 Setting Data Trace Parameters 0 00 00 rr 7 21 4 Setting Data Trace Display Colors 200004 7 21 5 Executing the Data Trace Monitor Function Variable Reference List 7 22 1 Variable Usage List 7 22 2 Cross Reference Report Setting the CPU Unit Clock Forcibly Releasing the Access Right 197 197 198 198 199 199 201 202 203 203 204 204 205 205 206 207 208 209 209 209 209 210 211 211 211 212 212 215 215 216 217 218 219 219 Connecting via Serial Communications USB RS 232C Section 7 1 7 1 Connecting via Serial Communications USB RS 232C This section describes how to connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit using serial communications USB RS 232C The first time USB is used to connect to the CPU Unit the USB driver will need to be installed To connect using RS 232C communications go to 7 1 2 7 1 1 Installing the USB Driver Refer to 3 3 Installing the USB Driver for details on installing the USB driver 7 1 2 Connecting Online via USB or RS 232C Use the following procedure to connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit using USB or RS 232C communications 1 2 3 1
5. Name Data Type Initial Value Retain Nonretain Comment IEN BOOL Nonretain EN input Run BOOL Nonretain E 3 RB1_IN bd eorward a a y Position INT Nonretain Accel INT Nonretain Position INT y AxisX WORD Nonretain Nonretain Axis WORD NK DEESA Input Output External A System Extemal Reference Information Changing Variable Types Internal variables can be changed to input output or external variables and output input or external variables can be changed to internal variables This is performed on the Ladder Editor The following example shows how to change an internal variable to an input variable Right click the internal variable to be changed on the Ladder Editor and select Change Variable Usage Input The variable type will be changed from an internal variable to an input vari able When the variable type is change the variable will be removed from the Internal Tab Page of the Variable Editor and placed on the Input Tab Page 122 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 5 4 3 Pasting Function Blocks into Programs Use the following procedure to paste a function block into a program 1 2 3 1 Drag the function block from the Workspace and drop it at the insertion point in the ladder diagram When using one key input mode the function block can be inserted by pressing the F Key If the insertion point is selected and clicked in Function Block Mode en tered by selectin
6. 031B Direct connection already established 031C Miscellaneous 031D Redundant connection mismatch 031F No connection resources exist for target path 270 0320 07FF Vendor specific CIP Message Communications Error Code Unique to CSND Instruction When CSND Instruction itself turns to be an error incorrect parameter etc this code is reflected in A203 to A210 Error Name Error Code hex Inappropriate Request Data Length The value for the Request Data Size in the first field of S is less than 4 specified as less than 4 bytes or that the total request data size exceeds the specified amount 512 bytes Inappropriate Response Data Length The value for the Response Data Size in the first field of D is less than 8 specified as less than 8 bytes Inappropriate Control Data Length The Link Address Size in the sixth field of C exceeds the specified amount 512 bytes Appendix D Remarks The message will not be sent and the Communications port Error Flag for the corresponding port will turn ON Insufficient Response Area The CIP response data length exceeds the Response Buffer Size in the first field of C The response will be discarded and the Communications Port Error Flag for the corresponding port will turn ON EPATH Error CIP Segment Encoding Errors EPATH Errors are listed below For details on CIP segments refer to Appen
7. 2 1 2 2 2 3 SECTION 2 Program Structure Outline of the NE Programmer 0 00 00 0 cece eee eee eee 2 1 1 Project Structure 2 2 eee eee 2 1 2 Logical POU Program Organization Unit 2 1 3 Variables s n a tion ota ees Obs CLE I Ra 2 1 4 Programming Languages 0 0 eee eee ee eee 2 1 3 LID ATIES oe peni he Sel Su eae a Ha lat Geel Ha hee Variables aee e eoe wc ene ee a ob el a ine a hae EA 2 2 1 Naming Variables 0 0 eee cee eee 222 2 Types ok Variable teea ie etd fondest ete and OG aed Sa alae Sa 2 2 3 Variable Properties 0 0 00 cece eee eee 222 4 gt Data Type 25 cece Pahang atin Be eae ee Sale MEAD ASA SA 2 2 5 Array Elements Array Specification 0 2 2 6 Initial Value NE1S series CPU Units Only See note 2 2 7 Address Direct Allocation of a Physical Address 2 2 8 Retain Nonretain 0 0 cece eee eee 2 2 9 Local Variable Properties and Types of Local Variables 2 2 10 Details on Local Variables 0 00 00 0000 0000 2 2 11 Creating Variables in NE Programmer 2 2 12 Grouping Variables 0 0 00 2 2 13 Importing and Exporting Variables 0 0 Function Blocks x 2 2 4 eagchs 2 bscbeea tebe dated gare hee eee eed eee 2 3 1 Function Block Features and Operation 2 3 2 Restrictions in Variables in
8. 4 Click the end point of the line to be deleted The line will be deleted 102 Programming Methods Section 5 3 To leave line deletion mode click the Select Icon Deleting Lines from the Keyboard 1 2 3 1 Move the cursor to the starting point for the line and then press the Ctrl Shift L Keys 2 Move the cursor to the end point of the line using the cursor keys The line to be deleted will be indicated in gray 3 Press the Ctrl Shift L Keys at the end point for the line The line will be deleted Deleting Instructions and Lines Instructions and lines can be deleted by pressing the Backspace or Delete Key in the same way as for standard text editors or word processors Lines can also be deleted in line deletion mode Refer to Deleting Vertical and Horizontal Lines Line Deletion Mode for the procedure Registering and Editing Local Variables Registering Variables When a logical POU program or function block is created a Local Variable Editor will be displayed for each one Variables can be registered or edited in the Local Variable Editor using either of the following methods 1 2 3 1 Inputting Instructions First As shown above under Inputting NO Condi tions if a new variable is specified as an operand when inputting an in struction the variable will be registered as an internal variable in the Local Variable Editor If necessary the parameters of these variables can later be edited in the Local
9. E 5l o A H H H W 1 Double click the instruction to be edited Alternately right click the instruc tion and select Edit Instruction Alternately move the cursor to the in struction and press the Enter Key The Edit Instruction Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Inst MSET SET m Description SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON Edit Operand Description Operand Cd Bit swOl Variable Data Type BOOL Address Comment 2 Double click an operand to edit it Alternately select the operand and press the Enter Key A list of selections for the operand will be displayed as shown below Edit Operand Description Bit Programming Methods Section 5 3 3 Complete editing the instruction and then click the OK Button Inputting Differentiated Conditions 1 2 3 1 Input the input condition 2 Right click the input condition select Transition Sensing Positive or Transition Sensing Negative e Example of Positive Transition Sensing Note Input can also be made in the Details Display of the Edit Instruction Dialog Box In addition an upward positive transition can be spec ified using instruction and a downward negative transition can be specified using the instruction in mnemonic input mode Inputting Vertical and Horizontal Lines Line Connection Mode Inputtin
10. laid Gone Usage fintemal z CopytoAllUsages Pay Outline View Items my Name F Initial Values IT Network 1 0 Setting Ir Usage IV Retain Settings M Network Variable M DataType I Comments F Addresse f AD Mnemonic our Set Defaults Select All Clear All _SetDetauts Seaan Daa ko ST us HH i Ladder Library E Program Check Data Trace Reset All Usage Section 4 6 Select the variable type Internal Global System Input Output External or System External View Items Select the variable properties to be displayed in the Variable Editor Window Different properties can be set for each variable type Names Usage Data Type Addresses Initial Values Retain Settings Comments Network I O Setting Network Variables In the following example the Usages Data Types and Comments Options have been selected Name Usage Data Type Comment 9 o POI VAR WORD g Limit0l VAR BOOL Q Conveyer_start VAR BOOL Temp_Alarm VAR BOOL 4 Internal ExternalA System External Option Settings Section 4 6 4 6 4 Ladder Window Display Tab Page x Item Setup A Display 3 Print EA Color Edit 2 Mouse EA General Variable Names er Eont x M Show Variable Names l 1 Line jeg Outline Variable Name Display Style Cellwidth 80 Pixel OmitHead C Omit Tail J W Variable Physical Addresses J iH
11. matically used in a specified area in I O memory and are allocated in the specified area Configuration PLC System 10 The configuration PLC system is made up of resources a task group of exe cutable units and global variables variables that apply to all resources Outline of the NE Programmer Section 2 1 Libraries A program function block or rung group one rung or multiple rungs includ ing local variables can be saved as a library function and reused Each unit is saved as a separate file i e 1 program 1 file 1 function block 1 file or 1 rung group 1 file Note NE Programmer projects have the following directory tree structure Project nIx Project nIx Logical POUs Library Program Program library file Program m Program library file Function block FB library file Function block FB FB Function block FB library file Function block FB Program section library file Configuration PLC Global variables Tasks Cyclic Cyclic task so task Interrupt Interrupt task Interrupt task 2 1 2 Logical POU Program Organization Unit Program section library file Logical POU Structure A single POU is defined with the following two software elements 1 2 3 1 Declaration of memory usage variable declarations 2 Logic in an algorithm The logical POU can be reused when these two elements have been con verted to a library file as a set It is
12. EN ENO _ TLD a A T ORINI a OUT1 SETOUT1 0 00 The EN input condition is always ON so these Differentiation Instructions operate normally An instance will not be executed while its EN input variable is OFF so the fol lowing precautions are essential when using a Timer Instruction in a function block definition The Timer Instruction will not be initialized even though the instance s EN input variable goes OFF Consequently the timers Completion Flag will not be turned OFF if the EN input variable goes OFF after the timer started operat ing Example Body 0 00 FBI i EN ENO 1p EN ATIM tim UP UP H The timer s Completion Flag UP will not be turned OFF even though input condition 0 00 goes OFF Function Blocks ST Programming Restrictions Online Editing Restrictions Error related Restrictions Note Section 2 3 If Timer Instructions are being used in the function block definition always use the Always ON Flag P_On for the EN input condition and include the instruc tion s input condition within the function block definition Example Body D a TIM tim UP The timer s completion flag UP is turned OFF when input condition a 0 00 goes OFF e If the same instance containing a timer is used in multiple locations at the same time the timer will be duplicated e Only the following statements and operators are supported e Assignment
13. POU Add to Project Adds a POU registered in the library to a project Rung Register to Library Registers a rung group in the library Rung Insert to Program Adds a rung group registered in the library to a program Map Folder Changes the library folder allocated in the computer Disconnect Folder Clears the library folder allocation Create Folder Creates a folder Property Displays information on the library Update Redisplays the library folder tree Edit Used to edit library properties Delete Deletes a library object or folder Option 4 4 12 Tool Menu Menu Select Interface CJ2 USB Serial Port NE1S Serial Port DeviceNet I F Ethernet I F RSLinx I F Shortcut Sets the operation used for the library function Function Used to select the communications interface e CJ2 USB Serial Port USB port or RS 232 port e NE1S Serial Port USB port e DeviceNet Interface DeviceNet e Ethernet Interface Ethernet port e RSLinx interface RSLinx port Key Customize Used to change shortcut key allocations Option 4 4 13 Window Menu Next Docked Shortcut Alt 0 Sets various options for NE Programmer displays and operations Function Switches to the next window as the active window in the following order Workspace Outline Output Watch Property Cross Refer ence Library MDI Window Previous Docked Alt Sh
14. e 22 Close A Caution If there is a build error the Build Detailed Info Tab Page will not be displayed in the configuration properties 5 13 Importing and Exporting 5 13 1 Overview The following logical POUs can be imported and variables can be imported exported from the Variable Editor Element Import Export files Mnemonics Import Text txt files in special formats Export Text txt files in special formats Variables Import CSV files in special formats Export e CSV files in special formats e Text files for SPU Console Also files that can be exported depend on the CPU Unit for the following items e NE1S Projects e CSV files for NE OPC Servers e Text files for CX Designer of version 2 x or earlier e Text files for CX Designer version 2 03H for NS Runt ime version 1 00H e CJ2 Projects e CSV files for SYSMAC OPC servers of version 3 x e Text files for CX Designer version 3 0 5 13 2 Importing Mnemonics Import Reads mnemonic data stored in text files in proprietary formats 1 2 3 1 Select Mnemonic Import in the Mnemonic Editor specify the desired file name and select Open Export Saves edited mnemonic data in a text file in proprietary formats 153 Importing and Exporting Section 5 13 123 4 Select Mnemonic Export in the Mnemonic Editor specify the desired file name and select Save 5 13 3 Importing and Exporting Variables Importing Use to following procedure
15. 10 100 Conditional Statements Example Function RETURN Keyword RETURN Return Leaves the called function block and returns to the calling POU With the NE Programmer the RETURN statement can be used in the function block only Selection Evaluates group expression when the condition a lt b is true When the condition is false the expression is not evaluated and the group follow ing ELSE is evaluated Selection Evaluates one group according to the value in the expression following the keyword CASE The variable or expression f must be an INT data type IFa lt b THENc 1 ELSIF a b THEN C 2 ELSE c 3 END_IF 223 Structured Text Keywords Keyword Example FOR a 1 TO 10 BY 3 DO fla b END_FOR Appendix B Function Repetition Evaluates the expressions in the range of DO to END_FOR starting with 1 for variable a and sequentially adding 3 each execution repeat ing until a reaches 10 It starts with the value of variable a and ends with the value following TO increasing with the value of BY All values must be ANY_INT types Note If BY is omitted the default is 1 and all data must be INT type WHILE b gt 1 DO b b 2 END_WHILE Repetition Evaluates the expressions of one group repeating until the condition b gt 1 is false The condition for this expression is evaluated at the beginning of the loop and when it is not true the loop is not evaluat
16. 151072 byte E NonRetain Variabl 46512 327680 byte TIMER Variable Areal 720 3072 COUNTER Variabl 695 3072 Detailed information name Value E lt Code information gt Size of program 16756 250000 byte 10 1024 0 7 45406 byte 5 lt Variable information gt Variable Count 448 20000 Retain Variable Area 14638 151072 byte Non Retain Variabl 46512 327680 byte TIMER Varishle Aros 72N 2077 Graph of FB Instance Num l 1 0 100 Close Note There will be a build error if the graph of the selection item exceeds 100 for the program If a build error occurs information on the type of insufficient resource will be displayed in an error message in the Output Window Take measures for each item of information If the resources are insufficient revise the program to reduce the amount of resources used or change the CPU Unit to a model with a larger capacity Importing and Exporting Section 5 13 NE1S_CPUO1_Rev03 Propert x General Build detailed info Detailed information Detailed information name Value FB Body Num 10 1024 amp FB Instance Num 14 1024 amp Size of literal D 45406 byte 4 lt Variable information gt Variable Count 448 20000 Retain Variable Area 14638 151072 byte Non Retain Variable Ar 46512 327680 byte ES TIMER Variable Area 720 3072 COUNTER Variable Ar Graph of COUNTER Variable Area
17. 233 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Logical Segment Logical Segment is employed for describing IOI Segment Format Bits N Segment Type Logical Type Logical Format 7 6 5 Logical Type 4 3 2 4 3 2 ee LL E Description Class ID Instance ID Member ID Connection Point Attribute ID Special Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format Service ID Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format l olololo 0 0 O oO Oj Oj OoOoj o Logical Format 1 0 Reserved Description 8 bit logical address 16 bit logical address 32 bit logical address olo OoOj Oo Reserved The 32 bit logical address of Logical Format is reserved and not available The 8 bit and 16 bit logical addresses are available for Class ID and Instance ID which indicate IOI The 8 bit logical address is available for Attribute ID This is used for requesting Service to an optional Object of an optional device This can be also used for directly reading writing IO memory of NE1S by designating the address Data Segment Data Segment is employed for reading writing variables of CPU Unit Segment Type 7 6 fol 5 Segment Sub Type Data Segment Data 4 3 2 1 0 Variable length Segment Sub Type Description 0 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
18. 2E 32 30 30 2E 33 33 Example 3 In case of accessing from CPU 1 to CPU 3 via CPU 2 and ControlNet Unit Structure IP Address of CPU 1 192 168 200 100 IP Address of CPU 2 192 168 200 1 ControlNet Unit of CPU 2 Unit No 3 Node Address 8 ControlNet Unit of CPU 3 Unit No 5 Node Address 9 240 CIP Message Communications Appendix D IP Address Unit No 3 IP Address Unit No 5 192 168 200 100 Node No 8 192 168 200 1 Node No 9 CPU 1 Ethernet ControlNet Link Path The route is as follows Ethernet Port of CPU 1 CPU 2 IP Address 192 168 200 1 ControlNet Unit Unit No 3 ControlNet Port of ControlNet Unit gt ControlNet Unit Node Address 9 Backplane Port of ControlNet Unit gt CPU 3 The route above is explained below Port Segment is used for setting Link Path Therefore the top 3 bits Segment Type of the first byte will be O inevitably In this example data is sent via Ethernet Port Port No of Ethernet Port is 2 IP Address is employed for Link Address on Ethernet Because IP Address is larger than 1 byte Extended Link Address Size will be 1 Therefore the first byte will be 12 Link Address Size falls into the second byte IP Address of the target CPU 2 is 192 168 200 1 The number of the letters of this IP Address should be counted including dot because the whole IP Address must be described with ASCII cod
19. 4 3 Project Window This section describes the parts of the Project Window In the initial status there are no elements created in the Project Window except for the NE Programmer workspace Refer to SECTION 5 Programming for the procedures to create elements x a 7 Project Se Instructions Workspace E8 C12_Projects C32 mS Data Types 6 43 Logical POUs 88 Function Blocks E Feo E FB_INST E ST_O1 Programs fa PROG_0I fq PROG_02 E CJ2H_CPU68_EIP 4 Global Variables Sy Task BME Oc Executor LJ Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 B 43 Interrupt Execution J External Interrupt Tasks 0 C Power OFF Interrupt Tasks 1 I Scheduled Interrupt Tasks 2 3 e External Interrupt T asks 4 99 gt Configuration CI 1 0 Interrupt Tasks 100 131 J External Interrupt Tasks 132 255 Name Description Workspace Used as a workspace for the NE Programmer Project A project is a unit of data consisting of the library objects data types logical POUs and configurations that are being edited Data Types A folder that displays the data types that can be used in the project and is used to declare data types Logical POUs Logical POUs program organization units are units used to configure programs POUs are the units by which software can be reused POUs can be one of two types of element function blocks and programs Function blocks are called from a program and programs are allocated to tasks for executio
20. Binary ST Program Only Input 2 Octal ST Program Only Input 8 A Caution 5 3 5 Inputting Timer Counter Numbers 110 Section 5 3 Word address Eword address Dword address Area Bit address EM Area Indirect address in DM Area Indirect address in EM Area E0_word address E0_word address 10 number16 number etc DRaddress IRaddress IR IR IR IR IR DR IR XXXX IR Constants Data Register Area Index Register Area Indirect address in Index Register Area Inputting Constants When inputting a constant in the following cases always include the prefix code corresponding to the data type 16 10 or 10 for integers or deci mal point or UELI for real numbers e Inputting an instruction operand other than timer counter number inputs e Inputting I O memory data e Inputting a constant for an initial value e Inputting function block parameters Input the prefix 16 before a hexadecimal constant For example input 16 1A to input the hexadecimal value 1A Input the prefix 10 before a positive decimal constant or 0 For example input 10 123 to input the decimal value 123 Input the prefix 10 before a negative decimal constant For example input 10 123 to input the decimal value 123 Real numbers can be input with decimal points or as UELI For example the input 0 123
21. F Edit Find Searches for a text string F3 Edit Find Next Finds the next instance of a text string Shift F3 Edit Find Prev Finds the previous instance of a text string Ctrl H Edit Replace Replaces a text string Ctrl B Edit Bookmark Edits a bookmark Ctrl Shift F Edit Find in Programs Searches for the specified item Ctrl G Edit Jump Jump Edit Jump Go To Link Edit Jump Jump e In Ladder Editor jumps to a specified step number or rung number e In ST Editor adds the selected text as a variable e In Mnemonic Editor inverts the specified instruction Alt Shift A Edit Jump Bit Address Reference In Ladder Editor searches for corresponding input condi tions or outputs associated with the selected operand If an input condition is specified a search is made back ward for an output with the same bit address If an output is specified a search is made foreword for an input condition with the same bit address Alt Shift N Edit Jump Next Operand Reference In Ladder Editor jumps to the next operand with the same address variable Alt Shift Edit Jump Next Input In Ladder Editor jumps to the next input with the same address variable Alt Shift O Edit Jump Next Output In Ladder Editor jumps to the next output with the same address variable Alt Shift B
22. NE01 CCPC1 NE Programmer Ver 2 0 OPERATION MANUAL OMRON NE01 CCPC1 L NE Programmer Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Produced August 2008 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage Z Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC means Programmabl
23. Open Contact OR Switches the editing mode to Input Condition OR Mode Mode Coil Switches the editing mode to Output Mode Mode Negated Coil Switches the editing mode to Negative Output Mode Mode Function Block Switches the editing mode to Function Block Variable Input Mode Mode Line Switches the editing mode to Draw Line Mode Mode Erase Switches the editing mode to Erase Line Mode Rung Select Ctrl Enter Selects a rung Rung Insert Row Above Ctrl Inserts an open row above the cursor position Rung Insert Row Below Ctrl Shift Inserts an open row below the cursor position Rung Delete Row Ctrl D Deletes the selected row Rung Insert Column Inserts a column at the cursor position Rung Delete Column Deletes the column at the cursor position Draw Line Ctrl L Switches the editing mode to Draw Line Mode so the cursor becomes the starting point for line drawing Erase Line Ctrl Shift L Switches the editing mode to Erase Line Mode so the cursor becomes the starting point for line erasing Change Variable Usage Input Output Internal Changes a variable for a function block to an input variable output variable or internal variable Immediate Refresh Changes an instruction between a immediate refresh instructions and a normally refreshed instruction Invert NOT Swi
24. Simple Data Segment 0 0 0 1 ANSI Extended Symbol Segment All Segment Sub Types are reserved except the above ANSI Extended Symbol Segment is mainly used for Data Segment Variable data is read written by using the segment of this type 234 CIP Message Communications Appendix D ANSI Extended Symbol Segment Segment Type Segment Sub Type Symbol Size aa 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Symbol ANSI reece Symbol ANSI 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Variables and IOl As mentioned above Object Model is used in the concept of CIP A device is recognized as a group of Objects You have to identify the data you want to access to by using Class Instance When accessing to a variable by using a variable name the variable name must be converted to Class Instance For NE1S Series CPU Unit performs the conversion process so that the user doesn t have to do it All the user need to do is just to designate a variable in spite of Class Instance 235 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Inputting a Network Path Network Path The network path indicates the path from the local CPU Unit to another PLC in the network The NE1S series PLCs can use the network path for routing When a Network Path is Required A network path can be specified in the following case e SEND CIP COMMAND Instruction CSND When reading or writing the I O memory of another node in the network with the S
25. The name of the function block definition logical POU name The programming language used in the function block defini tion Select ladder programming or structured text 37 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Function Block Definition Name Language Local Variable Definitions 38 Item Description Local variable defini Variable settings such as operands and return values tions required when the function block is executed e Type usage of the variable e Name of the variable e Data type of the variable e Initial value of the variable Algorithm Enter the programming logic in ladder or structured text Comment Function blocks can have comments This is the name of a function block which is one kind of logical POU Number of characters for logical POU names 24 characters max e Allowed characters Numbers 0 to 9 letters a to z letters A to Z and the underscore character e Upper and lower case characters are distinguished but do not make vari ables different For example aBc and AbC are treated as the same variable but the variable aBc is recorded as aBc e Variable names cannot begin with a number 0 to 9 e There cannot be two or more consecutive underscore characters _ Function block POU name CLOCK PULSE EN ENO BOOL BOOL ON_TIME INT OFF_TIME INT Select either ladder or structured text Define the argu
26. Timings Settings Schedule Interrupt Interval Settings Function A29508 A29509 A29510 If this setting is set to Continue these flags won t be turned ON even if an instruction error occurs Related flags and words Start of opera tion New setting s effectiveness 10 ms 1 0 ms 0 1 ms Default 10 ms Sets the time interval for the scheduled interrupt task Cycle Monitor Time Minimum Cycle Time Start of opera tion Can t be changed during operation Settings Function Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness 0 2 to 32000 0 ms 0 1 ms increments Default 0 ms Cycle Time Settings Set to the desired value to specify a minimum cycle time If the cycle time is less than this setting it will be extended until this time passes Leave this setting at 0 ms for a variable cycle time Function Related flags and words Start of opera tion Can t be changed during operation New setting s effectiveness Disabled Enabled Default Disabled 1 000 ms Set to Enabled to use a cycle monitor time setting other than the default value of 1 s A264 and A265 Present Cycle Time Start of opera tion Can t be changed during operation 275 PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units Set Cycle Monitor Time Settings Function Related flags and words Appendix E New settin
27. parameters to their default values Default The default value is displayed OK Cancel Appl 3 Select the group and set the parameters 4 After completing all settings click the OK Button 5 Download the settings to the CPU Unit Select Controller Download to Controller select Ethernet Setting and then click the OK Button Refer to SECTION 7 Online Operation for information on downloading and other online operations for the NE Programmer 6 Restart the CPU Unit 281 Ethernet Settings for CJ2 CPU Units Appendix F TCP IP Settings The settings in the TCP IP group are shown below Elo 2 CB PLC SetupArea Y Ethemet Build Z 1 0 Table Groups Parameters 9 BOOTP 22 IP Address 192 168 200 200 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Host Name MAC Address 22 Help Set network mask al Set Defaults OK Cancel Apply These settings are described individually below BOOTP This window only displays whether the BOOTP function is enabled or not The BOOTP setting cannot be changed here Note BOOTP The BOOTP function enables automatically setting the IP address network mask and default gateway by obtaining IP configuration information from the BOOTP server on the network A BOOTP server must be installed separately on the network IP Address e As a rule the IP address is set on the rotary switches on the CPU Unit first and then the setting on the Ethernet Sett
28. 1 2 or 4 word Data Use the following data types when handling single numbers in 1 2 or 4 word units e INT and UINT e DINT and DINT Note Use signed integers if the numbers being used will fit in the range Word Data Types 1 2 or 4 word Data Use the following data types when handling groups of data non numeric data in 1 2 or 4 word units e WORD DWORD Array Settings Array Variables Use for First or End Addresses of Word Ranges When specifying an instruction operand that is the first address or end address of a range of words see note the required values cannot be passed to variables through input parameters or output parameters Note Refer to the SYSMAC NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 and Appendix D Instruction Sup port and Operand Variable Restrictions to determine which instruction operands must have array vari ables because they specify the first end address of a range of words In this case prepare an array variable with the required number of array elements set the data in each array element in the function block and specify the beginning or end array variable in the operand Using an array variable allows you to specify the first address or end address of a range of words Handling a Single String of Data in Multiple Words In this example an array contains the directory and filename operand S2 for an FREAD instruction e Variable Internal variable VAR data type WORD array
29. 192 168 100 10 EtherNet IP Unit of CPU 2 Unit No 5 IP Address 192 168 100 30 241 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Unit No 3 Unit No 5 IP Address IP Address 192 168 100 10 192 168 100 30 EtherNet IP Link Path The route is as follows Backplane Port of CPU 1 EtherNet IP Unit Unit No 3 EtherNet Port of EtherNet IP Unit Ether Net IP Unit IP Address 192 168 100 30 Backplane Port of EtherNet IP Unit CPU 2 The route above is as follows Port Segment is used for setting the Link Path Therefore the top 3 bits Segment Type of the first byte will always be 0 First in the route is the Backplane port of CPU 1 The port number of the Backplane port is always 1 The number will not be larger than 1 byte and so the Extended Link Address Size will be 0 Therefore first will be 01 The unit number of the EtherNet IP Unit for CPU 1 is 03 hex so the Link Address will be 10 hex 03 hex 13 hex and second will be 13 The Link Path so far is 01 13 The port number of the EtherNet IP port for the EtherNet IP Unit is 2 so the third byte is 02 The IP Address of the target EtherNet IP Unit is 192 168 100 30 The dots must also be counted when counting the num ber of characters in the IP Address because the whole IP Address must be described with ASCII In this case there are 14 characters OE hex The Link Path for this part is 12
30. Click the Cross Reference Report Tab in the Variable Reference List Win dow to display the following window Variable Reference List lol x Variable Reference Report Cross Reference Report ag Fisherl ech Report Keyword Variable Name T Adaress Comment Progr Instruction Program Path Enter a search keyword to limit Select the individual POU the targets name or All POUs Output to Output Export Close 4 2 Selecta POU name from the POU field and then click the Report Button The following Cross Reference Report will be displayed and the same in formation will be displayed as text in the Find Tab Page of the Output Win dow oix Variable Reference Report Cross Reference Report POU FisherTech he Keyword Output to Output Export atela ai pees a Gees Eeen Jae 5 ILs_ProcessWorkDetect 0002 01 Processor FisherTech 5 ILs_ProcessWorkDetect 0002 01 IndexTabl FisherTech ILs_TableLimit 0002 05 LD 1 FisherT ech ILs_T ableLimit 0002 05 IndexTabl FisherTech ILs_UnloaderworkDetect 0002 04 IndexT abl FisherTech ILs_UnloaderWorkDetect 0002 04 Unloader l FisherTech IPhs_LoaderworkDetect 0002 02 Loade IN FisherTech IPhs_UnloadCyWorkDetect 0002 03 Unloader l FisherTech OLht_LoaderworkDetect 0000 00 Loade O FisherTech OLht_UnloadCvWorkDetect 0000 05 Unloader FisherTech OMt_AirCompressor 0000 04 OUT I FisherTech 2 OMt_RotateT able 0
31. Jump Jump Variable Define Jumps to the position in the Variable Editor where the selected instruction operand s variable is defined declared Insert upward Ctrl G Inserts an instruction above the current row Insert downward Additional Menu Items when E Menu Jump Go To Line Shortcut Ctrl G Inserts an instruction below the current row diting ST Programs Function Jumps to a specified line number Jump Jump Variable Define Jumps to the position in the Variable Editor where the selected ST 64 program variable is defined declared Menu Item Lists Section 4 4 4 4 3 View Menu Shortcut Function Toolbars General Build Control Displays hides the toolbars in the Main Window ler Display Data Type Variable LD Mnemonic ST Status Bar Displays hides the status bar Window Workspace Displays hides the Workspace Window Window Output Displays hides the Output Window Window Watch Displays hides the Watch Window Window Cross Reference Tool Displays hides the Cross Reference Popup Window Window Library Displays hides the Library Window Window Property Displays hides the Property Window Window Outline Displays hides the Outline Window Window Initialize window position Returns the window arrangement to its initial status the status after the NE Programmer was first installed To Lower Layer Shift F Jumps from a function block instance to
32. Offset word C 4 n SegmentType SegmentFormat LogicalValue e Specifying 16 Bits Offset word C 4 n SegmentType SegmentFormat C 4 n 1 LogicalValue Examples of Segment Type and Segment Format SegmeniType SegmentFormat Specifying 8 bits Specifying 16 bits Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Example Specifying Class ID 5 Instance ID 2 and Attribute ID 1 Offset word C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 All are specified in 8 bits Example Specifying Class ID 5 and Instance ID 2 Offset word C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 All are specified in 16 bits 249 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example Specifying Class ID 5 Instance ID 2 and Attribute ID 1 Offset word C 4 8 0 05 C 5 21 00 C 6 0005 C 7 25 00 C 8 0002 C 6 30 01 Class ID and Instance ID are specified in 16 bits Attribute ID is specified in 8 bits Flag and Status The related flags are shown below Error Flag Description Goes to ON when address range of S D and C areas is too large Goes to ON when Network Instruction Execution Enable Flag is OFF for the communications port spec ified by C Otherwise goes to OFF Network Com munications Instruction Execution Enable Flag A20200 to A20207 Goes to 1 ON when network communications CSND or PMCR instruction is exe cutable Each bit indicates a
33. The instance is executed when the vari able is ON The instance is not executed when the variable is OFF Output VAR_OUTPUT Up to 64 per func tion block not including ENO ENO Enable Output Outputs the func tion block s execution status The variable is turned ON when the instance starts being executed It can be turned OFF by the algorithm The variable remains OFF when the instance is not executed Internal VAR Unlimited Fl A local variable that turns ON the first time the instance is executed It can be used for initialization the first time an instance is executed External variables System variables Function Blocks A Caution Section 2 3 Initial Values of Input Variables VAR_INPUT in Function Blocks NE1S series CPU Units Only When you set an initial value for an input variable VAR_INPUT that value will be written to the variable when the parameter for input variable EN goes ON and the instance is executed for the first time and that one time only If an initial value has not been set for an input variable the input variable will be set to 0 when the instance is first executed Initial Values of Output Variables VAR_OUTPUT in Function Blocks NE1S series CPU Units Only An initial value can be set for an output variable VAR_OUTPUT that is not being retained i e when the Retain Option is not selected An initial value cannot be set for an output variabl
34. and allocate that folder to the local library Note Library parts cannot be edited after they have been registered in the library They must be re registered in order to change them Libraries by Type of Controller The library display and operation in the Library Window depend on the con troller series CPU Unit series they do not depend on the type of library If the currently open project is for the CJ2 items for the NE1S will be displayed with a disabled icon and they cannot be added to the project for the CJ2 CPU Unit In the same way if a project for a NE1S series CPU Unit is open library items for the CJ2 will be disabled and you cannot add them to the project for the NE1S series CPU Unit 5 10 2 Displaying the Library Window 1 2 3 1 If the Library Window is not currently displayed select View Window Library 2 The Library Window will be displayed The Library Window will be automatically displayed when a library file is registered as described in sections below Display Showing the Controller Series The display elements in the Library Window that depend on the controller series CPU Unit series are shown below 143 Using the Library m Example Library Window Opened ix E Local Library EES Local Library E FB_01_forC 2 Flicker_forNE1S_FB LD_01_forNE1S_Pro EJ PROG_O1_forCJ2 Section 5 10 for Project for CJ2 CPU Unit The library elements for the NE1S are marked wit
35. automatically be started in the Ladder Editor and Watch Window Note 1 The program in the NE Programmer and the program in the CPU Unit must be the same to enable monitoring If they are not the same transfer the program For details on transferring programs refer to 7 6 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data 2 The automatic upload function can be used to automatically upload the program from the CPU Unit and start monitoring The automatic upload function can be used only when the NE Programmer and CPU Unit are connected directly via USB or RS 232C communications Refer to 7 3 Automatic Upload Function for details on the automatic upload function 1 2 3 1 Connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit 2 Double click the task to be monitored in the Project Window to display the Ladder Editor Monitoring will automatically be started in the Ladder Editor and Watch Window Forward RbSetDir Run RbSetExecution e a MM IRbSetExecution ExeStateReset ExeState 000015 Vt ra ExeState ExeState 00001 9 j TIMX 650 WaitTimer ExeStateReset L j WaitTimer RbStatet RbState2 OK 000023 f jt RbState2 RbStatet VE 3E mowo21 H Rbstetust 75 Statust o mowto21 H e ON execution status i e the power flow in the ladder diagram will be indicated in light green Light green is the default color e If the CPU Unit
36. communications errors 208 errors 208 IP address 281 network mask 281 settings 159 173 Ethernet settings CJ2 CPU Units 281 Ethernet setup 159 execution settings 274 exporting 153 exporting variables 30 external variables 29 222 227 F FI 26 floating point data 46 forced status clearing 196 displaying 197 force resetting bits 195 force setting bits 195 function block definitions 32 function blocks 31 advantages 31 creating 120 elements 37 errors 49 instances 33 ladder programming restrictions 47 moving to function block body 127 operating specifications 40 pasting into programs 120 123 restrictions 47 Index specifications 37 ST restrictions 49 structure 32 variable restrictions 36 G general status code 268 global variables 15 creating 131 grouping variables 30 I O address display 74 T O table settings 161 T O tables 181 creating 181 deleting 182 editing 161 registering 5 settings 161 verifying 182 importing 153 importing variables 31 input mode 79 input variables 27 installation 5 precautions xvii software 51 instance areas 39 instances calling 40 number of 34 outline 33 specifications 39 instruction comments 137 instructions inputting methods 108 MSG 205 interface selection 175 internal variables 26 internals 17 interrupts 275 Power OFF Interrupt Task 276 IP address changing 170 J
37. or 1 23E 1 is acceptable Example abcdefg Binary numbers can be input in ST language only Input the prefix 2 before a binary constant For example input 2 010 to input the binary value 010 Octal numbers can be input in ST language only Input the prefix 8 before an octal constant For example input 8 10 to input the octal value 10 If a number is input without a 16 10 or 10 prefix code it is treated as a word address in the CIO Area For example an input of 100 specifies CIO 0100 in the CIO Area Inputting Operand Numbers Input timer and counter numbers and only these numbers as a plain decimal value without a 10 prefix code A prefix such as 16 or 10 cannot be input For example to enter a timer with timer number 2 and decimal SV of 200 input TIMX 2 10 200 Programming Methods Inputting Jump Numbers Inputting Task Numbers Section 5 3 Always input jump numbers with a 16 or 10 prefix code If the prefix is omit ted the number indicates a CIO Area word address and the content of that address is used as the jump number For example to enter a JMP instruction with jump number 2 input JMP 10 2 or JMP 16 2 If JMP 2 is input the content of CIO 0002 is used as the jump number Always input a decimal task numbers with the 10 prefix code A prefix code of 16 cannot be used If the prefix is omitted the number indicates a CIO Area word address and the content of
38. or Small Button while the data trace data is being displayed 7 22 Variable Reference List Variable Usage Report Cross Reference Report 216 The Variable Reference List Window displays the Variable Usage Report and Cross Reference Report This window can be accessed both offline and online The variables registered in the project are listed in this report together with whether the registered variables are being used in the program The variables not being used can be deleted This report lists in which instructions location and program the variables are being used The usage status of variables can be listed for individual POUs or for all POUs Variable Reference List Section 7 22 7 22 1 Variable Usage List 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Variable Reference The Variable Usage List Tab will be displayed in the Variable Reference List Window as shown here injxi Variable Reference Report Cross Reference Report l Report Select the individual POU Select these options to include name or All POUS global variables and system variables in the display Close 4 2 Selecta POU name from the POU field and then click the Report Button The following Variable Usage Report will be displayed io x Variable Reference Report Cross Reference Report l POU Processor v I Global Variables System Variables All Delete Variable Name Comment Progr Use stsProce
39. settings for a registered Unit 9 Basic 1 0 Unit CPU Bus Unit H E Dummy E Special 10 Unit Property Select the slot in the Structure Area and the Unit in the Unit List Area and click this button OK Cancel Apply Displays the properties of the selected Unit 4 Drag and drop any of the Units from the Unit List Area to an Empty Unit in the Structure Area The Unit will be registered in the slot Build 5 1 0 Table NE1S_GPUO01_RevO3 00_ 01500 ControllerLink Unit No 0 01 _ 00000 Empty Slot 02_ 00000 Empty Slot 03_ 00000 Empty Slot 04 00000 Empty Slot Unit List 4g GPU Bus Unit o Controller Link Unit 9 ControllerLink Unit E ControlNet Unit E Data Storage Processing Uni DeviceNet Unit Ethernet Unit fA Drag and drop Units i I Backplane Delete Deletes a Unit registered in Settings the structure Used to make settings fora registered Unit Efe es Register Property 163 I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page Section 6 5 5 Settings for the Unit must be made next Click the Setting Button The Unit Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Setup C51W CLK21 1 lol xi General Groups Parameters Parameter Name Settings The current settings Select the group siou number 0 Unit Number are displayed CH
40. specify the variable or address and input a hexadecimal value If TIM CNT is input the timer counter Completion Flag will be used Sampling Set the sampling condition in the Sampling Area Sampling Once Per Cycle C On TRSM Instruction Select one of the two sampling methods Sampling method Function Contents of sampled data Once Per Cycle Sampling will be performed I O data after the END instruc once per cycle tion is executed On TRSM Instruction Sampling will be performed I O data when the END when the TRSM instruction is instruction is executed executed Trace Data Channel Use the following procedure to specify the word variables or addresses to be Area sampled in the Trace Data Channel Area Trace Data Channel Area Path 213 Data Tracing 1 2 3 Note Trace Data Bit Area 1 2 3 Note 214 4 Section 7 21 Click the Regist Button The following Regist Variables or Address Dialog Box will be displayed Regist Variable or Address x Regist Count Regist Available Count 0 6 Input the word variable or address to be sampled and then click the Regist Button Repeat step 2 to monitor more than one word Up to 6 word variables and addresses can be registered Set all the required variables or addresses and then click the Close Button To delete a variable or address that has been set select the variable or address and click the Unregist Button U
41. system settings 158 system variables 227 T tab length 82 tasks 133 allocation 134 execution at startup 133 pasting into programs 134 TCP IP settings 281 timer instructions restrictions 48 timer settings 275 timers changing SVs 198 U uninstallation 53 uploading 182 183 automatic 175 protection 184 USB driver installation 55 167 V variables 13 converting physical addresses to variables 111 creating 29 definitions 38 editing 103 enable output variable 29 enable variable 28 exporting 155 external 29 grouping 30 108 importing and exporting 30 154 initial values 25 input 27 inputting comments 137 internal 26 output 28 properties 18 registering 103 restrictions 47 restrictions in function blocks 36 retaining 25 types 17 usage report 217 verifying 188 version upgrades 55 W Watch Window 189 191 adding items 192 wheel 80 wiring 5 words inputting addresses 109 Z zoom changing 94 Index 289 Index 290 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No Z918 E1 01 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised content August 2008 Original production 291 Revision History 292 Ter
42. xi Target O E Proeram A4 aaas i Click to clear selection O PLC Setup Area N 5 Click to select fm Ethernet Settings O 510 Table The Ethernet settings will be downloaded If the download ends normally the following dialog box will be displayed Automatic Upload Function Note Section 7 3 The Ethernet settings are automatically backed up in flash memory inside the CPU Unit Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit while the settings are being backed up The BKUP indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light during the automatic backup operation 4 Restart the CPU Unit according to the manual for the relevant CPU Unit SYSMAC NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W472 7 3 Automatic Upload Function 7 3 1 Overview Note If the personal computer and CPU Unit are directly connected via USB or RS 232C communications the NE Programmer can be automatically connected online to the CPU Unit After going online you can automatically upload and monitor the program as well Refer to information starting in 7 6 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data and 7 8 Monitoring for details on transferring and monitoring the program 1 The automatic upload function cannot be used if another application is using the serial port 2 The automatic upload function can be used only with a direct serial con nec
43. 0000 00 Note The input range of the constant depends on the data type as shown in the fol lowing table Input the desired value in the Initial Value Field in the Edit Variables Dialog Box Input a value consistent with the variable s data type as shown in the fol lowing table Data type Content Range of values Initial value input method Bit data 16 0 or 16 1 Input as unsigned hexadecimal after 16 Integer 10 32768 to 10 32767 Input as signed decimal after 10 or 10 If 10 is input a sign will be attached automatically Unsigned integer 10 0 to 10 65535 Input as unsigned decimal after 10 10 2147483648 to 10 2147483647 Double integer Input as signed decimal after 10 or 10 If 10 is input a sign will be attached automatically Unsigned double integer 10 0 to 10 4294967295 Input as unsigned decimal after 10 16 bit data 16 0000 to16 FFFF Input as unsigned hexadecimal after 16 32 bit data 16 00000000 to16 FFFFFFFF Input as unsigned hexadecimal after 16 Real number Refer to the details on floating point data below Input a signed numerical value Input the value after the sign E g 1 0 0 23 9 87E 3 127 characters Character string data ASCII data Floating point Data The following data can be expressed by floating point data co e
44. 1 Right click the instruction to which a comment is to be added on the Ladder Editor and then select Edit Comment The Edit Instruction Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Instruction Comment xi Input the comment and then click the OK Button Refer to 5 7 1 Overview for display examples 1 Inputting Line Comments Right click the line where a comment is to be added and then select Insert Insert Line Comment The Edit Line Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Line Comment x Cancel ff Clear Input the comment and then click the OK Button 137 Search Replace Function Section 5 8 Note Up to 2 000 characters can be input for a line comment Refer to 5 7 1 Overview for display examples 5 8 Search Replace Function 5 8 1 Overview The following search and replace operations can be performed Type Function Searching programs Mnemonics variables physical addresses instance names line comments instruction comments etc can be searched in all or specific POUs ST pro grams are not searched The search results are output to the Output Window The locations that were found can be jumped to by double clicking in the Output Window Search replace jump opera Search replace operations can be performed in the tions in the Ladder Editor active Ladder Editor Jumping is possible to specified step numbers pro gram addresses or rung numbers Search replace jump opera Search r
45. 10 or 10 If 10 is input a sign will be attached automatically Unsigned integer 24 10 0 to 10 65535 Input as unsigned decimal Input the value after 10 Variables Section 2 2 Data type Contents Initial value Initial value input method Double integer 10 2147483648 to Input as signed decimal 10 2147483647 Input the value after 10 or 10 If 10 is input a sign will be attached automatically Double unsigned integer 10 0 to 10 4294967295 Input as unsigned decimal Input the value after 10 16 bit data 16 0000 to 16 FFFF Input as unsigned hexadecimal Input the value after 16 32 bit data 16 00000000 to 16 FFFFFFFF Input as unsigned hexadecimal Input the value after 16 Real number 0 0 Input a signed numerical value Input the value after the sign E g 1 0 0 23 9 87E 3 Character string data ae ASCII data Z Caution If you convert an NE1S project to a CJ2 project any initial value settings used in the NE1S project must be set from the program This is because the CJ2 CPU Units do not support the initial value settings If initial values are not set from the program and the project is downloaded to a CJ2 CPU Unit unex pected operation may occur 2 2 7 Address Direct Allocation of a Physical Address A physical address cannot be specified directly for a local variable To
46. 19 4 Change Log Display Select Controller Change Log Change Log List to display the Change Log List Window Change Log List NE1S_CPUO1 Jponline Edit 2004 09 15 U3 Clears the 5 Create 2004 09 15 03 57 09 NETS on Line A change log Refreshes the Saves the ak log change log as isplay a CSV file Export Clear Update P Program V1Variable 11 OTable S System Settings E Ethernet Settings M Memory MG Memory Card 210 Displaying the Cycle Time Section 7 20 7 20 Displaying the Cycle Time Note 7 21 Data Tracing 7 21 1 Data Tracing Note The following procedure can be used to measure and display the cycle time of the program that is being executed The CPU Unit must be in RUN or MONI TOR mode to use this function Select Controller Cycle Time The following Cycle Time Dialog Box will be displayed Cycle Time NE1S_CPUO1 x Cycle time Peak 1 8 ms Clear Cycle time Average 11 ms Cycle time Bottom 05 ms Cycle time 1 2 ms Update e The peak average bottom and current cycle times will be cleared if the Clear Button is pressed e The peak average bottom and current cycle times will be remeasured and displayed again if the Update Button is pressed e The Cycle Time Dialog Box will be closed if the Close Button is pressed Even if the above procedure is not performed the average cycle time will be displayed in the status bar when th
47. 196 turning ON and OFF 196 BOOTP 281 build settings 160 building program 150 C change log 209 displaying 210 changing display mode 94 check level 83 level A 83 151 level B 84 user definition 84 CIP message communications 229 CIP object 229 clock setting 219 clock settings CPU Unit 219 comments editing 136 Index instructions 137 lines 137 variables 137 communications settings 278 comparing 188 comparing data 188 compiling programs 150 conditional statements 223 configuration 10 settings 157 158 configurations creating 129 connecting online 167 connection changing 177 changing connected CPU Unit 177 to CPU Unit on different network 179 constants 110 converting to variables when input comments 79 counters changing SVs 198 cross references 142 report 218 CSND instruction 229 cycle time displaying 211 setting 275 D data structures creating 106 inserting elements 108 data tracing 211 data type code 264 data types 18 19 121 determining 221 differential monitoring 198 differentiation restrictions 48 direct address specification 25 displaying and hiding the grid 94 DM Area settings 5 downloading 182 185 285 286 E editing function block parameters online 203 EN 28 ENO 29 EPATH type 232 error log 205 error status 208 errors clearing 203 Ethernet 208 function blocks 49 settings 275 Ethernet
48. 3 402823 x 1038 lt value lt 1 175494 x 10738 0 e 1 175494 x 10738 lt value lt 3 402823 x 10 8 00 e Not a number NaN 1 175494 x 10738 Si 1 175494 x 10 38 tk co 3 402823 x 1038 1 46 1 3 402823 x 1088 Function Blocks Restrictions on Variable Data Types Timing of Data Transfers to from Variables Restrictions on Parameter Data Quantity Connecting a Bit Control Instruction to a Parameter Section 2 3 Special Numbers The formats for NaN and 0 are as follows NaN e 255 f 0 00 e 255 f 0 s 0 oo e 255 f 0 s 1 0 e 0 NaN not a number is not a valid floating point number Executing floating point calculation instructions will not result in NaN Parameters cannot be input to TIMER or COUNTER variables or output from TIMER or COUNTER variables Input data is passed from parameters to the corresponding input variables before the algorithm is processed Output variable data is passed to the corre sponding parameters after algorithm processing is completed Consequently values cannot be passed from parameters to input variables while the algo rithm is being executed The maximum amount of a parameter I O data is 1 024 words per instance For details on connecting a parameter to a Bit Control Instruction refer to the sections Placement of Instances in Program and Restrictions on Placement of Instances above 2 3 5 Restrictions on Functio
49. 8th bit goes to On 4D gt CD General Status 0000 hex indicates correct end Additional Status The upper 2 bytes will be stored if any additional information CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example of Ladder Program Data Type Name Sdata No of Address Elements W000 Comment Operand S of CSND Instruction data to be sent Ddata W020 Operand S of CSND Instruction data received Cdata W040 Operand C of CSND Instruction control KickSW Switch to start CSND Instruction A202 03 Communications Instruction Execution Enable Flag 261 CIP Message Communications 262 P_First_Cycle P_First_Cycle MOV 021 16 0008 Sdata 0 wooo MOV 021 16 004D Sdata 1 woo1 MOV 021 16 C300 Sdata 2 W002 MOV 021 16 0100 Sdata 3 w003 MOV 021 16 1234 Sdata 4 W004 MOV 021 16 000A Cdata 0 W040 MOV 021 16 0000 Cdata 1 W041 MOV 021 16 0000 Cdata 2 W042 MOV 021 16 0000 Cdata 3 W043 MOV 021 16 8005 Cdata 4 W044 MOV 021 16 9107 Cdata 5 W045 MOV 021 16 5661 Cdata 6 W046 MOV 021 16 725F Cdata 7 W047 MOV 021 16 494E Cdata 8 W048 Appendix D CIP Message Communications Appendix D MOV 021 16 5400 Cdata 9 W049 MOV 021 16 0008 Cdata 10 W050 MOV 021 16 120E Cdat
50. C3 00 3 0100 S 4 Data to be written S 13 Data to be written Control Data Word C 5 91 09 C 6 41 72 Ar C 7 72 61 ra C 8 79 44 yD C 9 61 74 at C 10 61 00 a Example 2 In case that an array variable with ten INT type elements ArrayData 10 exists and that you access to the 3rd element of this array variable ArryData 2 Service Code 4D hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004D D 4 None 2 C3 00 3 0100 S 4 Data to be written Control Data Word C 5 91 09 C 6 41 72 Ar C 7 72 61 ra C 8 79 44 yD C 9 61 74 at C 10 61 00 a C 11 28 02 28 hex Logical Segment Member ID is specified 02 hex Member ID 2 The 3 member is specified 255 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Use Example of CSND Instruction Read WORD Type Variable via ControlNet Control Net Control Net CPU Unit No 3 Unit No 5 Node Adrs 8 ControlNet Read a variable of the right CPU Unit 2 Var_A from the left CPU Unit 1 and store it in a variable of 1 Var_B The route is as follows Backplane Port of CPU 1 ControlNet Unit Unit No 3 gt ControlNet Port of ControlNet Unit Con trolNet Unit Node Address 9 Backplane Port of ControlNet Unit CPU 2 Therefore the
51. Can t be changed during operation PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units SIOU Refresh Settings Related flags and words Related flags and words Appendix E New setting s effectiveness Start of opera tion New setting s effectiveness Settings Function Cyclic Refreshing of Enabled These settings determine whether data will be Units 0 to 95 Disabled exchanged between the specified Unit and the Default Special I O Unit s allocated words 10 Enabled words Unit during cyclic refreshing for Special I O Units Unit Settings Settings Function Rack 0 Slot 0 No filter Sets the input response time ON response Rack 0 Slot 1 0 5 ms time OFF response time for CJ series eee 1ms Basic I O Units The default setting is 8 ms Rack 0 Slot 2 2ms and the setting range is 0 5 ms to 32 ms Rack 0 Slot 3 4ms This value can be increased to reduce the Rack 0 Slot 4 8 ms effects of chattering and noise or it can be Rack 0 Slot 5 16 ms reduced to allow reception of shorter input i 32 ms pulses Rack 0 Slot6 Default 8 ms Rack 0 Slot 7 Rack 0 Slot 8 Rack 0 Slot 9 Rack 1 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 2 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 3 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 4 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 5 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 6 Slots 0 to 9 Rack 7 Slots 0 to 9 A220 to A259 Actual input response times for Basic I O Units At startup 277 PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units
52. Colors 1 2 3 1 Click the Channel Area Color Tab in the Color Settings Dialog Box _ Select the item to Bit Area Color Channel Area Color change Variable Address PES z Shane Prviow Value 1 to 6 Background Grid Line 16 FFFF 16 0000 All Reset seve 2 Select the item for which to change the color and then click the Change Button 3 The standard Windows color setting dialog box will be displayed Set the desired color 7 21 5 Executing the Data Trace Monitor Function Use the following procedure to execute the data trace monitor function Be sure to set the data trace parameters before executing this procedure 1 2 3 1 Click the Start Button in the Data Trace Window e The data trace will be started 215 Section 7 22 Variable Reference List Changing the Display Scale e Sampling will be started when the trigger condition is met and traced data will be stored in the trace memory in the CPU Unit e When the trace memory becomes full sampling will stop automatically Traced data will be read from the CPU Unit and the trace data will be dis played in the Data Trace Window as shown below x Display Scale Large x4F88 e To stop the data trace before trace memory becomes full click the Stop Button The Data Trace Window will be displayed when the Stop Button is clicked The trace data display scale can be enlarged or reduced by clicking the Large
53. Communications Port Error the target The message was discarded Flag for the corresponding port will during communications processing the turn ON message frame length exceeded the max imum length etc 272 Appendix E PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units The section describes the PLC Setup items for CJ2 CPU Units that can be set from the NE Programmer For information on PLC Setup items for CJ2 CPU units refer to the CU2 CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W473 To display the settings window for the PLC Setup right click the configuration and select System Setup Startup Settings Startup IOM Hold Settings Function Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness Invalid Valid Default Invalid This setting determines whether or not the status of the IOM Hold Bit A50012 is retained at startup When you want all of the data in I O Memory to be retained when the power is turned ON turn ON the IOM Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 ON Startup Force Status Settings Function A50012 IOM Hold Bit Related flags and words At startup New setting s effectiveness Invalid Valid Default Invalid This setting determines whether or not the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit A50013 is retained at startup When you want all of the bits that have been force set or force reset to retain their forced status when the power is turned ON turn ON the F
54. Data Type Code Structure The situation is a little different for structured variables In case of a structured variable it has to be confirmed whether or not the specified structured variable is defined correctly CRC Code Cyclic Redundant Code calculated from the structure definition is used for con firming that it is identified with the structure definition Although the format of Request Data is the same that of Response Data is different Type will be AO hex CRC Code is stored in the channel next to Type Field Service Code 4C hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004C D 4 AO 02 2 0100 D 5 CRC D 6 Data Array Variable In case of an array variable access to the whole of an array variable is the same as in the case of Predefined Data Type Access to an array element is access to a member of Instance Service Code 4C hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004C D 4 Type 00 2 0100 D 5 Data D n Type Data Type Code of a variable which was read Refer to the following Data Type Code Example 1 In case that an array variable with ten INT type elements ArrayData 10 exists and that you access to the whole of this array variable 252 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Service Code 4C hex Request Data Word S 1 004C S 2 0100 Control Data
55. Di alog Box will be displayed Select the type of new Controller and click the OK Button Convert Controller Sei x Present Controller Model Name NE1S_CPUO1_Rev01 Vendor OMRON Corporation Product Code 31 Revision 1 01 New Controller Model Name JMP nMn ala Vendor OMRON Corporation Product Code 19 Revision 1 01 Cancel 3 The following dialog box will be displayed Click the Yes button xi A Program data including variable and data type is succeeded but t PLC Setup Area Ethernet setting Build setting and I O table will be initialized The initial value is not succeeded for non support Are you sure to change the controller model Next a message box that gives the backup location of the project file be fore the change will be displayed Click the OK Button NE Programmer x The former project file was saved as a following file name for back up C CNS5_V3 NE P_080626_NE15_080807105445 nlx 4 The Controller series i e CPU Unit Series will be changed Confirm that the listing in the Project Window has changed Listed as CJ2 EE Project om Instructions lies Workspace EE NE1S_Project_1 CJ2 I Data Types Logical POUs BJ Function Blocks FI E D_ARRAYOL F01 h Intemal A Input i fA Flicker EARE Programs 00000 Big CJ2H_CPU68_EIP Global Variables Ey Task B 43 Cycle Execution 93 Programming Methods Section 5 3 5 3 Prog
56. E IR DR TK and TR For example D100 is treated as word address D100 e Variables consisting of only numbers are treated as physical addresses For example 100 is treated as the word address CIO 100 2 2 2 Types of Variable The following variable types are supported e Internal Variables VAR Internal variables are used only within an instance They cannot be used pass data directly to or from parameters outside of the instance e Input Variables VAR_INPUT Input variables can input data from parameters outside of the instance The default input variable is an EN Enable variable which passes input condition data e Output Variables VAR_OUTPUT Output variables can output data to parameters outside of the instance The default output variable is an ENO Enable Out variable which passes the instance s execution status e External Variables VAR_EXTERNAL External variables are local variables that are used to access global vari ables They include both system variables that are registered in the NE Programmer in advance as well as user defined local variables When handling I O with variables always define I O as global variables and access the global variables through external variables System variables are registered in advance as external variables User defined global vari 17 Variables Section 2 2 ables are automatically registered as external variables when they are used as operands for instr
57. Edit Jump Previous Jump Point In Ladder Editor returns to the position before the jump F8 Edit Edit Variable Used to edit the selected instruction operand s variable Ctrl Shift C Edit Copy Operand Used to copy the operand only 71 Shortcut Keys Section 4 5 4 5 4 Offline Programming Operations Shortcut keys Menu name LD Insert Open Contact Function Inserts a NO input condition at the specified position LD Insert Closed Contact Inserts a NC input condition at the specified position LD Insert Open Contact OR Inserts an ORed NO condition at the specified position LD insert Closed Contact OR Inserts an ORed NC condition at the specified position LD Insert Coil Inserts an output instruction at the specified position LD Insert Negative Coil Inserts a negative output instruction at the specified posi tion LD Insert Instruction Inserts an instruction at the specified position LD Insert Function Block Inserts a function block at the specified position LD Insert Insert Line Comment Inserts a line comment at the specified position Ctrl Enter LD Rung Select Selects a rung when using the Ladder Editor Ctrl R ST Add Variable Mnemonic Invert e In ST Editor adds the selected text as a variable e In Mnemonic Editor inverts the specified instruction C
58. Edit OK Cancel Click the OK Button The IP address that was input will be displayed in the Browse Network Di alog Box x Select a device that you would like to connect Browse EW BackPlane 0 NE1S_CPUO1_Rev03 0 NE1S CNS21U Gp 15 NE1S DRM21U S amp 192 168 200 100 NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 Refresh Option Gk Cancel Select the IP address of the CPU Unit to be connected Click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed NE Programmer xi t Program will be uploaded automatically from the target controller e Are you sure Click the Yes Button The automatic upload function will be performed after connecting to the specified CPU Unit The following dialog box will be displayed if the auto matic upload function is executed normally NE Froerammer x Completed upload Online Operations for I O Tables Section 7 5 7 5 Online Operations for I O Tables 7 5 1 I O Tables This section describes creating deleting and comparing I O tables online I O tables are tables that list the models and locations of the Units mounted in the PLC The I O tables registered in the CPU Unit are used to allocate I O memory in the CPU Unit to real I O i e Basic I O Units Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units Always create I O tables and register them in the CPU Unit after adding any new Unit to the PLC or after removing any Unit from the PLC 7 5 2 Real I O Tables and Register
59. Error Invalid operand type Address 5 Operand 1 NE1S_GPUO1_RevO3 Error 2 Warning 0 Build A Compare A Find 5 12 3 Compiling 1 2 3 1 Make the program or function block to be checked active i e open it 2 Press the Ctrl F7 Keys Alternately select Edit Compile The program will be checked and any errors or warning generated during compilation will be displayed in the Output Window Display Example EAEE sample pe Checking variables SAA sample pe Compile ee Error Rune No 0 Cannot compile the rune because it h s a invalid function or unrenewed function block isample_pe Error 1 Warning 0 Build Compare A Find 5 12 4 Level Settings for Program Check Use the following procedure to set the level for program checking If level A is set a stricter program check will be performed The default is level A For details on the program check refer to 10 6 8 Program Check 5 12 5 Detailed Build Information There is a tab page for build information in the configuration properties The build information for each element is displayed here when building a program If the program has not been built a message will be displayed to say that the information cannot be displayed and that building the program is required to display the information The display shows the degree to which the user program is consuming the resources of the selected CPU Unit for each element Build infor
60. FTP Server Error SMTP Settings Error SNTP Settings Error Unit IP Address Settings Over IP Routing Settings Error IP Address Duplicate Error IP Address Changes Under Running Ethernet Communications Error Ethernet Communications The following error status is displayed for the Ethernet communications error Errors SMTP Communications Error SNTP Communications Error FINS TCP Connection Error FINS TCP Send Error FINS TCP Receive Error FINS UCP Send Error FINS UCP Receive Error 208 Change Log Section 7 19 7 19 Change Log 7 19 1 Overview NE1S CPU Units Only The change log function cannot be used with CJ2 CPU Units The log data created when downloading editing online creating clearing I O tables or clearing memory can be recorded in the CPU Unit Item Details Save timing Downloading executing online editing creating clearing I O tables clearing memory and changing Timer Counter SVs Number of saved data 100 records records Saved data Time operation download online edit I O table create clear memory clear version author comments 120 bytes Location of saved data Recorded data Flash ROM in CPU Unit Simple backup Supports simple backup operations e The settings can be made to send the data by email when the change log is recorded e Recorded change log entries can be deleted by the user e Recorded log data can also be overwritten during online editing e The change log can b
61. NE Programmer q x The values of retainded variables will be maintained Continue E mo Refer to Preserving the Values of Retained Variables below for details on preserving the PVs of retained variables 3 Select the data to be downloaded and then click the OK Button The selected data selected will be downloaded from the NE Programmer to the CPU Unit The following dialog box will be displayed if the data is downloaded normally x YD Completed download NE Programmer 4 Click the OK Button 185 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data Section 7 6 Preserving the Values of Retained Variables If there are already retained variables in the CPU Unit with the same data type as retained variables in a program being downloaded the retained variables in the CPU Unit can be preserved Note Observe the following precautions e The force set force reset status of automatically allocated variables will not be preserved e The force set force reset status of automatically allocated variables is cleared when the CPU Unit is switched from PROGRAM mode to MONI TOR or RUN mode e If the program is downloaded when automatically allocated variables have been force set force reset the variables may have unexpected force set force reset status after the download is completed We recommend clear ing the forced status of all automatically allocated variables before down loading the program e
62. Network I O variables will be held even if they are set to not be held This list shows various requirements for the PVs of retained variables to be preserved after downloading There is a table following the list with examples for cases 1 to 10 e Variables in the downloaded program are set to be retained and automat ically allocated Variables with address specifications or non retained vari ables are not preserved 1 e The variable names are being used in the program in the Controller before the download 2 3 4 e The variables and data types in the Controller before the download match the ones in the program being downloaded 5 e For structures the data types match for each member Also members are valid even if the member s declaration location changed 6 e For array variables it depends on whether the number of elements in creased or decreased If the number of elements decreased all vari ables will be valid If the number of elements increased only the number of elements before the download will be valid 7 e There are no changes to task allocations or nesting of function block instances 8 9 10 e The variables are not written from another source while the download is in progress 186 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data Section 7 6 When a variable has been overwritten from another application the vari able may be returned to its previous value Status Informat
63. Online via Ethernet Use the following procedures to connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit using Ethernet 1 2 3 1 Select Tool Select Interface Ethernet I F 2 Select Controller Connect Alternately press the Ctrl W Keys The following dialog box will be displayed 170 Connecting Online via Ethernet Section 7 2 Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse a JA Device Information Wendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Option Cancel 3 Click the Refresh Button The network will be browsed and the results of browsing will be displayed as shown in the following figure Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse a Y ie 192 168 250 12 1756 ENBT A p 192 168 250 21 NE1S_21 amp 192 168 250 31 CJ2H_31 4 Click the expand button i e the button for the CPU Unit to expand the options In the following figure 192 168 250 31 CJ2H 31 is selected Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse YY ToP2 192 168 250 12 1756 ENBT A 192 168 250 21 NE1S_21 3 2 192 168 250 31 CJ2H_31 BackPlane 192 168 250 41 Node41 Note With the CJ2 the built in Ethernet port is also called the EtherNet IP Unit on the backplane Therefore the built in EtherNet IP port program name CJ2B EIP21 is given directly under TCP 2 The backplane will be displaye
64. Option to display the Inte grated Options Window click the General Icon and select the Permit a write operation to the Array element with index variable e g A i Option Note An array variable s index value is based on the index value the last time that the value was monitored so a write operation may operate on a different array element if the variable s index value was changed since the last write opera tion 7 12 Changing Timer Counter Set Values When the CPU Unit is online in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode timer and counter set values can be changed with an online editing operation Timer and counter set values can also be changed from constants to external set tings such as a CIO word Work word or DM word Note Before changing a timer or counter set value verify that the change will not adversely effect the system or equipment Supported Instructions Set values can be changed in the following instructions Timer Counter Operation Mode Binary Mode Timer instructions TIMX TIMHX 551 TIMLX 553 TMHHX 552 and TTIMX 555 Counter instructions CNTX and CNTRX 548 The following example procedure shows how to change a timer s set value 1 2 3 1 Monitor the rung containing the timer that will be edited ExeS tate WaitTimer WaitTimer ExeStateReset WaitTimer RbState1 RbState2 OK atl ari i T 1 Vt lt gt 2 Select the TIMX instruction s set value right click and select Set Timer Counter Setting
65. PLC Setup Tab from the Configuration Setting Window The PLC Setup Tab Page shown below will be displayed Setup NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 5 x CF PLC Setup Area 3 Ethemet 9 Build Z 1 0 Table Groups Parameters The current settings are displayed Select the group gt Cru Settings s OM Held isane aa Double click here to Timings SIOU Refresh Unit Settings Communication Settings FINS Write Protection General Settings change the settings Parameters with a g mark cannot be changed Startup Force Status Hold Invalid Startup Operating Mode Program Execution Setting Invalid Basic help is Help displayed on the gt At the time of the startup it specifies s Default Invalid whether 1 0 memory a non holding current parameter domain is held i Returns all P setDetautts parameters to their default settings The default value and setting range for the current parameter are displayed OK Cancel Apply 2 Make all of the required settings and then click the OK Button 6 3 Ethernet Setup Ethernet Tab Page This section describes the setting procedure for the Ethernet Setup For details on Setup for NE1S CPU Units refer to the SYSMAC NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 For details on Ethernet settings for CJ2 CPU Units refer to Appendix F Ether net Settings for CJ2 CPU Units 1 2 3 1 Click the Ethernet Tab from the Conf
66. Page x A Display A Print 2 Color jA edt 2 Mouse Item Setup itt General f a F pa Outline r Preview e Hi Change Variable Internal Input Output 1 E J E a Global External System 0000 00 1 3 ariable Program Check Reset All Cancel Apply The colors can be selected for the following Ladder Editor items The Preview Area displays an example of the selected colors Internal Variable Input Variable Output Variable Global Variable External Variable System Variable Variable Comment etc Option Settings Edit Tab Page Section 4 6 Change Click the Change Button to set the color The Set Color Dialog Box will be dis played Set the colors for the selected Ladder Editor items options eee x Item Setup A Display A Print IA Color A Edt A Mouse H General r Input mode Outline Mnemonic input mode A Add the characters to internal variable automatically H Variable tHe 3 Fda Ladder mS Ko am Mnemonic One key input mode Tr the address to global variable automatically ST In comment inputting Library Program Check Data Trace Reset All Cancel AD Create function block instances automatically Select this option to automatically generate the instance name when a func tion block is pasted in the program The instance name is the function block name
67. Product Code in the key segment did not match the device 0115 Product Type in the key segment did not match the device 0116 Major or Minor Revision information in the key segment did not match the device 0117 Invalid Connection Point 0118 Invalid Configuration Format 0119 Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open 011A Target Application cannot support any more connections 011B RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time 0203 Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out 0204 Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response 0205 Parameter Error in Unconnected Send Service 0206 Message too large for Unconnected message service 0207 Unconnected acknowledge without reply 0301 No buffer memory available 0302 Network Bandwidth not available for data 0303 No Tag filters available 0304 Not Configured to send real time data 0311 Port specified in Port Segment Not Available 0312 Link Address specified in Port Segment Not Available 0315 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 0316 Path and Connection not equal in close 0317 Either Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid 0318 Link Address to Self Invalid 0319 Resources on Secondary Unavailable 031A Connection already established
68. Select Tool Select Interface NE1S Serial PORT to connect to an NE1S series CPU Unit and select Tool Select Interface CJ2 USB Se rial Port to connect to a CJ2 CPU Unit 2 Select Controller Connect Alternately press the Ctrl W Keys The following dialog box will be displayed x Port Type Pot OMRO gt Baud Rate 115200Bi s gt Cancel 3 Select the USB or RS 232C port number for the Serial Port and then click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse o Y EERE Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Option Cancel 167 Connecting via Serial Communications USB RS 232C Section 7 1 4 Click the Refresh Button The CPU Unit and Communications Unit mounted to the CPU Rack will be displayed as shown below Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse y BackPlane 0 PaintLineMasterGPU amp 0 CJ2B EIP21 Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Option 5 Select the CPU Unit and then click the OK Button Note This connection path can be saved See the note at the end of this procedure Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse 2 BackPlane 2 hier amp 0 CJ2B EIP21 Device Information Vendor ID 47 Product Nam
69. Setup 5 1 General m pera dy Outline r Preview IF MSG lt gt THEN MSG Message Comment FB_INST Param1 Param2 END_IF Variable dH VALUE 161234 UALUE2 WORD_TO_DWORD UALUE FB_INST 16816 Error EOF a Library Program Check ES Data Trace Reset All Cancel Apply The colors can be selected for the following ST Editor items The Preview Area displays an example of the selected colors Text Background Error Line Warning Line Error Line Text Warning Line Text Comment Keyword Fixed String Line Feed End of File Function Function Block Instance and Variable Name Change Click the Change Button to set the color The Set Color Dialog Box will be dis played Set the colors for the selected ST Editor items 81 Section 4 6 Option Settings Edit Tab Page xi Item Setup T Display T Color S Edt t 2 General g Outline r Tab length C Iwo character C Four character Ejight character kA Variable GH Fidos Ladder im am Mnemonic Reset All Perform settings for editing operations using the ST Editor Use Auto indent Select this option to automatically indent when performing a line feed while editing programming using the ST Editor default enabled Tab Length Set the tab length to be used when the Tab Key is used while editing program ming using the ST Editor Sele
70. Tab Page of the Error Log Window will be displayed as shown below Error log NE1S_GPUO1 E x Error Error Log Message Ethernet Error IO Table verify error OOE A SIOU Setting error Update Clear e Current errors will also be display on the Error Tab Page of the Error Log Window e Errors that occur after this window has been displayed will automatically be added to the display e The error level of each error fatal or nonfatal will also be indicated 205 Displaying Errors and the Error Log Section 7 18 e The errors that may be displayed as follows Fatal Errors in Order of Priority Memory error I O bus error Unit Rack number duplication error Nonfatal Errors in Order of Priority System error FAL Interrupt task error PLC Setup error I O verification error CPU Bus Unit error Special I O Unit error Battery error CPU Bus Unit setting error Special I O Unit setting error Communications interface error Too many I O error I O setting error Program error Cycle time exceeded error System error FALS 2 Ifan error is displayed first remove the cause of the error 3 Click the Clear Button All error displays will be cleared This is the same function as that executed for Controller Clear Error Errors however cannot be cleared when another Programming Devices has the access right or the CPU Unit is in RUN mode 7 18 2 Displaying the Error log 206 No
71. The global variables will be displayed in the Workspace ix Project i Instructions Workspace SEF CJ2_Project CJ2 mS Data Types Sy Logical POUs Ej Function Blocks E Programs CJ2H_CPU67_EIP ESF Global Variables J Task 5 Cycle Execution I Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 B Interrupt Execution I External Interrupt Tasks 0 H 2 Double click Global Variables in the Workspace The Global Variable Editor will be displayed E Global Sheet Name Data Type Address Initial Value Retain Nonre _ Comment Netwo Nel rig Sa a e o Thervetan Gl Comments Nome 7 Data_O1 DINT 2 12 Nonretain None En 4 gt Global System E System Sheet Address s Comment 0 02 second clock pulse bit BOOL 0s Nonretain 0 1 second clock pulse bit BOOL 0_25 Nonretain 0 2 second clock pulse bit BOOL 1MIN Nonretain 1 minute clock pulse bit BOOL 15 Nonretain 1 0 second clock pulse bit BOOL EQ Nonretain Equals EQ Flag BOOL ER Nonretain Instruction Execution Error ER Flag BOOL GE Nonretain Greater Than or Equals GE Flag BOOL GT Nonretain Greater Than GT Flag BOOL LE Nonretain Less Than or Equals LE Flag x Global System ff System global variables are registered in advance in the System Sheet Sys tem global variables cannot be changed Adding Global Variables 1 2 3 1 Right click on the Global Variable Sheet and select Add from the pop up menu Alt
72. Variable Address Value Background Grid Line Graph Change Click the Change Button to set the color The Set Color Dialog Box will be dis played Set the colors for the selected data trace bit area items CO x Item Setup Bit Area Color E Word Area Color 323 General mr ns ariable Addressi Change RA Dutline Preview A To Variable dH Fis Ladder w ae Mnemonic rv eno ST ig Library Program Check Data Trace i Reset All Cancel i The colors can be selected for the following items in the data trace word area The Preview Area displays an example of the selected colors Variable Address Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6 Back ground Grid Line Change Click the Change Button to set the color The Set Color Dialog Box will be dis played Set the colors for the selected data trace word area items 85 Option Settings Section 4 6 86 SECTION 5 Programming This section provides details on programming Sb OVET EW heck oe eats bee bate dh ee Ea AS ER AA 89 5 1 1 Basic Flow of Programming 000 0 0000 89 5 2 Creating Projects and Logical POUS 0 00 0 0000220 90 5 2 1 Creating Projects 0 0 cee eee eee 90 5 2 2 Creating Logical POUs Programs or Function Blocks 90 5 2 3 Saving Edited Data in the Project 0 00 92 5 2 4 Saving the Projecte eno ienee eee eee ee eee 92 5 2 5 Changing
73. Variable Editor After coding a program or function block always select File Save Changes to project to save the changes to the project Alternately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys Programming Methods Section 5 3 Registering Variables from the ST Editor Variables and data structures are edited with the Variable Editor and Structure Editor but variables can be registered from the ST Editor Use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Select the variable in the ST Editor as shown below by clicking and drag ging 10 for to 5 by 1 do 11 CCRLCount 0 12 end_for 13 if L T_high gt LMT_low then 14 if In lt LMT_low then 15 Out LMT_low 16 CORL1J 1 17 if Out amp 1 1 then 18 CCR O 1 19 elseif Out 0 then 20 CCR 2 1 21 end_if x 2 Right click and select Add Variable The following Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Yariable x Path NE1S_Project_1 POU ST_PROGO1 Variable Count Usage Internal Data Type BOOL Array Size Q Size 2 Byte Initial Value Address Network Variable Network 1 0 Setting None Retain Nonretain Nonretain Comment S 3 Set the parameters and then click the OK Button The variable will be registered in the variable editor Refer to page 103 in 5 3 1 for procedures to use the Edit Variables Dialog Box and the Variable Editor 119 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 5 4 C
74. Variable Editor Refer to Editing Variables later in this section 2 Entering Variables in Variable Editor First The Edit Variables Dialog Box can be displayed by right clicking in the Local Variable Editor and selecting Add or alternately by double clicking the table to enable registering vari ables in the Local Variable Editor Refer to Editing Variables later in this section for information on the Edit Variable Dialog Box The variables that were registered can then be input for operands when in putting instructions Editing Variables This section describes methods for editing variables and variable parameters E Displaying the Local Variable Editor If the Local Variable Editor is not displayed double click the program name or function block name in the Project Window The Local Variable Editor and Ladder Editor will be displayed If the Local Variable Editor is still not displayed select View Variable Editor Visible 103 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Variable Parameter Variable name Data Type BOOL INT 2 3 INT 3 INT 3 BOOL BOOL Name PFI amp Local_vari 0 g t sw01 auto pystart Initial Yalue Retain Nonretain Comment Nonretain Nonretain Nonretain Nonretain First instance execution flag Nonretain Nonretain CS cc iN Intemal Input Output Extemal System Extemal E Editing Variable Parameters 1 2 3 1 Double click the variable to be edite
75. W 592 DECREMENT BINARY 420 SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY B 424 BCD MULTIPLY BL 425 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY MOV 021 MOVE F 456 FLOATING POINT MULTIPLY E MOVL 498 DOUBLE MOVE L 21 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MUI MYVN 22 MOVE NOT E U422 UNSIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY MYNL 99 DOUBLE MOVE NOT UL 423 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY MOVB 082 MOVE BIT 430 SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE MOYD 083 MOVE DIGIT B434 BCD DIVIDE XFRB 062 MULTIPLE BIT TRANSF BL 435 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE XFER070 BLOCK TRANSFER F 457 FLOATING POINT DIVIDE BSET 071 BLOCK SET 1431 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIV XCHG 073 DATA EXCHANGE U 432 UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE XCGL662 DOUBLE DATA EXCHA UL 33 DOUBLE UNSIGNED BINARY DIST 080 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBL 4 656 CONCATENATE STRING COLL 081 DATA COLLECT 400 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOL MOVRG60 MOVE TO REGISTER 6590 INCREMENT BINARY E MOVRW 561 MOVE TIMER COUN B 594 INCREMENT BCD S DataShift BL 695 DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD 4 Debugging L6691 DOUBLE INCREMENT BINAR Z Display B 404 BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY Za Failure Diagnosis BC 06 BCD ADD WITH CARRY 4 File Memory BCL 407 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH C S Floating point Math BL 05 DOUBLE BCD ADD WITHOL Za Increment Decrement LE 0402 SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH C Instructions J Basic I O Unit J a Clock yy Conversion J a Data Control Data ment H H
76. also possible to reuse multiple rungs that have been converted to a library file with the variables used in the rungs Logical POU Types There are two types of logical POUs programs and function blocks 1 2 3 1 Programs Programs are large functional units or units that must be executed at a spe cific time Basically the unit is entirely declared in the user interface 11 Outline of the NE Programmer Section 2 1 2 Function Blocks Function blocks are components of programs and are not executed at a specific time The unit is displayed as a single function in the user interface so only inputs and outputs are declared Logical POU SSH Logical POU Program Function block FB Unit size Large functional unit Functional unit smaller than program Execution timing or Requires execution at Does not require execution at specific time a specific time User interface All disclosed I O only disclosed Executing a Logical The logical POU itself is not an executable unit it is allocated to the configura POU tion PLC first and then can be executed 1 2 3 1 Programs are allocated to tasks in the resources creating a program in stance to become executable 2 Function blocks are copied and pasted into a program creating a function block instance to become executable Logical POU i Configuration PLC Program Resources l Task Dias A execution units Allocate FB instance Copy
77. and ERR ALM indicators on the front of the CPU Unit are both not lit Displaying Errors and the Error Log Section 7 18 7 18 3 Displaying Messages Use the following procedure to display messages generated by the MSG instruction Click the Message Tab in the Error Log Window A message list like the following one will be displayed Error log NE1S_CPU01 x Error Eror Log Message Ethemet Enor Yo Line 1 Running isar All Clear Close e The message numbers will be displayed along with the text of the mes sage e Up to 8 messages will be displayed e The currently selected message will be cleared if the Clear Button is pressed e All messages will be cleared if the All Clear Button is pressed e Double byte codes can be displayed e Messages generated by the FAL and FALS instructions will not be dis played 207 Displaying Errors and the Error Log Section 7 18 7 18 4 Displaying Ethernet Errors Use the following procedure to display Ethernet errors Click the Ethernet Error Log Tab in the Error Log Window Ethernet errors like those shown below will be displayed x Eror Error Log Message Etheret Error Error Status Ethernet detail Communica Q IP Address changes under running Q Ethernet Communication Error SMTP communication error Update Close Error Status The error status is indicated as follows IP Address Settings Error Unit IP Address Settings Error
78. and outputs can also be entered by selecting the input or output icon from the toolbar and advanced instructions can be entered by dragging and dropping the instruc tion from the instruction list Automatic Allocation of I O Memory to Variables Variables can be broadly divided into two categories global variables that are shared within a PLC and local variables that are unique to a program or func tion block Physical memory addresses can be allocated to both global variables and local variables automatically with NE Programmer The automatic allocation of I O memory allows variables to be used in programming without dealing directly with the variables addresses While it isn t necessary to deal with the variables addresses the user can manually specify the physical addresses of global variables if necessary Link from the Network Configurator The NE Programmer can be started from the Network Configurator and data can be transferred between the two Also network variables registered with the NE Programmer can be shared with the Network Configurator It is easy to make network settings using variable names in the Network Configurator by importing and exporting variables in the variable tables Specifications Section 1 2 1 2 Specifications 1 2 1 System requirements Item Hardware NE Programmer Specifications Specifications Computer IBM PC AT or compatible CPU Pentium 300 MHz minimum Pentium 1 GHz min
79. and require less development time E Easy to read Black Box Design The I O operands are displayed as local variable names in the program so the pro gram is like a black box when entering or reading the program and no extra time is wasted trying to understand the internal algorithm 31 Section 2 3 Function Blocks Creating Libraries Compatible with Multiple Languages Function Block Structure Function Block Definition 32 Easily Create Different Processes from a Single Function Block Many different processes can be created easily from a single function block by using input variables VAR_INPUT for the parameters in the standard pro cess parameters such as timer SVs control constants speed settings and travel distances E Reduce Coding Errors Coding mistakes can be reduced because blocks that have already been debugged can be reused E Protect Data The local variables in the function block cannot be accessed directly from the outside so the data can be protected Data cannot be changed unintention ally E Programming with Variables provides Improved Reusability The function block s I O is entered as local variables so the data addresses in the function block do not have to be changed as they do when copying and reusing a program section Processes that are independent and reusable such as processes for individ ual steps machinery equipment or control systems can be saved
80. array can be set A two dimensional array cannot be set OK Cancel For the CJ2 a one dimensional or two dimensional array can be set 2 Setthe 1st Dimension Field and 2nd Dimension Field to a number from 1 to 9 and click the OK Button The variable will be defined as an array as shown in the following figure In this example the numbers of array ele ments are set to 2 and 3 Name Data Type Initial Value Retain Nonretain Comment ROFL BOOL Nonretain First instance execution flag E Local_var1 INT 2 3 Nonretain 0 INT 3 Nonretain 0 INT Nonretain 1 INT Nonretain 2 INT Nonretain m oA e e 0 INT Nonretain g t INT Nonretain 2 INT Nonretain anretain Aa ca A Internal iA Input Output External System Extemal The variable will be one dimensional if no entry is made in the 2nd Dimen sion Field Creating Data Structures A data structure is a variable consisting of elements with different data types that are treated as a single variable The user can define data structures as required The variable name and element names can be specified for specific elements Use the following procedure to create a data structure Inserting a Data Structure 1 2 3 1 Double click Data Types in the Workspace 106 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Project f Instructions EEA CJ2_Project4 C32 Double click here WECRI SS 44 Logical POUs Functio
81. communications port Goes to 0 OFF during execution of network communication and goes to 1 ON when execution ends in either case of correct or error 15 8 A202 Reserved must be 0 Network Com munications Response Code A20300 to A21000 0 during execution of CIP instruction When processing ends the value is stored General Error Code and Additional Error Code are stored in 1 byte of High side and 1 byte of Low side respectively When such an error occurs that can be detected in CPU Unit such as time out or incorrect format its response is stored only in this area Note that it is not stored in the response area 15 87 8 A203 Additional Status PORT 0 15 87 8 A210 Additional Status PORT7 Network Com munications Execution Error Flag A21900 to A21907 Goes to 1 ON when an error occurs during execution of network communication Each bit corresponds to each communications port This status is held until next exe cution of network communication Note that this bit goes to ON when an error occurs during communications no data in response area or when receiving an error response from Target some data in response area 15 8 765432 1 a219 _Reseved mute 1111111 oS D B Moe pe v O O The figure below shows the relation between execution of CSND Instruction and each flag 250 CIP Message Communications Appendix D NW Comm Exe 1 Enable Flag 0 CSND Command lt
82. connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit using Ethernet A Caution If the destination node address IP address is not set correctly the NE Pro grammer may connect unexpectedly to another PLC and invalid device parameters may be set Always verify that the correct PLC is connected before downloading data 7 2 1 Connecting Online via Ethernet There are several methods that can be used when connecting online to the CPU Unit via Ethernet for the first time Here the IP address of the computer will be changed to make the online connection To change the IP address of the CPU Unit i e to match an existing network address after once having connected online to the CPU Unit via Ethernet refer to the manual for the relevant CPU Unit See note 1 2 3 1 Refer to the manual for the relevant CPU Unit for information on the default IP address of an NE1S series CPU Unit or CJ2 CPU Unit See note In this example we will assume the IP address of the computer will be changed to 192 168 200 10 Refer to the user s manual for your operating system for the method of changing the IP address of your computer 2 Connect the CPU Unit and the computer to Ethernet 3 Turn ON the power supply to the CPU Unit Note Refer to the following manuals for the CPU Units NE1S CPU Units SYSMAC NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 CJ2 CPU Units SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W472 7 2 2 Connecting
83. corresponding outputs Input wiring Activate sensors and switches and either check the status of the indicators on the Input Unit or check the status of the corresponding input bits with the Programming Device s Bit Word Monitor operation b Auxiliary Area Settings As Required Check operation of special Auxiliary Area Settings such as the follow ing Output OFF When necessary turn ON the Output OFF Bit A50015 Bit from the program and test operation with the outputs forced OFF Hot Start Set When you want to start operation switch to RUN mode tings without changing the contents of I O memory turn ON the IOM Hold Bit A50012 c Trial Operation Test PLC operation by switching the PLC to MONITOR mode d Monitoring and Debugging Monitor operation from the Programming Device Use functions such as force setting force resetting bits tracing and online editing to de bug the program Note Refer to SECTION 7 Online Operation 11 Saving and Printing the Program 12 Running the Program Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program 1 4 Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units 1 4 1 Improvements in CJ2 CPU Units Compared with NE1S series CPU Units There are differences between using the NE Programmer for a CJ2 CPU Unit in comparison to using it for an NE1S series CPU Unit CJ2 CPU Unit There are differences between these The following points are
84. data to a CSV or text file for use with OPC Server CX Designer or SPU Console Select File Export Variables The Save Dialog Box will be displayed SS 2x Save in 3 NE Programmer vl amp ee E Cds CI SampleData Ci view 1 2 3 1 This option can be selected to output the variable file to the clipboard so that the file can be exported by pasting Plugin Ga Program Sae as type CX Designer Y3 0 Format Files txt X Cancel M To Clipboard 2 Select the file type in the Save as Type Field 3 Specify the location and name of the file to save and click the Save Button The variables will be saved in the specified application s format 1 If CX Designer Format Files txt or SPU Console Format Files txt is selected only global variables with specified physical addresses will be exported 2 With CX Designer V3 0 Format Files txt all global variables will be ex ported regardless of whether a physical address is specified Local vari ables of function blocks will not be exported Note 155 5 14 Printing All kinds of project data can be printed 5 14 1 Page Setup 1 2 3 1 Select File Page Setup Tab page Contents Margin Use to set the page margins in the Top Bottom Left Right Header and Footer Fields Title Setting Use to input the title text and set the number of lines position and font Header Header text can be input in the Left Center or Right Fields
85. ee oxi Sin 8 fo sake BO A DOM ee a ae eel deen 81 4 6 7 Library Window 0 0 0 eee eee eee 82 4 6 8 Program Check Window 00 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 83 4 6 9 Data Trace Window 0 eee ee eee 85 59 Starting the NE Programmer Section 4 1 4 1 Starting the NE Programmer 1 2 3 1 To start the Network Configurator select Start Program OMRON Con trol amp Network Support Software v3 NE Programmer NE Program mer The following initial window will be displayed File Edit Yiew Build Controller Library Tool Window Help aSH a eSB seBxloo MAA S foo o1 O RARER S SOs 6 gt KAlaw O cl s 88 o e eek e ae ee 66 sleele eS so Bata os os oe Bie ksateeooe s 7 See Olas e ECLA Project S Instructions variable Name tem Content aJt Watch AWa 4 mj Ready ompo tooupus c12 cPUxx 115200 Bit s O off line Ns Num 2 Select File New Project The following New Dialog Box will be dis played The dialog box for creating a new project will be displayed as shown in the following figure New x Project fea CJ2 Project Name IEI NEIS C 2 aN Input the project name in the right side On the left side select one of the following Controllers e CJ2 CJ2 CPU Unit e NE1S NE1S series CPU Unit 60 Main Window Section 4 2 4 2 Main Window This section describes
86. ey a ee aa ed Ae eye 31 SECTION 3 Tnstallationiveg 45 See oe eh we hae ee bee Shee eeetekee SL 3 1 Installation Preparations sonat eese ee o EEE RAR EE EERE R E ences 52 3 2 Installing the NE Programmer 0 0 ee eects 52 3 3 Installing the USB Driver 0 cc cece eee 55 SECTION 4 Outline of Operations and Functions of the NE Programmer 59 4 1 Starting the NE Programmer 0 0 cece eee eens 60 422 Main Window nostres aeania n e A hoe HE a eee et eee ee 61 4 3 Project WindOW wie Seeks ols ee he ha PR SSL AN A a iah ee Wd a A tee 62 4 4 Men Item Lists esec neiet ot Us eee ae a apis tre dad hide Dedede d 63 4 5 _ Shortcut Keysin ier 3 a0 eee tka ea oy aie Sh EEEE 70 4 6 Option Settings o s Foes ete woe ea Gea eG ee ad eda ee Wee talent gs 73 SECTION 5 Programming 0s 3iasiedesetidautesivedde ketene 7 S I SOVERVICW sei wieder ast hes a aed ee ES el ad Pa eee ge as 89 5 2 Creating Projects and Logical POUS 0 2 ccs 90 5 3 Programming Methods oerien rori arita ee eee cnet ene 94 5 4 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs 0 120 5 5 Read Protection for Logical POUS 0 2 0 0 0 e eee cece eee nee 127 vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 6 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks 000 5 7 Editing Comments 5 8 Search Replace Function nnssencsusscrnrerrurs e eens 5 9 Cross Reference Functi i sr
87. file e The added text file can be opened from the Properties Window for the registered rung group right click on the rung group and select Properties Add Delete 3 Input the name of the part and any other required items and then click the OK Button The part will be registered in the library and displayed in the Library Win dow as shown below Eh Library 353 Local Library gs Startup 5 10 5 Registering Folders in the Library 1 2 3 1 Right click the Library and select Map Folder x Local Library 146 Using the Library Section 5 10 The following Browse Folder Dialog Box will be displayed Select a folder f Desktop A My Documents 1 42 my Computer my Network Places i Cancel New Folder 2 Select the folder to be added and then click the OK Button The specified folder will be added to the library tree 5 10 6 Using the Library POUs Programs and Function Blocks Program sections and function blocks can be inserted in projects 1 2 3 1 Right click the program or function block and select Add to Project The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed 4 9 Insert the selected parts to the program s Are you sure 2 Click the Yes Button e If the POU contains a global variable the following Setting Prefix Suffix for Global Variables Dialog Box will be displayed e Use this dialog box to attach prefixes and suffixes to
88. is executed It is created by default N Intemal A Input Output A Extemal System Extemal Ladder Editor FB Variable Editor This completes creating a function block 120 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 5 4 2 Programming a Function Block The procedures for programming the contents of a function block are the same as those described in 5 3 Programming Methods Note Refer to 2 3 Function Blocks for information on the function of function blocks 1 2 3 1 As an example ladder diagram program will be used to create a function block for the following flicker rung Variable name Data type VAR VAR VAR_INPUT VAR_INPUT VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT o stat tims J VE timb 2 Select File Save Change to project Alternately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys The function block will be saved in the project A program cannot be assigned to a function block unless the function block has been saved in the project Reference Information Grouping Input Variables or Output Variables for Function Blocks When a function block is pasted into a program with the procedure described later in this section the program can be very difficult to read if there are too many input variables in the operand input box or too many output variables in the output operand box The following procedure can be used to simplify the display and use one input variabl
89. its body program To Upper Layer Jumps from the body program of a function block to the location that called the function block Variable Editor Upper Changes the Variable Editor s position to the top default position effective the next time the Variable Editor starts Variable Editor Right Changes the Variable Editor s position to the right side effective the next time the Variable Editor starts Variable Editor Lower Changes the Variable Editor s position to the bottom effective the next time the Variable Editor starts Variable Editor Left Changes the Variable Editor s position to the left side effective the next time the Variable Editor starts Variable Editor Visible Displays hides the Variable Editor Monitoring Data Type Monitor in Alt Shift H Displays the items registered in the Watch Window in hexadecimal Hex Monitoring Data Type Decimal Displays the items registered in the Watch Window in decimal Monitoring Data Type Signed Displays the items registered in the Watch Window in signed deci Decimal mal Monitoring Data Type Binary Displays the items registered in the Watch Window in binary Number Monitoring Data Type Auto Displays the items registered in the Watch Window to match the data type Zoom In Magnifies the program display Zoom Out Reduces the program display Zoom to Fit Fits the program display to the window width
90. jumping in programs 140 K key customization 95 keywords 223 L ladder programming 94 connecting lines 101 deleting lines 102 editing instructions 100 inputting differentiated conditions 101 inputting NC conditions 96 inputting NO conditions 95 inputting outputs 97 inputting special instructions 98 libraries 16 library registering folders 146 registering rung groups 145 registration 144 suffixes and prefixes 148 using 142 147 line comments 137 Line Deletion Mode 102 lines deleting horizontal lines 102 deleting vertical lines 102 inputting horizontal lines 101 inputting vertical lines 101 link path 231 local variables 13 registering and deleting 103 logical POUs 10 creating 90 M memory clearing 204 messages displaying 207 mnemonic input 96 monitoring 189 Index N NE Programmer menu list 63 starting 60 NEIS serial port 175 NT Links maximum unit number 279 O object model 229 one key input 95 online connection 167 online editing 199 function block parameters 203 restrictions 49 online operation 165 operand numbers inputting 110 operands copying 64 operating mode changing 189 operating procedure basic 5 operation checking operation 5 testing 6 operators 223 Outline Window 150 output variables 28 P parameters outline 34 password 184 physical addresses 25 222 converting to variables 111 converting to v
91. local vari ables Always Enabled Network I O Setting This property cannot be changed for local vari ables Always None Retain Nonretain Specify whether to maintain the value of the variable when power is turned OFF and ON and when operation is started Retain or Nonretain Comment Input a comment for the variable Note 256 characters max 1 When the Cross Reference Pop up Window has been displayed by se lecting View Window Cross Reference Tool a variable s cross ref erence information program address instruction name program name etc can be displayed just by selecting that variable in the Variable Editor 2 Refer to 2 2 Variables for detailed variable specifications E Inserting Variables 1 2 3 1 Right click the line at which to insert a variable and select Insert from the pop up menu Alternately double click an empty row The Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Set the parameters of the Variable and then click the OK Button The variable will be inserted E Deleting Variables 1 2 3 1 Select the variable to be deleted and press the Delete Key 2 A dialog box will appear to confirm the deletion Click the Yes Button The variable will be deleted Specifying Arrays Arrays can be used to handle an array as a group of data elements with the same properties To create an array variables set the Array Size in the Edit Variab
92. of Inputs for Instructions Use the following keys to input execution conditions Execution condition Upward differentiation Downward differentiation Immediate refreshing Use the following inputs to specify instructions Spaces are indicated by LDU variable_name ORL variable_name ANDLI variable_name LDNOTL variable_name 108 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Instruction Input ORNOT ORNOTU variable_name ANDNOT ANDNOTU variable_name OUT OUTL variable_name OUTNOT OUTNOTL variable_name ILD LDL variable_name AND ANDLI variable_name IOR ORLI variable _name ILDNOT LDNOTU variable _name IANDNOT ANDNOTU variable _name LD LDL variable_name AND ANDU variable_name OR ORLI variable _name LD LDU variable_name AND ANDU variable_name OR ORL variable_name I LD LDL variable_name I AND ANDLI variable_name I OR ORL variable_name IOUT OUTUI variable _name IOUTNOT OUTNOTU variable _name TIMER TIMX TIMXLItimer_number_ 10 set_value or 16 set_value COUNTER CNTX CNTXLlcounter_number_ 10 set_value or 16 set_value Special Instructions executed each instruction_loperand_loperand_loperand scan Upwardly differentiated instruc instruction loperand_ operand_loperand tions Downwardly differentiation instruc instruction loperand_loperand_loperand tions Immediate refresh instruct
93. of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment Omron Compa nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environ ments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty See http www omron247 com or contact your Omron representative for pub lished information Limitation on Liability Etc OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Omron is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products Without limiting the foregoing B
94. parameter settings and user program such as the ladder program for proper execution in trial operation Always check the program before transferring it Z Caution Always clear the memory of a CJ2 CPU Unit before downloading programs the PLC Setup or the I O tables from the NE Programmer If the memory is not cleared before downloading the data unexpected operation may occur in the controlled system Note 1 Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected before changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit 2 Valuable programs may be lost if the direction of program transfer is not correct Double check the transfer direction before transferring data Perform all of the following operations online Before starting connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit 7 6 2 Uploading Use the following procedure to upload any of the following from the CPU Unit to the NE Programmer Program PLC Setup Ethernet settings and I O tables 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Upload from Controller A confirmation dialog box will be displayed asking if you want to save the project NE Programmer x Save changes to Unknown y No Cancel 2 To save the current project click the Yes Button enter the project file name and then click the Save Button 2 x Save in Z Prog z 4H c EJ Save as type NE Programmer Project File nlx Me Cancel A 183 Uploading Downloading and Compa
95. password for this program Old Password New Password Reenter Password Cancel Input the password and then click the OK Button Input the current password into the Old Password Field leave the New Pass word Field and Reenter Password Field blank and then click the OK Button Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data Checking the Password at Upload 7 6 3 Downloading 1 2 3 Section 7 6 The following dialog box will be displayed to check the password if an upload protection password has been set and the password does not match when it is checked The password will be verified when upload is performed from the Controller or verification is performed with the Controller Confirm Password This program has a upload protect password Please enter the password Password OK Cancel Use the following procedure to download any of the following from the NE Pro grammer to the CPU Unit Program PLC Setup Ethernet settings and I O tables 1 Select Controller Download to Controller The following dialog box will be displayed xl Target ma BfPrograms O PLC Setup Area O Ethernet Settings O 41 0 Table 2 Select the data to be downloaded and then click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed if there are already retained vari ables in the CPU Unit with the same data type as retained variables in a program being downloaded
96. path is described as follows 01 13 02 09 01 00 A variable to be accessed to is Var_A and it is described as follows 91 05 56 61 72 5F 41 00 Shown below is the parameter setting for CSND Instruction Service Code and Service Data are described in S data Link Path and IOI variable name are described in C data The received response is stored in D data S Data S 0004 Request Data Size unit byte S 1 004C Service Code S 2 0100 Service Data 256 CIP Message Communications Appendix D C Data C 000A Reception Buffer Size unit word when area of 10 words is specified C 1 0300 Set 3 in Communications Port No of CSND Instruction C 2 0000 Reserved 0000 fixed C 3 0000 Service Execution Monitoring Timer usually O000 C 4 8004 Set 1 in the top bit Describe the size of Variable Name in the unit of word C 5 9105 Describe Variable Name according to the method above C 6 5661 Va C 7 725F a ee C 8 4100 A Variable Name ends here C 9 0003 Describe Link Path Size in the unit of word C 10 0113 Describe Link Path according to the method above C 11 0209 C 12 0100 Link Path ends here When S data and C data are set up and the CSND instruction is executed received data is stored in D The execution result is stored in General Status area For the details refer to the General Status Code on page 268 In some ca
97. provided before attempting to use the NE Programmer Contents NE Programmer Describes the operating procedures of the NE Programmer Also Operation Manual this manual describes programming and program elements as well as differ ences and restrictions depending on the operating environment SYSMAC NE1S Series Provides an outlines of and describes the design installation NE1S CPU01 maintenance and other basic operations for the NE1S series Programmable Controller PLC Also provides information on how to use the NE Program Operation Manual mer NE1S CNS21U Describes the use of the NE1S series ControlNet Unit ControlNet Unit Operation Manual NE1S DRM21U Describes the use of the NE1S series DeviceNet Unit DeviceNet Unit Operation Manual CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Describes the use of CS CJ NE1S series EtherNet IP Units CJ2H CPULILI EIP EtherNet IP Unit Operation Manual CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware Provides hardware information for the CJ2 CPU Units Users Manual CJ2 CPU Unit Software Provides software information for the CJ2 CPU Units Users Manual This manual contains the following sections Precautions provide general precautions for using the NE Programmer and related devices Section 1 introduces the NE Programmer provides NE Programmer specifications and provides the basic operating procedure It also outlines the differences between the NE1S and the CJ2 CPU Units Section 2 describes the stru
98. statements e Selection statements CASE and IF statements e Iteration statements FOR WHILE and REPEAT statements e Arithmetic operators e Logical operators e Comparison operators e Comments e The TIMER and COUNTER data types cannot be used e Use parentheses to indicate the priority of arithmetic operations Example Var_D Var_A Var_B Var_C e Tabs and spaces can be used to indent text The following online editing operations cannot be performed on the user pro gram in the CPU Unit e I O variables cannot be added deleted or changed e Internal variables cannot be deleted or changed e FB body names cannot be changed e FB instance names cannot be changed e FB instances cannot be added e Comments cannot be edited 1 Internal variables can be added but there are restrictions on the variables that can be added 2 Global variables can be added If a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit while a function block definition is being executed ladder program execution will stop at the point where the error occurred Program FB definition Instance name Body 0 0 FB 10 0 LD ew EN ENO Fatal error occurs here D100 AAA BBB D200 MOV AAAIBER 49 Function Blocks Section 2 3 In this case the MOV AAA BBB instruction will not be executed and output variable D200 will retain the same value that it had before the function block was executed 50 This section
99. that address is used as the task num ber For example to enter a TASK ON instruction with task number 3 input TKON 10 8 If TKON 3 is input the content of CIO 0003 is used as the task num ber 5 3 6 Converting Specified Physical Addresses to Variables Note 1 2 3 If a ladder program was created with physical addresses instead of variable names and global variables for the physical addresses were added later the physical addresses in the program can all be converted to global variables at once In that case global variables will be automatically added to external variables Example Application This function is useful when a program is created first with physical addresses and then corresponding variable names are later assigned altogether 1 If there is a physical address duplication error build error the conversion will not be performed because the replacement global variable cannot be determined 2 A global variable will not be replaced if there is another kind of variable local variable in the ladder program or external variable with the same name as the global variable Procedure 1 Select File Configuration Replace physical addresses in programs or right click a Global Variables in the Project Window and select Replace physical addresses in programs from the popup menu A dialog box will be displayed to confirm that the physical addresses in the program will be replaced by the specified variables C
100. that all represent the same kind of system component A class is a generalization of an object All objects in a class are identical in form and behavior but may contain different attribute values Instance A specific and real physical occurrence of an object For example NewZealand is an instance of the object class Country The terms Object Instance and Object Instance all refer to a specific Instance Attribute A description of an externally visible characteristic or feature of an object Typically attributes provide status information or govern the operation of an Object For example the ASCII name of an object and the repeti tion rate of a cyclic object Service A function supported by an object and or object class CIP defines a set of common services and provides for the definition of Object Class and or Vendor Specific services Designation of Object Address This is the concept to access to Object or Attribute Each Object Class has Class ID There are two types of Class ID one is standardized by ODVA and the other is decided independently by each device vendor Each Object Instance also has ID This is called Instance ID Different Instance ID is assigned to each Object As for Object Class standardized by ODVA Instance ID is given to it according to the ODVA method On the other hand vendor s own Instance ID is decided independently by the vendor Each Attribute also has Attrib
101. the Enter Key Either Id or LD may be input Inputs for all other instructions are not case sensitive Variable names are also not case sensitive even though they are regis tered with the case that is input Regardless of the case that is displayed variables are not case sensitive Example The following all specify the same variable abc Abc and ABC Example Id sw01 An instruction input box will be automatically displayed when the instruction is input from the keyboard When the Enter Key is pressed the NO condition and variable will be dis played as shown below and the cursor will move to the next cell to the right 1 On the Ladder Editor move the cursor to the cell where the NC condition is to be input Programming Methods Inputting Outputs Coils Using One key Input 1 2 3 1 2 3 Section 5 3 Press the Forward Slash Key The Edit Contact Dialog Box will be displayed it contact Exi I z Edit gt gt ok Cancel Enter the variable name and press the Enter Key or click the OK Button Example auto The Edit Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Press the Enter Key or click the OK Button after inputting a comment or leaving the entry blank In this example the Enter Key is pressed with the entry left blank As shown below a NC input condition and the variable name will be dis played and the cursor will move to the next cell on the right On the Ladder Editor move the cur
102. the Controller Series 00 000 92 5 3 Programming Methods 0 0 eee eee eee 94 5 3 1 Ladder Diagrams 0 0 0 94 5 3 2 List of Inputs for Instructions 0 0 000000 108 5 3 3 Inputting Bit and Word Addresses 000 109 5 3 4 Inputting Constants seess eseuen errur ee eee 110 5 3 5 Inputting Operand Numbers 0 0 0 0 00000 110 5 3 6 Converting Specified Physical Addresses to Variables 111 5 3 7 Support for Converting to Physical Addresses 111 5 3 8 Programming in Standard Text Language 116 5 4 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs 120 5 4 1 Creating Function Blocks 0 00 00 02s eee 120 5 4 2 Programming a Function Block 0000 121 5 4 3 Pasting Function Blocks into Programs 123 5 4 4 Editing the Function Block Body after Pasting 126 5 4 5 Moving to the Function Block Body Internal 127 5 5 Read Protection for Logical POUS 0 002 rreren 127 5 6 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks 129 5 6 1 Creating a Configuration 0 00 0 00 0000 0000 129 5 6 2 Creating and Editing Global Variables 131 5 6 3 Pasting Programs into Tasks 000000000005 133 5 6 4 Checking External Variabl
103. the Window Width Select View Zoom to Fit or Alt 1 The Zoom to Fit Icon in the toolbar can also be clicked Displaying and Hiding the Grid The Ladder Editor grid can be displayed or hidden Select View Grid Changing the Input Mode The input mode can be selected when bits or instructions are selected The two following input modes can be used 1 Mnemonic input mode 2 One key input mode default Select Tools Option and perform the setting in the Edit Tab Page of the Ladder Dialog Box that will be displayed 94 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Assigning Keys for One key Input Inputting NO Conditions Using One key Input 1 2 3 Key Customization Shortcut key 4 The following keys are assigned for one key input by default S LD Menu Qe Insert open contact Qe Insert closed contact es Insert open contact OR s Insert closed contact OR Qe Insert coil Re hsert negative coil e Insert instruction es Insert function block s Insert line comment Qe Select mode am 9O0x E40 m gt s Normally open contact mode xl Default Setting Cancel Keys assigned for one key input can be changed as desired by using the Key Customization Window Select Tool Key Customize to access this window On the Ladder Editor move the cursor to the cell where the NO condition is to be input Press the C Key Lowercase can also be used All other inst
104. the cursor will move to the beginning of the next line sw2 am ph i a MOW J J 1 021 DataNo01 Speed01 1 2 3 1 Move the cursor to the cell to the right on the input conditions of the line in Using Mnemonic Input Mode which to input the instruction 2 From the keyboard input instruction space variable_name_of_operand repeated space variable_name_of_operand for each operand required by the instruction and then press the Enter Key The instructions and operand variables will be displayed in the rightmost cell as shown below and the cursor will move to the beginning of the next line Example mov DataNo01 Speed01 am phot MoV 21 DataNo01 Speed01 Inputting Special Special instructions can also be added to the program by dragging and drop Instructions from the ping them from the Function Window onto the Ladder Editor Funcion Window The following two display methods can be used for the Function Window e Categorized display categorization e Alphabetical display ascending alphabetical order 99 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Editing Instructions 100 1 2 3 The display method can be switched by right clicking the Instructions Tab in the Function Window and selecting View Classified or View Alphabetical e Classified e Alphabetical OS Project Sa Instructions OS Project i Instructions nstructions 410 SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
105. the main functions of the Main Window Title Bar l N Variable Editor Toolbar Main Menu Project Window Outline Window Ladder Editor ij samp _forNE1S NE Programmer PneumaticSystem Multi_PG_LD z laj x ga Eile Edit View LD Variable Build Controller Library Tool Window Help a x ASHAR eK o a H t o a fo z eaaa as 22 al VAA AlE BE S gt gt S amp is e a Plat Sates sae cot wes i fae E Jee oe e fs Z ASS i oles 4 Name Datatype a Initial value Retainy G mment B UB Project Fu Instructions J Outline Multi_PG_LD g Multi_Fe_sTo01 Multi_FB_ST Nonretain Ts Workspace h Q FB_In_Out_allooo FB_In_Out_All Nonretai EHER PreumaticSystem NE15 st_local_array st_struct 2 Nonretg I Data Types out BOOL Nonrefain S NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 4 Global Variables Internal A External A System External ean Mio FEL CCO wise PE syo ux aE Task recece i 5 a T Cycle Execution t R B Cycle Execution Tas Library Window d m A 000 FisherTecl v gt ix EB Local eee beds Library J Local Library xl Name Address omment x x Item Contents 5s_Man_Tur 4 2 AN Watch AWatchigh V N Buil Compare Fin _ gt EH NE15_CPUONRev03 ms omro TooLeus Ag2 CPUxx 115200 Bit s Watch Window Ready Z off ine ins ium Cross Reference Popup Window Property W
106. to import CSV files created on external Program ming Devices Excel etc 1 2 3 1 Either select Variable Import CSV Format from the Menu Bar or right click the Local Variable Editor or Global Variable Editor and select Import CSV Format from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed Import from variable i 2 x Look in Sy NE Programmer vl e c E CI SampleData Local Library C Plugin C Program Fenm Files of type CSV Format csv v Cancel 4 2 Specify the location and name of the file and click the Open Button The variables will be imported Exporting CSV Files Variable data can be saved in CSV flies for use on external Programming Devices Excel etc 1 2 3 1 Either select Variable Export CSV Format from the Menu Bar or right click the Local Variable Editor or Global Variable Editor and select Export CSV Format from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed Export to variable 2 x Save in 0 ex EB lt a NE Programmer OS E SampleData Config view File name CS1Ww AD081 V 1 csv Cancel A 2 Specify the location and name of the file to save and click the Save Button The variables will be saved in a CSV file Save as type CSV Format csv he 154 Importing and Exporting Section 5 13 Exporting in OPC Server CX Designer or SPU Console Format Use the following procedure to save variable
107. to store the result from a ladder program s SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE instruction The result from the instruction is D quotient and D 1 remainder This method can be used to obtain the remainder from a division operation in ladder programming Note When ST language is used it isn t necessary to use an array to receive the result of a division operation Also the remainder can t be calculated directly in ST language The remainder must be calculated as follows Remainder Dividend Divisor x Quotient Specifying External Variables or Physical Addresses for Function Blocks Specify either the external variable or the physical address to enable reading or writing of Auxiliary Area bits within the algorithm i e within the execution cycle in the function block Auxiliary Area bits can also be used to receive and pass I O variables Example Using Communications Port Enabled Flags A20200 to A20207 in Function Blocks The function block input variables are executed by referencing the items copied to the instances when the func tion block is called The Communications Port Enabled Flags turn ON OFF asynchronously with the program execution When these bits are referenced as input variables in a function block the Communications Port Enabled Flags are copied to the Instance Area when the function block is called After copying even if the value is changed prior to referencing the Communications Port Enabled Flags detection is
108. types of monitoring e Monitoring status and present values on the Ladder Editor e Monitoring present values of specified variables or addresses in the I O memory of the CPU Unit in the Watch Window The following operations are used in the above monitoring windows e Status PV Monitor e Force ON Force OFF e Differential Monitor detecting ON to OFF and OFF to ON transitions in bit status e PV Change e Program Change while Monitoring Refer to 7 14 Online Editing e Timer Counter SV Change Refer to 7 14 Online Editing Confirm safety sufficiently before starting to monitor status or PVs on the Lad der Editor or in the Watch Window Operating errors e g of shortcut keys that result in forcing ON or OFF bits or turning ON or OFF bits may result in operating errors in the controlled system connected to Output Units regardless of the operating mode of the CPU Unit Relationship between Monitoring Types and Operations Operation Type of monitoring Operating mode of Ladder Watch CPU Unit Editor Window Status PV Monitor All modes Force ON Force OFF All modes except RUN Differential monitor All modes PV Change for timers counters I All modes except O areas DM Area or EM Area RUN Online editing Including Timer All modes except Counter SV Change RUN 189 Monitoring Section 7 8 7 8 2 Starting Monitoring Functions When the NE Programmer is connected online to a CPU Unit monitoring will
109. variable VAR that is not being retained i e when the Retain Option not selected An initial value cannot be set for an internal variable if the Retain Option is selected Internal variables that are not being retained will be initialized to O The initial value will be set regardless of the value of the IOM Hold Bit A50012 Auxiliary Area control bit Initial value IOM Hold Bit A50012 ON Initial value is set OFF Initial value is set Local Variable Usage Types E Input Variables VAR_INPUT Input variables pass arguments to the instance from the outside The input variables are displayed on the left side of the instance When an instance is called the value of the input source data contained in the specified parameter just before the instance was called will be passed to the input variable P_On FB NO H EN ENO O DO D100 PV cv The value of the parameter specified as the input value of DO is passed to the instance s input variable PV Example 0 0 ADD_INT_DINT 10 0 EN ENO i f SIGN IN16 tmp i D1000 i __IN16 OUT32 L IN32 tmp OUT32 i i i D20 TD i i Variable table IN16 is an INT variable so the content of D100 is used IN32 is a DINT variable so the content of D200 and Usage mame a ype D201 is used Input EN BOOL Input IN16 INT Input __ IN32 DINT Output ENO BOOL Output OUT32
110. which to search A list will be displayed to show the instructions in which the variable or ad dress at the cursor is used as shown below In this example the cursor is located over the variable RbStat2 Deletes records from the log This button will be grayed out if Click to register the contents of the Cross there are no records Reference Window in the log pate Name Address Program Address Instruction POU Name _ Path A RbStat2 29 ANDNOTII BB21 RB1 NEIS POU BB21 RBI LD FbStat2 32 ANDNOT BB21 RB1 NE1S POU BB21 RBI LD FbStat2 33 ANDO BB21_ RB1 NE1S POU BB21 RBI LD Click to go to the previous or next records These buttons will be grayed out if there are no records Click to jump to the instruction Note When some of the function block s I O variables have been grouped the Cross Reference Pop up Window will display all of the cross reference infor mation for the group members Also when an array variable is displayed the Cross Reference Pop up Window will display all of the cross reference infor mation for the other array variables with the same variable name 5 10 Using the Library 5 10 1 Overview 142 Logical POUs programs or function blocks and groups of rungs can be saved as library files so that they can be reused 34 Local Library F Re i Stagell g5 startup As shown above programs function blocks and rung groups one or more rungs can be stored an
111. 0 wrap around lines per program section Function block connections are allowed within that range AND or OR conditions can be entered at the instance s left side either the EN input side or the input parameter side FBJhstancel c EN FB Body Eno BOOL BOOL In Out 43 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Input parameters can also be connected together 4 FB_Instance2 E EN FB Body ENO BOOL BOOL h1 Out An AND or OR condition can be inserted between function blocks as shown in the following diagram On the other hand instructions cannot be inserted between parameters as explained in Restrictions on Placement of Instances A FB Instance C FB Instance E FB Body ENO EN FBBody2 ENO BOOL BOOL Outt h1 Instructions cannot be inserted Restrictions on Placement of Instances There are some restrictions on the placement of instances in the program Connecting an Output Bit An output bit cannot be connected to an output parameter to an Output Parameter A FBstancel c EN FBBody gyo m BOOL BOOL E Int Connecting an Instruction A special instruction cannot be connected to an ENO output and output to an ENO Output and parameter Output Parameter FB_Instancel gn FB Body Eno Connecting an Instruction to Output Parameters F B Body ENO 44 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Connecting an EN Input with an Input Parameter Connecting an ENO Output with
112. 000 09 IndexTabl FisherTech OMtr_UnloaderCy 0000 06 Unloader FisherTech OSol_LoaderPusherAdy 0000 03 LoadeO FisherTech OSol_LoaderPusherRet 0000 02 LoadeO FisherTech OSol_ProcessCenterPushe 0000 01 Processor FisherTech p OSol_UnloaderPusherddy 0000 08 Unloader FisherTech OSol_UnloaderPusherRet 0000 07 Unloader FisherTech ON Always ON Flag LD 1 FisherT ech ON Always ON Flag LD 1 FisherT ech ON Always ON Flag LD 1 FisherTech Close nA e Click the Export Button to save the contents of the report as a CSV file After closing the Variable Reference List Dialog Box you can jump to the instruction by double clicking the text output to the Output Window Setting the CPU Unit Clock Section 7 23 7 23 Setting the CPU Unit Clock Use the following procedure to synchronize the CPU Unit s clock with the per sonal computer s clock 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Set Clock The following Time Dialog Box will be dis played Time CJ2H_CPU65_EIP Computer Date 5 10 2008 vw Time 5 30 00PM V Set specific date and time Controller Date 5 10 2008 Time 5 30 00 PM a 2 Click the Setup Button The CPU Unit s clock will be synchronized with the personal computer s clock The CPU Unit s clock can also be set by setting the Date and Time fields in this dialog box and then clicking the Setup Button 7 24 Forcibly Releasing the Access Right The access right t
113. 0E 31 89 32 2E 31 36 88 2E 31 30 30 2E 33 30 At this point the EtherNet IP Unit of CPU 2 has been reached The Link Address of the CPU Unit on the backplane is 0 and so the Link Path for this part is 01 00 Joining the two Link Paths above results in the following complete Link Path 01 13 12 OE 31 39 32 2E 31 36 38 2E 31 30 30 2E 33 30 01 00 Designation of Variable Name ANSI Extended Symbol Segment of Data Segment is employed for designating Variable Name Example 1 A variable of ABCDE is designated by the following description The last part 00 is the padding for making the number of bytes an even number 91 05 41 42 43 44 45 00 Example 2 The whole structure of an array variable is the same as in Example 1 The whole of an array variable ABC 10 is as follows 91 03 41 42 43 00 242 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example 3 An element of an array variable is treated as a member of Instance Member ID of Logical Segment is employed for describing Instance Member An element of an array variable ABC 3 is described as follows 91 03 41 42 43 00 28 03 Example 4 For describing a member of a variable of the structured data type ANSI Extended Symbol Segment is employed for every dot which divides members of a structure ABC DE is described as follows 91 03 41 42
114. 10 0 to 10 4294967295 16 bit data 16 bits 16 0000 to 16 FFFF 32 bit data 32 bits 16 00000000 to 16 FFFFFFFF Real number 32 bits Conforms to IEEE754 Character string data 128 bytes or ASCII data 127 characters Timer See note 1 1 bitor 16 bits 16 0 16 1 or 16 0000 to 16 FFFF Counter See note 2 1 bit or 16 bits 16 0 16 1 or 16 0000 to 16 FFFF Note 1 When a variable is entered in the timer number 0 to 4095 operand of a timer instruction such as TIMX or TIMHX the data type will be TIMER When this variable is used as an operand in another instruction it will be treated as the timer Completion Flag if the operand takes 1 bit data or as a timer PV if the operand takes 16 bit data The timer PVs are 16 bit bi nary data because NE Programmer uses only the binary format for the PVs The TIMER data type cannot be used in ST language function blocks 2 When a variable is entered in the counter number 0 to 4095 operand of a counter instruction such as CNTX or CNTRX the data type will be COUNTER When this variable is used as an operand in another instruc tion it will be treated as a counter Completion Flag if the operand takes 1 bit data or as a counter PV if the operand takes 16 bit data The counter PVs are 16 bit binary data because NE Programmer uses only the binary format for the PVs The COUNTER data type cannot be used in ST language function blocks 2 2 5 Array Elemen
115. 1900 to A21907 and 0000 hex in Network Communications Response Code A203 to A210 reads C and starts the communications processing CIP Instruction Issue Response Reception 2 Inthe peripheral service processing data to be sent is created based on the operand See note 1 and CIP Instruction to the Communications Units are issued 3 If the issue processing is not completed in one peripheral service that processing will be executed by time slice in the next communications port service 4 When a response is returned the response data specified by the operand is updated in the peripheral ser vice See note 2 At this moment Network Communications Instruction Execution Enable Flag A20200 to A20207 of the special auxiliary relay goes to 1 ON and Network Communications Execution Error Flag A21900 to A21907 and Network Communications Response Code A203 to A210 are updated Note 1 Incase of CSND Instruction it reads S and creates an optional CIP Instruction 2 In case of CSND Instruction D is updated with CIP Response 251 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Read Service by Variables Predefined Data Type Shown below is the case that the data type of a variable is INT WORD UINT UDINT DWORD BOOL REAL Service Code 4C hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004C D 4 Type 00 2 0100 D 5 Data Type Data Type Code of a variable which was read Refer to the following
116. 25 3MB Add Remove Windows L DAR Components 6 69MB Hi Set Program Access and Defaults 6 69MB 1 17MB ros NET Fram 2 0 Serv 189MB a Compone ts crosoft Int liPoint 5 2 Sie 5 82MB Welcome to the Control Network Support up Maintenance program This program lets you modify the curent installation Click one of the options below g Modify Select new program features to add or select currently installed features to remove Se Reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup Femove E Remove all installed features 3 Click the Remove Button and then click the Next Button Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its features No 4 Click the Yes Button The software will be uninstalled When uninstallation is completed normal ly the Maintenance Complete Window will be displayed 5 Click the Finish Button 54 Installing the USB Driver Section 3 3 3 2 3 Upgrading Software Versions Use the following procedure to upgrade the version of the NE Programmer Installing an Update Install the updated version without uninstalling the existing software 1 2 3 1 The updated version is provided as an executable exe file so either of the following methods can be used to execute the update file e Double click the file and click the OK Button e Select Run from the Start menu browse and select the
117. 43 00 91 02 44 45 243 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Data Access for NE1S Series CSND Instruction Overview of CSND Instruction For NE1S Series variable data can be accessed to by using CSND Instruction CSND Instruction is an instruction to send receive a message of CIP CSND Instruction has three parameters S data D data and C data Service data to be sent and transmission control information such as address are set up in S data and C data respectively When CSND Instruction is executed received response data is stored in D data FUNC No Mnemonic Instruction Name Overview of Function 489 CSND CIP Transmission Instruction Instruction to send CIP Explicit Message Execution Condition Immediate Refreshing Specification Execution Condition Execute cyclically every time it goes to ON CSND Execute 1 cycle at rising up CSND Execute 1 cycle at falling down Not supported Immediate Refreshing Specification Not supported CSND 489 Data to be sent Data received Control data S Data Details Offset word S Data Size to be sent S 1 Service Code S 2 Service Data ih ee ae J Data Size to be sent Data Length of Service Code and the following data unit byte Service Code CIP Explicit Message Service Code Service Data Service Data of Explicit Message Service of CIP Content is differ ent for each Service Code Service Data i
118. C 9 C 10 C 11 C 12 C 13 C 14 C 15 C 16 C 17 C 18 0008 Request Data Size unit byte 004D Service Code C300 Data Type Code C3 0100 No of Elements 1 Data Data to be written 000A Reception Buffer Size unit word when area of 10 words is specified 0000 When Communications Port No of CSND Instruction is set to 0 0000 Reserved 0000 fixed 0000 Service Execution Monitoring Timer usually O000 8005 Set the top bit to 1 Describe the size of Variable Name in the unit of word 9107 Describe Variable Name according to the method above 5661 Va 725F or 494E IN 5400 T Variable Name ends here 0008 Describe Link Path Size in the unit of word 120E Describe Link Path according to the method above 3139 19 322E 22 3136 16 382E 8 3230 20 302E QO 3333 33 Link Path ends here When S data and C data are set up and CSND Instruction is executed received data is stored in D data The execution result is stored in General Status area For the details refer to the following General Status Code In some cases not only General Status Code but also Additional Status Code may be added If no Additional Code exists 0000 is stored D Data D D 1 D 2 D 3 260 0006 00CD 0000 0000 Response Data Size unit byte Service Code The
119. CPUO1 1 1 ms Gq Savine 2 If the CPU Unit and NE Programmer do not contain the same program and error message will be displayed and online editing will not be possi ble 3 To may major corrections to the program or to move rungs edit the pro gram offline and then download it to the CPU Unit 4 Do not edit the program in a way that would cause the maximum cycle time set in the PLC Setup to be exceeded If the maximum cycle time is exceeded a cycle time exceeded error will occur and operation will stop If a cycle time exceeded error occurs operation will stop e To start operation again switch to PROGRAM mode and then return to RUN or MONITOR mode If a cycle time exceeded error persists do the following e Change the program or increase the maximum cycle time setting e Perform the operation to clear error displays The CPU Unit will stop for a short period of time when any of the following instructions is inserted or deleted JMP JME or END 5 Refer to 7 15 Clearing Errors and 7 18 Displaying Errors and the Error Log for information on clearing error displays 6 There must be at least one END instruction in a program Leave at least one END instruction in the program when performing online editing 200 Online Editing Section 7 14 7 14 2 Online Editing Procedures The following example shows how to input an OR using online editing 1 2 3 1 While monitoring the program display the rung where online e
120. CTION FROM ROL LDN gt ARRAY TO SUB ST AT END_TRANSITION MUL STN lt gt CASE TRUE MOD S amp OF TYPE EXPT R VAR_SYSTEM ELSE END_TYPE ABS ANDN CHANNEL END_CASE VAR SQRT AND FI CONFIGURATION END_VAR LN ANDN END_CONFIGURATION VAR_INPUT LOG ORN CONSTANT VAR_IN_OUT EXP OR EN VAR_OUTPUT SIN ORN ENO VAR_EXTERNAL COS XOR EXIT VAR_ACCESS TAN XORN FALSE VAR_GLOBAL ASIN XOR 225 Structured Text Keywords Appendix B F_EDGE VAR_TEMP ACOS XORN FOR WHILE ATAN ADD BY END_WHILE USINT_TO_DINT ADD DO WITH BOOL_TO_BYTE SUB END_FOR ANY SEL MUL FUNCTION ANY_NUM MIN DIV END_FUNCTION ANY_REAL MAX DIV FUNCTION_BLOCK LREAL LIMIT GT END_FUNCTION_BLOCK REAL MUX GT IF ANY_INT T GE THEN SINT GE EQ ELSEIF INT EQ NE ELSE DINT LT LE END_IF LINT NE LE INITIAL_STEP USINT LEN JMP END_STEP UINT LEFT JMPNC PROGRAM ULINT RIGHT JMPC WITH UDINT MID CAL END_PROGRAM ANY_BIT CONCAT CALNC R_EDGE BOOL INSERT CALC READ_ONLY BYTE DELETE RET READ_WRITE WORD REPLACE RETNC REPEAT DWORD FIND RETC UNTIL LWORD SR END_REPEAT STRING RS RESOURCE ANY_DATE SEMA Function ON DATE_AND_TIME R_TRIG sti 226 Classification Conditions Flags Appendix C External Variables Greater Than or Equals GE Flag External variable in NE Programmer P_GE Data type Address CF00 Not Equals NE Flag P_NE CF001 Less Than or Equals LE Fla
121. Card while it is being accessed Press the Memory Card power button and confirm that the BUSY indicator goes out before removing the Memory Card e The user program is stored in nonvolatile memory and operation is possi ble even if the Battery voltage has dropped or a Battery is not installed Operation will not be stopped for a memory error Data in the DM and EM Areas however will not be stable without a Battery that is fully charged If data from the DM or EM Areas is used to control outputs from the program used the Battery Error Flag to control outputs or perform other measures to ensure safety SECTION 1 Introduction This section introduces the NE Programmer provides NE Programmer specifications and provides the basic operating procedure It also outlines the differences between the NE1S and the CJ2 CPU Units 1 1 NE Programmer Introduction 0 0 0 ce eee ee eee eae 1 1 1 What Is the NE Programmer 20 0 e ee eee eee 1 1 2 NE Programmer Features 0 00 cece eee eee 122 gt SpeCACatOns se rrna wees owls WO aE Sale ae ae wai aE ach tees Hed 1 2 1 NE Programmer Specifications 0 000000 nt A NNN 1 3 Basic Operating Procedure 0 0 0 cee eee 1 4 Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units 6 1 4 1 Improvements in CJ2 CPU Units Compared with NE1S series CPU Units 6 1 4 2 Restrictions for CJ2 CPU Units Compared with NE1S series CPU Un
122. Comment Nonretain Nonretain Nonretain Nonretain Nonretain Nonretain vari Comments ar2 Comments e Clicking the Edit Button Input the variables for each operand in the Edit Operand Area Once the variables for the operands have been set move the cursor to the field that has an instruction input and press the Enter Key MOV 1 MOV 021 MOVE STRING Description Transfers a word of data to the specified word m Edit Operand Source Destination Variable Data Type Comment Yarl X Address 115 Programming Methods Section 5 3 3 The Edit Variable Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Enter a com ment for the variable Edit variable comment x Yarl Commentd Cancel MOV 021 MOVE STRING r Description Transfers a word of data to the specified word Edit Operand Description Operand Source Destination Variable Data Type Address Comment 4 Automatically created variable names and input comments will be dis played in the Variable Editor and Ladder Editor Name Data Type Initial Yalue Retain Nonretain Comment a Q sw01 BOOL Nonretain auto BOOL Nonretain g start BOOL Nonretain g Vari UINT Nonretain Varl Comments Q ar2 UINT Nonretain Var2 Comments Intemal A Input Output Extemal System Extemal x Mov ba OK Cancel k MOV 021 MOVE STRING Descripti
123. Communications Settings Appendix E Z CautionFor information on how to make serial port settings refer to the CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W472 Serial Port Port Mode Settings Default SYSWAY Tool bus SYSWAY Serial gateway NT Link 1 N Serial Port Data Length Settings 7 bits 8 bits Default 7 bits Serial Port Stop Bits Settings 2 bits 1 bit Default 2 bits Serial Port Parity Settings Parity Even Parity Odd Parity None Default Parity Even Function This setting determines which serial communications mode will be used for the USB port Function These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link These settings are also valid only when USB Port Port Settings is set to Manual Function These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link These settings are also valid only when USB Port Port Settings is set to Manual Function These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link These settings are also valid only when USB Port Port Settings is set to Manual Serial Port Baud Rate bps Settings 300 600 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 Default 9 600 278 Function Refer to the CPU Unit manual to set the appropriate baud rate for the mode to be used Related flags and words Related flags and words R
124. Ctrl Shift W Disconnects from the CPU Unit Change Controller Changes the device to which the connection is made eliminates the need to disconnect Change Controller Changes the controller type Auto Upload from Controller Ctrl Shift A Automatically finds the connected PLC and communications condi tions connects the PLC online and uploads the program Upload from Controller Ctrl Shift T Used to upload the program PLC Setup TCP IP settings and I O tables from the PLC to the computer Download to Controller Ctrl T Used to download the program PLC Setup TCP IP settings and I O tables from the computer to the PLC Compare with Controller Compares the programs on the computer and in the PLC System Configuration Used to set up the PLC Operating Mode Program Moni tor Run Ctrl 1 Ctrl 3 Ctrl 4 Changes the PLC s operating mode Monitor Ctrl M Starts the monitor Backup value of variables Saves the present variable values to a CSV file Restore value of variables Restores saved variable values from a CSV file I O Table Create Creates the real I O tables I O Table Delete Deletes the registered I O tables The CPU Unit will operate with the real I O tables I O Table Compare Compares the real I O tables and registered I O tables Clear Error Clears an error Clear Memory Cle
125. DINT Note 1 The same variable name cannot be assigned to an input variable VAR_INPUT and output variable VAR_OUTPUT If it is necessary to have the same variable as an input variable and output variable register the variables with different names and transfer the value of the input vari able to the output variable in the function block with an instruction such as MOV 2 When the instance is executed input values are passed from parameters to input variables before the algorithm is processed Consequently val ues cannot be read from parameters to input variables while the algorithm is being processed If it is necessary to read a value within the execution cycle of the algorithm do not pass the value from a parameter Assign the 27 Variables 28 Note Section 2 2 value to an internal variable and use an AT setting direct allocation of a physical address Initial Value When you set an initial value for an input variable VAR_INPUT that value will be written to the variable when the parameter for input variable EN goes ON and the instance is executed for the first time and that one time only If an initial value has not been set for an input variable the input variable will be set to 0 when the instance is first executed EN Enable Variable When an input variable VAR_INPUT is created the default input variable is the EN variable The instance will be executed when the parameter for input variable EN is O
126. EIP Bly CJ2H_CPUGE_EIP Configuration Name CJ2H_CPU6S_EIP ily CJ2H_CPU64_EIP Select the CPU Unit Cancel Select the CPU Unit The CPU Units displayed here are the CPU Units for the series selected when the project was created The figure above applies to a project with a CJ2 CPU Unit Input the configuration name and then click the OK Button The new con figuration will be displayed in the Workspace x a Project oe Instructions Workspace SEF CJ2_Projecta CJ2 mS Data Types B 44 Logical POUs 8 Function Blocks t Programs iy CJ2H_CPU68_EIP 5 Global Variables 3 4 Task B 43 Cycle Execution J Cycle Execution Tasks 0 1 Interrupt Execution I External Interrupt Tasks 0 I Power OFF Interrupt Task I Scheduled Interrupt Tasks I External Interrupt Tasks 4 C 1 0 Interrupt Tasks 100 12 I Extermal Interrupt Tasks 1 lt Configuration This completes creating a configuration 129 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks Section 5 6 Changing the CPU Unit Type PLC Type 1 2 3 1 To change the type of CPU Unit select Controller Convert Controller The following Convert Controller Dialog Box will be displayed xi Present Controller Model Name CJ2H_CPU68_EIP Vendor OMRON Corporation Product Code 19 Revision 1 01 New Controller Model Name eUmB Eas Vendor OMRON Corporation Product Code 18 Revision 1 01 Cance
127. END CIP COMMAND Instruction CSND the network path can be specified in the instruction s control data The I O memory of another PLC in the network can be accessed through a variable by specifying the network path and variable name Specifying the Network Path Specify the network as shown in the following table Target device Specifying the network path for a SEND CIP COMMAND Instruction CSND Backplane 01 hex Specifying a Unit mounted to the local CPU Unit Specify the unit address in hexadecimal For a CPU Bus Unit specify the unit number 10 hex Specifying the network port Ethernet port e g 02 hex Specifying a Unit in the network Specify the network node address in hexadecimal Specifying the other PLC s CPU Unit 00 hex unit address Example Specifying the path from the local CPU Unit to a local variable in another CPU Unit in a ControlINet Network 4 Specify the ControlNet 2 Specify the ControlNet Unit s unit address Unit s node address 1 Specify the Backplane 5 Specify the Backplane Local CPU Unit 6 Other CPU Unit CotrolNet 3 Specify the port Local CPU Unit 1 Backplane 3 Port 5 Backplane 6 Other CPU Unit 2 ControlNet Unit s unit address 4 ControlNet Unit s node address 236 CIP Message Communications Specification method Example 1 Backplane Appe
128. END_STRUCT END_STRUCT END_TYPE END_TYPE VAR VAR VarA stA VarA stA END_VAR END_VAR Number of array ele BOOL VarA 3 BOOL VarA 3 ments is different VarA 0 VarA 0 Retained VarA 1 VarA 1 Retained VarA 2 Not retained BOOL VarA 3 BOOL VarA 3 VarA 0 VarA 0 Retained VarA 1 VarA 1 Retained VarA 2 Not retained 187 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data Status Task allocation was changed Information in program downloaded information Cyclic task 0 to 127 0 WarA Information in Controller information before download Cyclic task 0 to 127 1 VarA Section 7 6 PV status after download Not retained FB instance name was changed Cyclic task 0 to 127 0 InstA VarA Cyclic task 0 to 127 0 InstB VarA Not retained FB instance nesting was changed 7 6 4 Comparing 1 2 3 188 Cyclic task 0 to 127 0 InstA VarA Cyclic task 0 to 127 0 InstA InstB VarA Not retained Use the following procedure to copy any of the following between the NE Pro grammer and the CPU Unit Program PLC Setup Ethernet settings and I O tables 1 Select Controller Compare with Controller The following dialog box will be displayed x r Target ica O PLC Setup Area O Ethernet Settings O 510 Table 2 Select the data
129. EXTERNAL e Function Block Internal variables VAR input variables VAR_INPUT output variables VAR_OUTPUT and external variables VAR_EXTERNAL Program Function Block Program Receive data Function Block Pass data Parameter Input Output Parameter variable variable Internal variables Internal variables not displayed External variables External variables not displayed Reference Reference Global variables Global variables e Internal variables VAR are used only in the logical POU they do not exchange values with external parameters and cannot reference external global variables e External variables VAR_EXTERNAL are special variables used within the logical POU to reference global variables outside of the POU Input variables VAR_INPUT exist only in function blocks and are used to receive the values of external parameters e Output variables VAR_INPUT exist only in function blocks and are used to pass values to external parameters 14 Outline of the NE Programmer Section 2 1 Note Global Variables Note Even if local variables are defined with the same name in different logical POUs they are treated as different variables and allocated different physical addresses Variables defined at the configuration level and shared by all logical POUs are known as global variables Global variables provide an interface between logi cal POUs T
130. Editor 1 2 3 1 Open the Ladder Editor to be searched 2 Press the Ctrl F Keys Alternately select Edit Find The Find Dialog Box will be displayed Find what x Input the search string Search Object Variable Name Match case I Hold the previous Search object J Search all tasks Hie conter Aior p Direction Fl Sesh ANEA Up Down Select the object to search Note When the CPU Unit is connected online a search operation was executed in the Ladder Editor and you want to search through all tasks select the Search all tasks in this configuration Option If you want to search only the active tasks select the Search active tasks during online Option 3 Set the range to be searched the text string to search for and the search conditions and then click the Find Next Button e If the text string is found the line in the Variable Editor containing it will be highlighted selected e Press the F3 Key to find the next occurrence e Press the Shift F3 Keys to return to the previously found location Jumping to a Variable Declaration from the Ladder Editor When a variable is selected in the Ladder Editor the NE Programmer can jump directly to that variable s declaration position in the Variable Editor 1 2 3 1 Select the variable in the Ladder Editor 2 Select Edit Jump Jump Variable Define The NE Programmer will jump to the same variable name in the Variable Editor Replacing i
131. Footer Footer text can be input in the Left Center or Right Fields 5 14 2 Printing 1 2 3 1 Select File Print Printer 2 a vean Name OKI MICROLINE 1035PS v Properties JT Data Types Status EET Aw oa POUs Type OKI MICROLINE 1035PS ae E Boo Jocke Where ML354FD2 l Bf pou_3_ST_FBlye Comment J Print to file E Programs Bly NE1S_CPUO1_RevO3 Print Range p Copies 0S Global Variables All Number of copies fi C PLC Setup Area 13 Ethemet Setting Pages from 1 to es 4 Build Setting 1 2 EIG M Collate ogs 1 0 Table i 2 Select the item to be printed in the Project Workspace at the left side of the Window The contents of data types logical POUs programs or function blocks global variables PLC Setup Ethernet settings build settings I O tables or Custom Keys can be printed Note If read protection is set for a logical POU program or function block a protection icon will be displayed and it will not be possible to select the logical POU for printing Note Sub items can be added or removed from the print job by right clicking the item and selecting or removing the sub items such as ladder diagrams or variable types in the popup menu 5 14 3 Print Preview 1 2 3 Click the Preview Button at the bottom of the Print Window or select File Print Preview from the Menu Bar 156 SECTION 6 PLC System Configuration This section describes the conf
132. Function Blocks 2 3 3 Function Block Specifications 0 000 2 3 4 Instance Specifications 00 00 e eee eee eee 2 3 5 Restrictions on Function Blocks 000 10 10 11 13 15 16 16 16 17 18 19 20 24 25 25 26 26 29 30 30 31 31 36 37 39 47 Outline of the NE Programmer 2 1 2 1 1 Section 2 1 Outline of the NE Programmer Project Structure The NE Programmer is an integrated development environment for next gen eration PLCs It supports the programming specified in the IEC 61131 3 stan dard All of the data is created in a single file known as a project file from an inte grated development environment A project is composed of logical POUs Program Organization Units and the configuration The logical POUs become executable when they are allocated in the configuration PLC sys tem Project file Logical POU Program Organization Unit Configuration l Allocat Resources l ed for execu Program Program Program Global variables Library file LIB Programs FBs Rung groups Local variables Local variables Local variables Program Organization Units Logical POUs 1 2 3 Program organization units logical POUs include the following elements 1 Programs 2 Function Blocks FB All kinds of POUs are programmed entirely with variables Variables are auto
133. ICE Sao Paulo SP Brasil e 55 11 2101 6300 www omron com br Santiago 56 2206 4592 OMRON ELECTRONICS MEXICO SA DE CV HEAD OFFICE OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES Apodaca N L e 52 811 156 99 10 e mela omron com 56 2206 4592 Z918 E1 01 Note Specifications are subject to change 2008 Omron Electronics LLC Printed in U S A
134. N The initial value will be set regardless of the value of the IOM Hold Bit A50012 E Output Variables VAR_OUTPUT Output variables pass return values from the instance to external applications The output variables are displayed on the right side of the instance After the instance is executed the value of the output variable is passed to the specified parameter 1 0 P_On FB k EN eno C_ Do__ py es The value of the output variable CV is passed to the parameter specified as the output destination which is D100 in this case Example 0 0 ADD_INT_DINT 100 i Algorithm Body J ENO OEN D100 E pa i SIGN IN16 tmp m6 om D200 IN32 N H L IN32 tmp OUT32 Variabletable O F Usage Name Type OUT32 is a DINT variable so Internall tmp ae the variable s value is passed input EN BOOL nput _ IN16 INT to D1000 and D1001 ee NL utput ENO BOOL Output ouTs2 DINT Like internal variables VAR the values of output variables VAR_OUTPUT are retained until the next time the instance is executed Example In the following example the value of output variable CV will be retained until the next time the instance is executed Product A counter CTD cD Q LD pv cv 2150 1 The same variable name cannot be assigned to an input variable VAR_INPUT and output variable VAR_OUTPUT If it is ne
135. ONTROL EN ENO 1047_ ON_TIME 10 8 OFF_TIME The same instance name can be used at multiple locations in the program if internal variables VAR are not used or processing will not be affected even if internal variables VAR are used in the multiple locations Function block definition nstance Example conn CASCADE Algorithm gt Algorithm internal and 1 0 Variables Seip The same instance can be used at multiple locations Cyclic task Qo ane P_On CONTROL 10 EN ENO _ PARA_1 10 13 PARA_2 1 10 10 CASCADE P_On CONTROL 11 tH EN ENO 10 50 PARA_1 10 15 PARA_2 In this case the same memory area will be used so some precautions are required For example if an instance containing a timer instruction is used in more than one program location the same timer number will be used causing output bit duplication and the timers will not function properly if both instruc tions operate at the same time 2 3 2 Restrictions in Variables in Function Blocks The following table shows the number of local variables that can be used and the kind of variable that is created by default for each of the variable usages Variable usage Input VAR_INPUT Allowed number Up to 64 per func tion block not including EN Variable created by default EN Enable Receives an input condition
136. Paste a Ml Creating a Logical POU in NE Programmer After creating an NE Programmer project select File New from the menus and input the POU name in the dialog box for creating a new POU Set the POU Type to either Program or Function Block Note To paste a function block in a program i e to create an instance the func tion block must be saved Once the function block has been saved by select ing Save Changes to project from the menu its icon will appear in the Project Explorer Bar and the icon can be dragged and dropped into the desired program 12 Outline of the NE Programmer Section 2 1 2 1 3 Variables With the NE Programmer the user does not give I O memory addresses known as a physical addresses directly when specifying addresses in the CPU Unit when programming making communications settings or monitor ing Variables are used to specify I O memory addresses in the CPU Unit Monitoring Creating program Setting cyclic commu nications allocations Variable a Variable b Send variable m Receive variable n ae ae a laal JE EE NF If the user has entered a variable in the variable table the created variable is automatically allocated a physical address in the CPU Unit s I O memory It is not necessary for the user to know which physical addresses have been allo cated Variable tabl
137. S series CPU Unit 3 Inputting the Project Name If the name NE1S is acceptable click the OK Button To change the project input the project name and then click the OK Button 4 The following will be displayed in the Project Window G5 Project ne Instructions Workspace EMEA C 2_ProjectB CJ2 IS Data Types Logical POUs BJ Function Blocks E Programs Project This completes creating a project 5 2 2 Creating Logical POUs Programs or Function Blocks Use the following procedure to create logical POUs programs or function blocks 1 2 3 1 Right click the Logical POUs in the Project Window and select Create POU Alternately select File New POU The following New Dialog Box will be displayed 90 Creating Projects and Logical POUs Section 5 2 LL xl E Logical POU Project POU Name urce P OO o CS I Addy Type Program Function Block Language LD Ob C FBD Cf ST SFC Cancel 2 Input the program name in the POU Name field 3 For Type select Program Note If Function Block is selected a new function block will be created 4 For Language select the desired language Select LD to program a ladder diagram or ST to program in standard text 5 Click the OK Button The logical POUs that are created will be displayed under Logical POUs in the Project Window Also a Ladder Editor and Local Variable Editor will be displayed for the program that w
138. SCLIO 2 16 0300 the same as specifying i 3 16 4000 the start address mov i 10 0 SCL 1 mov 160300 Set data in array variables SCL 2 k mov 16 4000 SCL 3 _ i _ sci t Specify the beginning of the array in S the SCL instruction SCL O D 23 Variables Setting the Property Note 2 2 6 Setting the Property Contents Bit data Data type Section 2 2 e Input the number of elements 1 or more in the Array Size Field in the Edit Variables Dialog Box If the Array Size Field is set to 0 the variable will not be an array e When entering the local variable name specify the subscript in square brackets after the local variable name Example When BOOL variable a is defined as an array with 8 array ele ments the 7 element of variable a can be input as the operand bit by inputting LD a 7 e For two dimensional arrays CU2 CPU Units only double click the Array Elements Row and input the number of two dimensional elements 1 to 9 Basically an array is used when the starting address or end address of mul tiple words is specified for an instruction operand The data cannot be passed using a parameter because parameters pass values Prepare a local array variable of the required size set the data in the array in the function block def inition and specify the start or end of the local array variable for the oper and For details on using arrays to specify the starting e
139. Unit 2 Change the Controller series CPU Unit series and convert the project from one for a NE1S series CPU Unit to one for a CJ2 CPU Unit 149 Outline Window Note Section 5 11 3 Initial settings may become disabled or other operation may change when the series is changed Therefore debug the programming and verify oper ation after converting to a project for the CJ2 CPU Unit 4 Register the library items as library items for the CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2 projects cannot be converted to NE1S projects Therefore CJ2 CPU Unit library items cannot be used in projects for NE1S series CPU Units 5 11 Outline Window 5 11 1 Outline Window Note Option Settings The Outline Window displays an outline of the logical POU program or func tion block that is being edited Jumping to any instruction in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor is possible by clicking it in the Outline Window x Yap Outline lt sample_pe 000001 FlickerO01 Flicker 000002 fb_exec 000004 Conveyer_st 000010 flag01 sample 3 000011 900013 Temp_Alarm gt 000016 start_line lt 000019 alarm As shown above line comments outputs function blocks rung groups the interlock instruction and the END instruction are displayed in the Outline Win dow For structured text only the line comments and function blocks are displayed in the Outline Window Display items in the Outline Window and the timing of o
140. Value from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed TIMER COUNTER Setting x Variable or Address Literal O 00001 X J Show Global Variables and External Variables 3 Change the variable or address value and click the Apply Button The set value will be changed The timer set value can be changed repeatedly un til the Close Button is clicked 7 13 Differential Monitor ON to OFF and OFF to ON transitions in bits can be detected online from the Ladder Editor and Watch Window 198 Online Editing Section 7 14 1 2 3 1 Right click the variable for differential monitoring in the Watch Window or Ladder Editor and select Differential Monitor from the popup menu The Differential Monitor Dialog Box will be displayed Differential Monitor NE1S_GPI x Address or Variable name Cycle Execution Tasks 40 1270 Run Differentiation Monitor V Sound 2 Select the Differentiation Up Down and then click the Start Button When the differentiation condition is met the display will change as shown below for an Up condition Differential Monitor NEIS GP x Address or Variable name Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 0 Run Differentiation Monitor f Up C Down M Sound i Close 7 14 Online Editing 7 14 1 Online Editing When the CPU Unit is online in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode multiple lad der rungs can be edited simultaneously from the Ladder Editor while monitor ing status Not
141. Word C 5 91 09 C 6 41 72 C 7 72 61 C 8 79 44 C 9 61 74 C 10 61 00 Example 2 Response Data Word D 4 C3 00 Data D 15 Data Ar tyn ra yp P a a In case that an array variable with ten INT type elements ArrayData 10 exists and that you access to the 3rd element of this array variable ArryData 2 Service Code 4C hex Request Data Word S 1 004C S 2 0100 Control Data Word C 5 91 09 C 6 41 72 C 7 72 61 C 8 79 44 C 9 61 74 C 10 61 00 C 11 28 02 Response Data Word D 4 C3 00 D 5 Data E tap yD oe a 28 hex Logical Segment Member ID is specified 02 hex Member ID 2 The 3 member is specified 253 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Write Service by Variables Predefined Data Type Shown below is the case that the data type of a variable is INT WORD UINT UDINT DWORD BOOL REAL Service Code 4D hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004D D 4 None S 2 Type 00 3 0100 S 4 Data to be written S 5 Type Data Type Code of a variable which was read Refer to the following Data Type Code Data to be written Set the data to be written in order from the lower byte to the upper byte Structure The situation is a little different for structured variables In case of a structured variable it has to be confirm
142. a 1 1 W051 MOV 021 16 3139 Cdata 12 W052 MOV 021 16 322E Cdata 13 W053 MOV 021 16 3136 Cdata 14 W054 MOV 021 16 382E Cdata 15 W055 MOV 021 16 3230 Cdata 16 W056 KickSW A202 00 MOV 021 16 302E Cdata 17 W057 MOV 021 16 3333 Cdata 18 W058 CSND 489 Sdata 0 wooo Ddata 0 W020 Cdata 0 W040 END 001 263 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Data Type Data Type Code No Data Type Name Code Description hex OMRON Specific Data Type for Timer Instruction in which UP flag and Present Counter are involved COUNTER OMRON Specific Data Type for Counter Instruc tion in which UP flag and Present Counter are involved BOOL Logical Boolean with values TRUE and FALSE TRUE 01 hex FALSE 00 hex INT Signed 16 bit integer value DINT Signed 32 bit integer value UINT Unsigned 16 bit integer value UDINT Unsigned 32 bit integer value REAL 32 bit floating point value WORD bit string 16 bits DWORD bit string 32 bits STRUCT Structured variable STRING String of letters Data Placement The data placement for each data type is described below The data placement differs between the CPU Unit memory and the data sent and received using the CSND instruction Be sure to reorder the data when sending or receiving data with the CSND instruction BOOL Data CPU Unit D
143. a CPU Unit con nected to the same Ethernet network as the CPU Unit that is currently con nected 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Change Controller The following dialog box will appear if there is any unsaved data NE Programmer xjl Save changes to Unknown No Cancel 2 Click the Yes Button and save the data on the NE Programmer if the data is required Click the No Button is the data is not required e The Browse Network Dialog Box will be displayed x Select a device that you would like to connect Browse BY TCP 2 ERA 192 168 200 200 NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 192 168 200 100 NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 Refresh Option OK Cancel e If the IP address of the CPU Unit to be connected is not displayed click the Refresh Button 3 Select the IP address of the CPU Unit to be connected 4 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed NE Programmer a zi t Program will be uploaded automatically From the target controller e Are you sure No 5 Click the Yes Button The automatic upload function will be performed after connecting to the specified CPU Unit The following dialog box will be displayed if the auto matic upload function is executed normally YD Completed upload 178 Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected Section 7 4 7 4 3 Changing to a CPU Unit on a Different Network Use the following procedure to change the connection to a CPU Unit con nected to an Ethernet
144. a Instruction comment set to one line Variable comments Speed set to one line Name Data Type Array Size Initial Value Retain Comment g sw0l BOOL Nonreta Variable Comment 4 7 Variable comment gy auto BOOL Nonreta Note 1 Variable comments and instruction comments can be displayed or hidden and the number of display lines can be displayed on the Options Dialog Box displayed when Tool Option is selected 136 Editing Comments 5 7 2 1 2 3 5 7 3 1 2 3 5 7 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 Section 5 7 Inputting Variable Comments Double click the variable to which a comment is to be added on the Vari able Editor The Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed Edit ariable Internal x Path CJ2_ProjectA POUSPROG_O1 Variable S Data Type BOOL Array Size Q Size 2 Byte Initial Value Address Network Variable Network 1 0 Setting None Retain Nonretain Nonretain Comment Double click here Cancel Double click the comment field Editing the comment will be enabled Input the comment and then click the OK Button In addition to the method described above comments can be input by using the support for converting variables to physical addresses For information on that method refer to 5 3 7 Support for Converting to Physical Addresses For display examples refer to 5 7 1 Overview for display examples 2 Inputting Instruction Comments
145. a for Variables Setting Default Setting range Timer Start Address 1 024 0 to 4 095 Timer Variable Size 3 072 0 to 4 096 Counter Start Address 1 024 0 to 4 095 Counter Variable Size 3 072 0 to 4 096 General Settings IR DR Area Shared Between Tasks Independent Independent or share 6 5 I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page This section describes the setting procedure for the I O table settings For details on I O allocations for NE1S series CPU Units refer to the SYS MAC NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 For details on I O allocations for CJ2 CPU Units refer to the CJ2 CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W473 I O table settings can be perform online mostly to create the I O tables or they can be performed offline e g editing the I O tables The I O setting procedures for both online operation and offline operation are described in this section 6 5 1 Online Operations Creating Deleting Comparing Creating I O Tables 1 2 3 Deleting I O Tables 1 2 3 Comparing I O Tables 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to create I O tables 1 Select Controller Connect to connect online to the PLC 2 Select Controller I O Table Create The real I O tables will be created Use the following procedure to delete I O tables 1 Select Controller Connect to connect online to the PLC 2 Select Controller I O Table Delete The real I O tables will be delete
146. a network path e Save The connection path is displayed from the last time that the NE Program mer was connected In this case the window in step 5 is displayed when step 3 is completed so you can connect online to the last network path just by clicking the OK Button Use the following procedure to set this option 1 2 3 1 Click the Option Button in the lower right corner of the Browse Network Di alog Box The following window will be displayed option ae x Browse response wait time m ms Browse data Clear C Save Input address after auto scan on ethernet Disable C Enable Cancel 2 Select Clear or Save in the Browse data Area and click the OK Button Note To connect online to an NE1S CPU Unit on a different segment use the fol lowing procedure to input the IP address directly 1 Click the Option Button in the Browse Network Dialog Box The following dialog box will be displayed option ae x Browse response wait time J Browse data Clear C Save Input address after auto scan on ethernet Disable C Enable Cancel 2 Select Disable in the Input address after auto scan on ethernet Area and then click the OK Button 172 Connecting Online via Ethernet Section 7 2 3 Click the Refresh Button in the Browse Network Dialog Box 4 5 7 2 3 Ethernet Setup The following Browse Address Dialog Box will be displayed along with the IP addresses found
147. ad protection can be set for a function block Refer to 5 5 Read Pro tection for Logical POUs for the procedure 5 4 4 Editing the Function Block Body after Pasting Changes to a function block definition itself editing of input variables or output variables can be reflected in an instance even if the function block body was already pasted as an instance Function block instances can be updated by selecting Edit Update Function Block Instance With this menu command it is no longer necessary to delete and repaste instances in the program after editing the function block definition itself It is also unnecessary to input the argument operand values again Procedure Use the following procedure to update function block instances 1 2 3 1 After pasting the function block body as an instance edit the function block body s input variables or output variables change add or delete and save the project e A confirmation dialog box will be displayed indicating the following Function block was modified Please check the output window At the same time the Find Tab Page in the Output Window will show the pro gram addresses of that function block s instances 126 Read Protection for Logical POUs Section 5 5 e A yellow A amp A icon will be displayed at the upper left corner of instances in the program warning that there has been a change and a circuit er ror will occur A yellow A icon is displayed to warn that the functi
148. al POUs assigned to that configuration as tasks Inconsistencies can occur for either of the following two reasons 1 Variables with the same name exist in both programs but the data types or sizes do not match 2 External variables exist but global variables do not exist If there is an inconsistency a build error will occur The External Variable Consistency Check function checks for the two incon sistencies described above and helps correct the inconsistencies if any are detected 134 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks 1 2 3 Section 5 6 Either select Variable Check Consistent with Extern from the Menu Bar or select Check Consistent with Extern from the popup menu in the Vari able Window or Program Window If no inconsistencies are found the message A problem is not in adjust ment will be displayed In this case click the OK Button to continue If any inconsistencies are found the following Check Consistent with Ex tern Dialog Box will be displayed a Unifying to the Global Variable s Data Definition Select the variable in the Global variable mismatch list and click the Global gt gt External Button Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box that is displayed Note For consistency the external variable s comment is overwritten by the selected global variable s comment Check Consistent with Extern CJ2_ProjectA CJ2H_CPUE x Global E xternal Mismatch List Please sel
149. all global variables contained in POUs at once Note This function enables the variable names for global variables to be changed altogether making reuse of global variables easy Example Adding the prefix L1 and the suffix _ Fr Setting Prefix Suffix for Global Variables Add prefix suffix to elobal external variables Global External Variables RbStatusNormal BOOL RbStatusError BOOL RbStatusMove BOOL RbMoveLeft BOOL 3 After setting click the OK Button When prefix suffix settings are not re quired click the OK Button without making any settings e The program or function block will be added to the project The POU name will be displayed in the project do not use a library name Note If the same POU name already exists in the project a dialog box will be displayed to confirm that it is OK to overwrite it 147 Using the Library Section 5 10 e The prefix suffix settings in the above example will be displayed as fol lows Name Data Type L1_RbStatusNomal_Fr BOOL pL1_RbStatusMove_Fr BOOL L1_RbStatusError_Fr BOOL pL1_RbMoveleft_Fr BOOL Intemal External Name Data Type L1_RbStatusNomal_Fr BOOL Li_RbStatusError_Fr BOOL Li_RbStatusMove_Fr BOOL L1_RbMoveLeft_Fr BOOL 4 Global System Rung Groups Rung groups can be simply dragged and dropped into ladder programs Delete variables and change variable names as required 1 2 3 1 Drag an
150. an Output Parameter Connecting an Input to an Output Parameter Connecting an Input Parameter to an Output Bit Inserting an AND or OR Condition between Parameters L l die pada FB_hstancel FB_Body ENO EN FB Instance FB Body eng 4 FB_Instance1 EN FB_Body eno BOOL BOOL Int Out 4 FB_Instancel EN FB_Body ENO BOOL BOOL Int Out i gt FB_Instancel EN FB Body eno BOOL BOOL hi Q FB Instance FB histancel EN F B_Body ENO BOOL BOOL hi Q A EN input cannot be connected to an input parameter i i A ENO output cannot be connected to an output parameter m i An input cannot be connected directly to an output parameter An input parameter cannot be connected directly to an output l An AND or OR condition cannot be inserted between parameters FB _Instance2 E Instructions cannot be inserted 45 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Parameter Specifications Allowed Parameter Inputs The following data can be set in input and output parameters Input Parameters e Constants See note e Local program variables for example aa The data type must match the corresponding input variable e Physical addresses for example D00100 or 0000 00 Output Parameters e Local program variables for example aa The data type must match the corresponding output variable e Physical addresses for example D00100 or
151. an be accessed i e read and written externally Disabled Variable names cannot be accessed i e read and written externally None Do not disclose the variable as a connection target Input Disclose the variable as an input from the network Output Disclose the variable as an output to the network Global variables that have been set to Input or Output can be imported to the Network Configurator after the project has been saved After the global variables have been imported variable names can be used in programming to set connec tions for ControlNet cyclic communi cations Retain or Nonretain When using cyclic communications select Input when disclos ing the variable as an input from the network select Output when disclosing the variable as an output to the network and select None when the variable will not be disclosed Network I O Setting Retain Nonretain Specify whether to maintain the value of the variable when power is turned OFF and ON and when operation is started Input a comment for the variable Comment 256 characters max Note When the Cross Reference Pop up Window has been displayed by selecting View Window Cross Reference Tool a variable s cross reference infor mation program address instruction name program name etc can be dis played just by selecting that variable in the Variable Editor Editing Global Variables 1 2 3 1 Double click the v
152. ariable to be edited on the Global Sheet Alternately right click the variable and select Edit The Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Edit the parameters of the Variable and then click the OK Button Deleting Global Variables 1 2 3 1 Select the variable to be deleted and press the Delete Key 2 A dialog box will appear to confirm the deletion Click the Yes Button The variable will be deleted 5 6 3 Pasting Programs into Tasks Tasks control the timing of program execution Logical POU programs are assigned to tasks to execute them There are two types of tasks cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks power OFF interrupt scheduled interrupt I O interrupt and external interrupt tasks Extra cyclic tasks are not supported Up to 128 cyclic tasks task numbers 0 to 127 can be used When specifying the task number in the operand of a TASK ON TKON or TASK OFF TKOF instruction the task number can be specified directly by inputting the number in decimal after 10 or it can be specified indirectly by inputting an I O mem ory address containing the task number If TKONa is used set the value of variable a to the task number Example When the instruction TKON 3 is input the task number is the value in ClO 0003 133 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks Section 5 6 Use the following procedure to paste a program into a task 1 2 3 1 Drag the program from the Workspace and dro
153. ariables when inputting comments 79 PLC Setup 5 159 CPU settings 274 cycle monitor time 276 cycle time 275 minimum cycle time 275 peripheral servicing 280 power OFF detection time 276 Special I O Unit refreshing 277 287 startup settings 273 timing settings 275 Unit settings 277 port selection 175 power interruptions Power OFF Detection Delay Time 276 power OFF interrupt task 276 retaining not retaining data 25 precautions xv applications xvii general xvi safety xvi programming 5 ST language 116 transferring the program 5 programs check levels 151 Project Window 62 projects creating 90 structure 10 PV restrictions 47 PVs 197 R read protection 127 referencing 35 replacing in programs 138 reserved words 225 response code 268 response time settings 277 rung groups 148 S safety precautions xvi searching input instructions from output instructions 140 output instructions from input instructions 140 searching programs 138 services restarting 204 setup initial setup 5 288 SMTP 204 208 SNTP 204 208 specifications 4 function block operation 40 instances 39 ST Editor 118 importing 153 ST programming 116 character set 116 data types 117 functions 224 identifiers 116 reserved words 225 variables and data structures 118 startup mode setting 273 structured text keywords 223 restrictions 49
154. ars the CPU Unit memory including the user program parame ter area and I O memory Restart Service Starts the SMTP server and SNMP server Set On Sets turns ON a bit Set Off Resets turns OFF a bit Set Force On Ctrl J Force sets forces ON a bit Set Force Off Ctrl K Force resets forces OFF a bit Set Force Cancel Clears a force set or force reset bit Set Cancel All Forces Clears all force set and force reset bits Set Value Changes the PV of the selected variable or physical address Set Timer Counter Setting Value Changes the PV of the timer or counter Differential Monitor Executes differential monitoring Error Log Displays the PLC error log Change Log Enable Mode Enables the change log Change Log Disable Mode Disables the change log Change Log Change Log List Reads the change log list Cycle Time Displays the cycle time Data Trace 68 Used to execute a data trace Menu Item Lists Section 4 4 Menu Variable Reference Report Shortcut Function Displays a list showing the usage of variables Set Clock Used to set the clock in the CPU Unit Release Access Rights 4 4 11 Library Menu Menu POU Register to Library Shortcut Forcibly releases the access rights held by the PLC Function Registers a POU in the library
155. as created 7 a Project om Instructions Workspace EES CJ2_ProjectB CJ2 mE Data Types B 43 Logical POUs g Function Blocks B E Programs 4 Input_1 Program Local Variable Editor A Internal lA Extemal IA System Extemal Ladder Editor This completes creating a program 6 Finally code the program Refer to 5 3 Programming Methods for information on programming meth ods Note 1 By default the Local Variable Editor will be display connected to the top of the Ladder Editor as shown above 2 To hide the Local Variable Editor select View Variable Editor Visible 3 To display the Local Variable Editor select View Variable Editor Vis ible again 91 Creating Projects and Logical POUs Section 5 2 5 2 3 Saving Edited Data in the Project After coding programs or function blocks be sure to save any data that was edited in the program To save the data select File Save Changes to project Alternately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys An alarm will be displayed if there is an error in the program Correct the error and then select File Save Changes to project again 5 2 4 Saving the Project 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to save the project 1 Select File Save or File Save As The Save As Dialog Box will be displayed Save As Save in CQ prog a sample02 nlx a sample nlx Save as type NE Programmer Project File nlx v 2 Specify the
156. as func tion block definitions and converted to library functions The function blocks are created with local variable names that are not tied to physical addresses so new programs can be developed easily just by reading the definitions from the file and placing them in a new program Mathematical expressions that are difficult to enter in ladder language can be entered easily in structured text ST language A function block consists of the function block definition that is created in advance and the function block instances that are actually inserted in the pro gram The basic reusable part of the function block is called the function block def inition Each function block definition contains the algorithm and local variable definitions as shown in the following diagram Function Block Definition E realer CMON PULSE nee Example CLOCK PULSE 1 Algorithm tim_b Algorithm TIMX tim_a OFF_TIME tim_a ariable definitions TIMX tim_b ON_TIME LL ENO 2 Variable Definitions IN Usage Name Type Internal tim_a TIMER Internal tim_b TIMER Input ON_TIME INT Input OFF_TIME INT 1 Algorithm The algorithm is standard programming written with variable names rather than physical I O memory addresses In NE Programmer algorithms can be written in either ladder programming or ST structured text Functi
157. at and size specified by the variable s data type Even if the input parameter or output parameter is a word address the data that is passed will be the data with the format and size specified by the vari able s data type starting from the specified word address Program Instance of Function Block Definition A InputD100 4 m k Output D300 Input D200 Examples f m is type WORD one word of data from D100 will be passed to the variable f n is type DWORD two words of data from D200 and D201 will be passed to the variable f k is type LWORD four words of data from the variable will be passed io words D300 to D303 1 Only addresses in the following data areas can be used as parameters CIO Area Auxiliary Area DM Area EM Area bank 0 Holding Area and Work Area The following cannot be used a Index and Data Registers neither direct nor indirect specification b Indirect addressing of DM or EM Area neither binary nor BCD mode 2 Local program variables can also be specified as parameters provided that the local program variable s data size is the same as the local vari able s data size Z Caution Input values are passed from parameters to the input variables VAR_INPUT when an instance is executed but before the algorithm is processed Conse quently a parameter cannot be used to pass a value if it is necessary to read the value during processing within the execution cycle of the algor
158. ata Placement BOOL data in the CPU Unit is at the specified bit location for fixed allocations using address specifications For automatic allocations the bit location is automatically allocated Information on forced set reset status cannot be read or written from the program CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Data Information on Forced Set Reset Status Data True 01 hex False 00 hex Information on Forced Set Reset Status Forced 01 hex Not Forced 00 hex Only data can be written i e forced status information cannot be written BOOL Data Whole Array CPU Unit Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 D15 D8 D7 D8 D17 D16 DO to Dn True 01 hex False 00 hex 264 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Allocations always start a bit O for arrays It is not possible to start allocations from any other bit e g starting from bit 4 is not possible CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 D7 DO D15 D8 1 D17 D16 DO to Dn True 01 hex False 00 hex WORD INT or UINT Data CPU Unit Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Data H Data L CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Data L Data H DWORD DINT or UDINT Data CPU Unit Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Data LH Da
159. attery Error Flag Related flags and words Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Detect Nondetect Default Detect This setting determines whether interrupt task errors are detected If this setting is set to Detect and an interrupt task error is detected the ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash and the Interrupt Task Error Flag A40213 will be turned ON but CPU Unit operation will continue Register FAL to Error Log Settings Function A40213 Interrupt Task Error Flag Related flags and words Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Register Unregister Default Register Table Data Process Instructions Settings This setting determines if user defined FAL errors created with FAL 006 and time monitoring for FPD 269 will be recorded in the error log A100 to A199 Function Related flags and words Whenever FAL 006 is exe cuted every cycle New setting s effectiveness Disable Enable Default Disable String Data Process Instructions This setting determines if Table Data Instructions will be pro cessed over multiple cycle times i e processed in the back ground Settings Function Related flags and words Start of opera tion New setting s effectiveness Disable Enable Default Disable Data Shift Process Instructions This setting determines if Text String Data Instructions will be proces
160. attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non zero status Already in requested mode state The object is already in the mode state being requested by the service Object state conflict The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode state Object already exists The requested instance of object to be created already exists Attribute not settable A request to modify a non modifiable attribute was received Privilege violation A permission privilege check failed Device state conflict The device s current mode state prohibits the execution of the requested service Reply data too large The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allo cated response buffer Fragmentation of a primitive value The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive data value i e half a REAL data type Not enough data The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified opera tion Attribute not supported The attribute specified in the request is not supported Too much data The service supplied more data than was expected Object does not exist The object specified does not exist in the device Service fragmentation sequence not in progress The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for this data No stored attribute data The attribu
161. ave Changes to project 5 2 3 5 Creating function blocks and pasting them into programs Creating function blocks and then dragging and dropping them into programs 4 5 4 6 Creating a configuration File New Configuration A 5 6 1 See note 7 Editing global variables l 5 6 2 8 Pasting programs into tasks Dragging and dropping programs into task folders l 5 6 3 9 Saving the project File Save As 5 2 4 Note The configuration can be created and the global variables can be edited before the logical POUs programs and function blocks are created 89 Creating Projects and Logical POUs Section 5 2 5 2 Creating Projects and Logical POUs Before actual programming a project and logical POUs must be created 5 2 1 Creating Projects Use the following procedure to create a project 1 2 3 1 Right click the Workspace in the Project Window and select Create Project Alternately press the Ctrl N Keys or select File New Project The following New Dialog Box will be displayed Le xl ga Project Project Name C2 Cancel 2 Select either a CJ2 CPU Unit or an NE1S series CPU Unit The restrictions on programs that can be created and instructions that can be used depend on the series of the CPU Unit Therefore strict restrictions apply to chang ing the series of the CPU Unit after the project has been created It is not possible to convert from a project for a CJ2 CPU Unit to a project for an NE1
162. ay elements for a two dimen sional array and leave the setting for a one dimensional array blank A two dimensional array cannot be specified for the NE1S Refer to 2 2 3 Variable Properties for other restrictions on elements Size Displays the size used by the variable in the memory Initial value With a program this property sets the variable s Set an initial value as follows according to the value at the start of operation variable s data type With a function block this property sets the vari e BOOL WORD or DWORD able s value when an instance is executed Input the value in unsigned hexadecimal after Note The initial values of variables cannot be 16 set for CJ2 CPU Units e INT or DINT Input the value in unsigned decimal after 10 or 10 e UINT or UDINT Input the value in unsigned decimal after 10 e REAL Real number Example 1 0 0 23 9 8E 3 STRING Character string Example Data Address This property sets a specific address when the address is being set manually direct AT specifi cation This property cannot be changed for local vari ables 18 Variables Section 2 2 Content This property sets whether to convert variables to network variables It sets whether external access i e reading or writing is enabled for variable names This setting can be made only for global variables It cannot be made for local va
163. be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable A Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before editing or transferring a pro gram PLC Setup I O tables I O memory data or parameter data to another node Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in unex pected operation and injury 4 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the NE Programmer e Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC or disconnect the cable when the NE Programmer is connected online to the PLC e Do not turn OFF the power supply to a Unit while data is being trans ferred Particularly 1 never turn OFF the power to a PLC when the Mem ory Card is being accessed and 2 never remove the Memory Card while it is being accessed To remove the Memory Card first press the Memory Card power supply switch and wait for the BUSY indicator to turn OFF before removing the Memory Card In the worst case scenario the Mem ory Card may become unusable if the power is turned OFF while the Memory Card is being accessed or the Memory Card is removed while it is being accessed e Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PLC including changing the Star tup Mode setting e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present
164. be indicated in light green Light green is the default color e If the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or RUN mode the background will be light blue Light blue is the default color e To change the display colors select Tool Option to display the Inte grated Options Window click the Ladder Icon and click the Color Tab e The icon shown below will be displayed to indicated forced status if a bit is forced ON or forced OFF Note The following indications are used for operand data for function blocks that are being monitored NE Programmer version 1 53 NE Programmer version 1 60 and higher and lower Decimal Number after 10 Decimal Number after plus or Hexadecimal Number after 16 Minus sign Hexadecimal HEX after number Examples 1234 1234 HEX Constants are input using 10 and 16 7 8 4 Monitoring in the Watch Window 1 2 3 1 In online status double click the task to be monitored in the Project Win dow to display the Ladder Editor 191 Monitoring Section 7 8 2 If the Watch Window is not currently displayed select View Window Watch The Watch Window will be displayed Variable Name J 41 aJ gt N watch A Watch2 Watch3 Watch4 Forced Status NE1S_CPUOT 3 In the Ladder Editor select one or more variables bits or words to be monitored right click and select Add to Watch from the popup menu The specified bit or word will be added to
165. cece eee eee 7 11 Changing the PVs of Variables 0 0 0 cee cee ene 7 12 Changing Timer Counter Set Values 00 0 cee ce ee eee 7 13 Differential Monitor 7 14 Online Editing 7 15 Clearing Errors 7 16 Clearing Memory 7 17 Restarting Services 7 18 Displaying Errors and the Error Log 1 0 0 0c eee nee 7 19 Change Log 7 20 Displaying the Cycle Time 0 0 0c 7 21 Data Tracing 7 22 Variable Reference List 167 170 175 177 181 182 189 189 194 195 197 198 198 199 203 204 204 205 209 211 211 216 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 23 Setting the CPU Unit Clock 7 24 Forcibly Releasing the Access Right Appendices A 7moaQw Variable Applications Guidelines Structured Text Keywords External Variables CIP Message Communications PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units Ethernet Settings for CJ2 CPU Units dek sees Bees Se bee eee Fee or ean ee ee 219 219 221 223 227 229 273 281 285 Revision History ccc cece ccc ccccsccccccecses 291 ix About this Manual This manual provides information required to use the NE Programmer Control and Network Support Software The NE Programmer is an integrated programming environment used to program NE1S series PLCs and CJ2 CPU Units Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table and be sure you under stand the information
166. cessary to have the same variable as an input variable and output variable register the variables with different names and transfer the value of the input vari able to the output variable in the function block with an instruction such as MOV Variables Section 2 2 2 Output variable values data are passed to the corresponding parame ters after the algorithm is processed Consequently values cannot be written from output variables to parameters while the algorithm is being executed If it is necessary to write a value within the execution cycle of the algorithm do not write the value to a parameter Assign the value to an internal variable and use an AT setting direct allocation of a physical address Initial Value An initial value can be set for an output variable VAR_OUTPUT that is not being retained i e when the Retain Option is not selected An initial value cannot be set for an output variable if the Retain Option is selected The initial value will be set regardless of the value of the IOM Hold Bit A50012 ENO Enable Output Variable When a local output variable is created the default variable is the ENO vari able The ENO output variable will be turned ON when the instance is called The user can change this value The ENO output variable can be used as a flag to check whether or not instance execution has been completed normally E External Variables VAR_ EXTERNAL External variables are local va
167. changed at any time based on improvements or for other reasons EXTENT OF SERVICE The license fee of the Software does not include service costs such as dispatching technical staff ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xiv PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the NE Programmer and related devices The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the NE Programmer You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to use the NE Programmer 1 Intended Audience 0 cece cece ence n ene neee XVi 2 General Precautions esan aula ecient GW eA Rin a dete pate ee aE xvi 3 Safety Precautions 0 20 00 e a cee ee eee ee E AS xvi 4 Application Precautions 20 cece eee eee nen eee XVii XV Intended Audience 1 2 3 xvi Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must o
168. click and select Monitoring Data Type and then Monitor in Hex Decimal Signed Decimal Binary Number or Data Type from on the popup menu Example when Data Type Is Selected Hi Variable Name Value I Address Data Type j ASCII POU Name Path I Comment Ready On BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbSetExecution On BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUOT Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 WaitTimer 0021 HEX Off TIMER d RbControl NE1S NE15_CPU01 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbStatus1 0023 HEX UINT RbControl NETSSNE1S_CPUON Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbStatel Off BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 of 12 watcht A Watch Watch3 Watch4 Forced Status NETS_CPUOT e The display format for PVs of items in the Watch WIndow can be individu ally specified by selecting the following commands from the View Menu or toolbar Select View Monitoring Data Type and then Monitor in Hex Decimal Signed Decimal Binary Number or Data Type A dialog box will be displayed to ask the display range if the number of ele ments for the specified array is 256 or higher Range Setting x Set the range for the variable Setting Variable Data_02 0 255 Start Element 10 Count 5 a Cancel Input the number of the start element and the number of elements to register and then click the OK Button Variable Name ASCII POU Name Path Commen
169. ct one of the following options Two character Four character or Eight character default Eight character 4 6 7 Library Window 82 E Item Setup E Edit i General IV Edit local variable names when inserting rung part E IV Display a global variable edit dialog when adding to a project S Outline x Variable Hie Ladd H io i 2m Mnemonic F Pus ST Program Check 3 Data Trace m Reset All Cancel Apply Edit local variable names when inserting rung part When this option is selected the Edit Local Variables Dialog Box will be dis played when one of the library s rung elements is dragged and dropped into the program Option Settings Level A Section 4 6 Display a global variable edit dialog box when adding to a project When this option is selected the Add Prefix Suffix Dialog Box will be dis played and a prefix and suffix will be added to all global variables in a POU when a library POU is added to a project 4 6 8 Program Check Window ltem Setup Level Check Level LevelA C LevelB General es Outline Setting Check Item C User Definition Setting Weel Ladder A AD Mnemonic Pus ST Library Program Check Z Data Trace W Variable a Duplicate CNT number Check WARNING Cancel A Check Level The program check level can be set to Level A default setting Level B or User Definition f leve
170. cted In this case the window in step 5 is displayed when step 3 is completed so you can connect online to the last network path just by clicking the OK Button Use the following procedure to set this option 1 2 3 1 Click the Option Button in the lower right corner of the Browse Network Di alog Box The following window will be displayed Oton xl Browse response wait time a ms Browse data Clear Save Input address after auto scan on ethernet Disable Enable omeri 2 Select Clear or Save and click the OK Button 7 4 Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected 7 4 1 Overview Use this function to connect to a different CPU Unit when the NE Programmer is already connected online to a CPU Unit When the CPU Unit connection is changed the automatic upload function will be executed after connecting to the new CPU Unit There are two ways to change the CPU Unit e Changing to a CPU Unit on the same network For example changing to a CPU Unit connected to the same Ethernet network as the CPU Unit that is currently connected Refer to 7 4 2 e Changing to a CPU Unit on a different network For example changing to a CPU Unit connected to an Ethernet network when a CPU Unit is cur rently connected via USB Refer to 7 4 3 177 Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected Section 7 4 7 4 2 Changing to a CPU Unit on the Same Ethernet Network Use the following procedure to change the connection to
171. cture of the programs Section 3 describes software installation Section 4 provides an outline of the operations and functions of the NE Programmer Section 5 provides details on programming Section 6 describes the configuration of the PLC system Section 7 provides the procedures for online operation The Appendices describe variable applications guidelines structured text keywords external vari ables CIP message communications the PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units and Ethernet Settings N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xi Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY The warranty period for the Software is one year from either the date of purchase or the date on which the Software is delivered to the specified location If the User discovers a defect in the Software i e substantial non conformity with the manual and returns it to OMRON within the above warranty period OMRON will replace the Software without charge by
172. d Use the following procedure to compare the real I O tables and the registered I O tables 1 Select Controller Connect to connect online to the PLC 2 Select Controller V O Table Compare The real I O tables and the registered I O tables will be compared 6 5 2 Offline Operations Editing I O Tables 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to edit I O tables offline 1 Click the I O Table Tab from the Configuration Setting Window The following window will be displayed 161 I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page Section 6 5 162 Setup NE1S_CPUO1_Rev03 Egizi PLC Setup Area Y Ethemet m Structure EFFNE1S CPUO1 Rev03 First click here to add a CPU Backplane Once the CPU Rack has been completed click here again to add any Expansion Backplanes needed by the system Backplane Please insert backplane with backplane button Settings Jeqister Variables m Unit List C Basie 1 0 Unit Q CPU Bus Unit Dummy C Special 10 Unit 2 Click the Backplane Button The Backplane Setting Dialog Box will be displayed A CJ series PLC like the CJ2 is a building block PLC It does not have a Backplane but a Backplane can be virtually set using settings in the NE Programmer x KPUBack Plane Start Address 0 IV Automatic e To set a specific start address clear the check mark from Automatic and input the start address for the Rack W
173. d Ctrl F Searches for a text string Find Next F3 Finds the next instance of a text string Find Prev Shift F3 Finds the previous instance of a text string Replace Ctrl H Replaces a text string 63 Menu Item Lists Section 4 4 Menu Shortcut Function Bookmark Ctrl B Registers a bookmark or jumps to a bookmark Find in Programs Ctrl Shift F Searches mnemonics variables physical addresses instance names line comments and instruction comments in all POUs The specific items to be searched can be specified The search results are displayed in the Output Window and relevant locations can be jumped to by double clicking on the search results Cross reference Register Registers the details currently displayed in the Cross Reference Window as log data Cross reference Remove Deletes registered log data Cross reference Prev Moves back one log Cross reference Next Additional Menu Items when E Jump Jump Shortcut Ctrl G Moves forward one log diting Ladder Programs Function Jumps to a specified step number or rung number Jump Bit Address Reference Alt Shift A Searches for program inputs and outputs that affect each other If an input condition is specified a search is made backward for an output with the same bit address If an output is specified a search is made foreword for an inp
174. d _ gt lt d _ _ gt lt _ _ gt Executing Executing CSND CSND CSND Command Command Command 1 1 1 i Executing i Exe Error Flag 9 i i NW Comm 1 i 1 i 1 i NW Comm Exe Previous 0000 0000 0000 XXXX 0000 0000 Response Code Value 0000 End correctly 0000 Error ends 0000 End correctly on executing on executing Otherthan on executing 0000 Execution Timing For instructions for network communication when input conditions are satisfied the communications process ing gets just started and it is in Communications Port Service of the peripheral services in the background that the actual processing is executed Comm processing in background Input NW Comm Exe Condition Enable Flag Start comm Cycle processing time gt Assemble data to be sent from command data and send it Execute comm transmission reception processing by time slice at peripheral service execution over several cycles End processing Receive response and store it as and store results response data Reflect comm result _ in special auxiliary relay 1 When the input conditions are satisfied if Network Communications Instruction Execution Enable Flag A20200 to A20207 is 1 ON at this moment each instruction sets 0 OFF in Network Communications Instruction Execution Enable Flag A20200 to A20207 0 OFF in Network Communications Execution Er ror Flag A2
175. d Alternately right click the instruction and select Edit The Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed Edit ariable Internal Path CJ2_ProjectASPOUSFB_01 Variable swt x Parameter Name Setting Data Type BOOL Array Size Q Size 2 Byte Initial Value Address Network Variable Network 1 0 Setting None Retain Nonretain Nonretain Comment Cancel Double click the parameter to edit Parameters with the following mark cannot be edited 9 2 To edit other parameters double click the parameter to be edited For local variables physical addresses can be directly input in the Address Field of the Edit Variables Dialog Box 3 Edit the parameter 4 When all editing has been completed click the OK Button Variable parameters are given in the following table Description Displays the name of the variable being edited The name of the variable can also be changed Refer to 2 2 1 Naming Variables for details Data Type Set the data type of the variable BOOL INT UINT DINT UDINT WORD DWORD TIMER COUNTER STRING REAL or user defined For a function block the name of the logical POU of the function block will be displayed Array Size Set the number of elements for a one dimen sional array or a two dimensional array Two dimensional arrays can be set only for CJ2 CPU Units When not specifying an array leave this settings blank for both a one dimen
176. d drop the rung group into the ladder program or right click on the rung group and select Insert to Program The following confirmation di alog box will be displayed NE Programmer x 9 Insert the selected parts to the program tf Are you sure 2 Click the Yes Button e If the rung contains function blocks the following confirmation dialog box will be displayed NE Programmer h Function blocks are included in the rung Are you sure you want to add it to Logical POUs xi e Click the Yes Button e The following Edit Local Variables Dialog Box will be displayed The following local variables are contained Please edit if you register with different name Variable Name Data Type New Name PF KickSwitch 0 MaxMin_Ctrl SampleNum fb_tmp3 fread_ready BOOL DWORD INT BOOL BOOL KickSwitch 0 MaxMin_Ctrl SampleNum fb_tmp3 fread_ready Reset Delete All Edit 3 To use the variables without any changes click the OK Button e To change the variable name double click the variable name and change the name e To delete all variables click the Delete All Button 148 Using the Library Section 5 10 e To return to the original settings after editing the variables click the Reset Button Click the OK Button to display the Edit Comment Dialog Box xl I Cance 4 Enter a comment and click the OK Button The rung will be inserted into the ladder program Examp
177. d reused with one file for each program one file for each function block and one file for each rung group Each library contains information such as the local variables internal input output and external variables function blocks data type definitions and glo bal variables Using the Library Section 5 10 By default the library files are stored under a Local Library folder in the instal lation directory as shown above As shown below groups of library files can be registered and managed in a directory hierarchy You can also right click the Library Directory and select Map Folder to regis ter another folder in the first level of the library System development by multi ple engineers is possible by specifying a shared folder on a server in the first level of the library directory Library 3 43 Local Library H I Chicago EJ StageO1 ga startup Tokyo Shared Folder e Program or function block library files that have been registered can be added to projects by right clicking and selecting Register to Library e To reuse rung groups they can be dragged and dropped on the ladder diagram program or alternately the rung groups can be added by right clicking and selecting Insert to Program Note Local Library is the installation folder It requires system adminis trator rights To allow users without system administrator rights to access the local library create a folder with appropriate access rights
178. d when the built in EtherNet IP Unit op tion is expanded 5 ACJ2 CPU Unit or other Unit will be displayed when you expand the back plane option under the built in EtherNet IP port Select the CPU Unit and then click the OK Button Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect Browse Jf ToP2 192 168 250 12 1756 ENBT A 192 168 250 21 NE1S_21 p 192 168 250 31 CJ2H_31 BackPlane 440 PaintLineMasterCPU g 192 168 250 41 Node41 If an online connection is made normally On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window as shown in the following figure By PaintLineMasterCPU 6 4 ms Marvell Yukon 88E8055 PCI E Gigabit Ethernet Controller 192168 250 10 1000M On line INS 171 Connecting Online via Ethernet Section 7 2 Note Communications error will be displayed in the status bar at the bot tom of the window as shown in the following figure if a communica tions error such as due to a cable disconnection is detected during online connection PaintLineMasterCPU ms Marvell Yukon 88E8055 PCI E Gigabit Ethernet Controller 19216825010 1000M 6 To go offline again select Controller Disconnect Alternately press the Ctrl Shift W Keys Note When connected online there is a setting in the Browse Network Dialog Box to select whether or not to save the connection path e Clear default Each time the NE Programmer connects online it is necessary to browse to
179. describes software installation 3 1 3 2 3 3 Installation Preparations 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee eens 3 1 1 System Requirements 00 00 00 eee eee ee eee 3 1 2 Installation Types 00 0 eee ee eee Installing the NE Programmer 0 0 0 cece eee eee eens 3 2 1 Installation Procedure 0 0 0 0 eee eee ees 3 2 2 Uninstallation Procedure 00 00 0000 00 0005 3 2 3 Upgrading Software Versions 0 0 00 00 2 cee eee Installing the USB Driver SECTION 3 52 52 52 52 52 53 55 55 Installation 51 Installation Preparations 3 1 Installation Preparations 3 1 1 System Requirements Section 3 1 A computer with the following specifications is required to install the NE Pro grammer Item Specification IBM PC AT or compatible Pentium 300 MHz or higher Pentium 1 GHz or higher recom mended Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Supported lan guages Japanese English Memory 512 MB min HDD 200 MB min of available space Monitor S VGA or better CD ROM 1 min Communications port to connect to the NE1S One or more of the following USB port RS 232C port or Ethernet port Or one of the following DeviceNet Interface Card see note or RA Communications Card using RS Linx communications driver Note Connections with NE1S CPU Units on the net
180. dicator Registering the I O Table Check the Units to verify that they are installed in the right slots With the PLC in PROGRAM mode register the I O table from the Programming De vice NE Programmer Another method is to create the I O table in NE Programmer and transfer it to the CPU Unit Note Refer to 7 5 Online Operations for I O Tables PLC Setup Settings With the PLC in PROGRAM mode change the settings in the PLC Setup as necessary from the Programming Device NE Programmer Another method is to change the PLC Setup in NE Programmer and transfer it to the CPU Unit Note Refer to the operation manual for each Unit DM Area Settings for CPU Bus Units and Special I O Units a Use a Programming Device NE Programmer to make any necessary settings in the parts of the DM Area that are allocated to Special I O Units and CPU Bus Units b Reset the power ON OFF ON or toggle the Restart Bit for each Unit Note Refer to the operation manual for each CPU Bus Unit or Special I O Unit Writing the Program Write the program with the NE Programmer Transferring the Program NE Programmer Only With the PLC in PROGRAM mode transfer the program from NE Program mer to the CPU Unit Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units Section 1 4 10 Testing Operation a Checking I O Wiring Output wiring With the PLC in PROGRAM mode force set output bits and check the status of the
181. diting is to be performed 2 Right click the rung to be edited and select Online Edit Begin from the popup menu It does not matter what portion of the rung is selected In this example rung 4 will be edited The following dialog box will be displayed NE Programmer Fz h on line editing the variable and the differentiation size which can be added are as follows t Non Hold Variables 16361 CH Timer Variables 611 Variables Counter Variables 612 Variables Transition sensing 16365 items Note The number of differentiations that can be added will not be dis played for program POUs of a CJ2 CPU Unit 3 Click the OK Button The selected rung will be displayed with a yellow background as shown be low Yellow is the default color RbSetNaEr RbSetReody vf vf 4 00010 5 00013 Ready lt gt 4 Edit the rung Editing methods are the same as for offline operations In this example an OR will be added for RoSetComp for the NC input con dition at the beginning of the above rung 5 00014 5 Right click the Edit Window and select Online Edit Finish from the pop up menu A confirmation dialog box will be displayed x Modification will be fixed and transmitted to Controller Are you sure 6 Click the Yes Button The changes will be downloaded and the following dialog box will be dis played when the download has bee
182. dix C Data Man agement in CIP Common Specification Volume 1 Release 1 0 The value specified for the Path Type in the IOI Path area of operand C C 4 bit 15 is not 1 or 0 i e Class Instance Attribute or EPATH is not specified The value for the IOI Size is O when the Path Type is specified as 1 in the IOI Path Area of operand C C 4 bit 15 Logical Segment Data Segment is not specified when the Path Type is specified as 1 in the IOI Path Area of operand C C 4 bit 15 The Logical Type is not specified as Class Instance Attribute The Logical Format is not specified as 8 16 or 32bits The Segment Sub Type is not specified as ANSI Extended Symbol Segment The IOI length is set to 0x100 or higher for the IOI Path in operand C Maximum Send Receive Length Exceeded The send request exceeded the CIP maxi mum message size Link Path Error An undefined link path was specified An undefined port such as port No 0x05 or 0x10 was specified The message will not be sent and the Communications port Error Flag for the corresponding port will turn ON 271 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Error Code Error Name Cause Remarks hex Internal Error An internal error occurred The message will not be sent and the Communications port Error Flag for the corresponding port will turn ON 1F01 Response Timeout A timeout occurred in the processing at The
183. dow will be displayed Closing Click the Close Button in the Data Trace Window The Data Trace Window will be closed 7 21 3 Setting Data Trace Parameters This section described how to set the data trace parameters Displaying the Parameter Settings Dialog Box 1 2 3 1 Click the Settings Button in the Data Trace Window The following Parameter Settings Dialog Box will be displayed Parameter Settings p x Trigger Start Falling Rising z of Rising Edee z C Middle C Value C End E Sampling Trace Data Bit Area Once Per Cycle Symbol _ Address _ Type Path On TRSM Instruction Trace Data Channel Area Symbol Address _ Type Path 212 Data Tracing Section 7 21 2 Make all of the required settings and then click the OK Button The settings are described individually below Trigger The Trigger fields are used to set the type of trigger and the condition for the bit or word trigger Trigger Falling Rising wj of Rising Edge v C Value C End I zi P C Middle Select Start Middle or End as the type of trigger Start Used to display status after the trigger Middle Used to display status before and after the trigger End Used to display status before the trigger E Using a Bit Trigger Select Falling Rising specify the variable or address and select Falling or Rising E Using a Word Trigger Select Value
184. dure to display the Setup Window for the system con figuration 1 2 3 1 Right click the configuration name i e the PLC name in the Project Workspace Project Instructions Workspace B E NEIS1 mE Data Types Logical POUs H E Function Blocks Ez Programs Bij NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 Global Variables 5 Task 5 4 Cycle Execution 8 4 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 Right click 2 Select System Configuration from the popup menu The following Setup Window will be displayed Setup NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 Ioj x Groups Parameters Sanger Timings S Startup IOM Hold Invalid SIOU Refresh Startup Force Status Hold Invalid Unit Settings Startup Operating Mode Program Communication Settings E tion Setti Invalid FINS Write Protection tics nea General Settings Help At the time of the startup it specifies sa Default Invalid whether 1 0 memory a non holding domain is held fy Set Defaults OK Cancel Apply y The setting on each tab page are described in the following sections 158 PLC Setup PLC Setup Area Tab Page Section 6 2 6 2 PLC Setup PLC Setup Area Tab Page This section describes the setting procedure for the PLC Setup For details on the PLC Setup for NE1S CPU Units refer to the SYSMAC NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 For details on the PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units refer to Appendix E and Appendix F 1 2 3 1 Click the
185. e Releases a task allocation Task Execute on Startup Sets the task to be active i e to be executed at startup Task Standby on Startup Sets the task to be inactive i e not to be executed at startup Logical POU Edit Displays the Ladder Editor and Variable Editor for the currently selected program or function block Logical POU Delete Deletes the currently selected program or function block Logical POU Protect Sets read protection for a function block Print Ctrl P Prints the specified items Print Preview Displays a preview for printing Setup Printer Sets the printer to use for printing Page Setup Sets the margins title header and footer to use for printing Export Variable OMRON OPC Server File Exports variables in external Support Software formats Exit 4 4 2 Edit Menu Undo Shortcut Ctrl Z Exists the application Function Undoes the previously performed operation Redo Ctrl Y Redoes the operation that was undone with Undo Cut Ctrl X Cuts the specified range of data Copy Ctrl C Copies the specified range of data Paste Ctrl V Pastes the contents of the clipboard Delete Delete Deletes the specified range of data Rename F2 Used to change the name of a program or function block Select All Ctrl A Selects all data Fin
186. e CJ2H CPU68 EIP Device Type 14 Revision 1 01 Option OK Cancel If an online connection is made normally On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window A PaintLineMasterCPU 41 6 ms OMRO TOOLBUS GCJ2 CPUxx 115200 Bit s On line 6 Togo offline again select Controller Disconnect Alternately press the Ctrl Shift W Keys Note When connected online there is a setting in the Browse Network Dialog Box to select whether or not to save the connection path e Clear default Each time the NE Programmer connects online it is necessary to browse to a network path 168 Connecting via Serial Communications USB RS 232C Section 7 1 e Save The connection path is displayed from the last time that the NE Program mer was connected In this case the window in step 5 is displayed when step 3 is completed so you can connect online to the last network path just by clicking the OK Button Use the following procedure to set this option 1 2 3 1 Click the Option Button in the lower right corner of the Browse Network Di alog Box The following window will be displayed Browse response wait time AN ms Browse data Clear O Save Input address after auto scan on ethernet Disable O Enable OK Cancel 2 Select Clear or Save and click the OK Button 169 Connecting Online via Ethernet Section 7 2 7 2 Connecting Online via Ethernet This section describes how to
187. e In this case there are 13 letters OD hex Thirteen byte is an odd number so that 00 should be added at the end in order to make it an even number So far Link Path is 12 OD 81 39 32 2E 31 36 38 2E 32 30 30 2E 31 00 Now data reaches CPU 2 Then it is sent to CPU 3 via ControlNet Unit of CPU 2 In order to go through ControlNet Unit of CPU 2 data must go through Backplane Port of CPU 2 Port No of Backplane Port is inevitably 1 Because it falls into 1 byte Extended Link Address Size will be 0 Therefore the first byte will be 01 Link Address is 10 hex 03 hex 13 hex because Unit No of ControlNet Unit of CPU 2 is 03 hex so that the second byte will be 13 Because Port No of ControlNet Port of ControlNet Unit is 2 the third byte will be 02 Node Address of the target ControlNet Unit ControlNet Unit of CPU 3 is 9 so that the fourth byte will be 09 Link Address of CPU Unit on Backplane is 0 so that the fifth and the sixth bytes will be 01 and 00 respec tively Link Path of this part will be 01 13 02 09 01 00 The above mentioned two Link Paths being joined the whole Link Path is as follows 12 OD 31 39 32 2E 31 36 38 2E 32 30 30 2E 31 00 01 13 02 09 01 00 Example 4 In case of accessing CPU 2 from CPU 1 via EtherNet IP Unit Structure EtherNet IP Unit of CPU 1 Unit No 3 IP Address
188. e Name Datatype Address Physical address a WORD 4 j eM I O memory 1 Automatic Register allocation Variable name a Local Variables and Global Variables Local Variables There are two basic variable types Local variables are defined in individual logical POUs and used just within the local logical POU Global variables are defined at the configuration level and can be used in all of the logical POUs Variables defined in individual logical POUs programs or function blocks are known as local variables These variables are effective only in the local logical POU 13 Outline of the NE Programmer Section 2 1 The system automatically allocates local variables both local program and local FB variables to a particular memory area EM area banks other than EM bank 0 The physical addresses are hidden Logical POU Programa Program A local variables Name Data type Address Physical address 1 O memory used for automatic allocation Es ces es Automatic allocation Program B Program B local variables Data type Address Automatic m allocation Name Automatic allocation FB_1 local variables Name _ Data type Addres a BOOL The various kinds of local variables are listed below e Program Internal variables VAR and external variables VAR_
189. e CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode E NEIS_CPUO1 41 1 ms COM3 TOOLBUS NETS CPUO1 115200 Bit s On line Data tracing displays the operating status of the CPU Unit on the NE Pro grammer Operating status includes the status of bits and the present values PVs of words When the specified trigger condition is met after starting data tracing the CPU Unit will store the status of specified bits and the PVs of specified words in trace memory in the CPU Unit according to sampling conditions The NE Programmer can read the data stored in the CPU Unit and display it on time charts The Data Trace Start Flag will turn ON when the data trace operation is exe cuted e Any of three trigger conditions can be selected Bit OFF to ON transition bit ON to OFF transition or specified word contents e Either of two sampling conditions can be selected Each cycle or when the TRSM instruction is executed e Data tracing will stop when the trace memory become full and then the trace data will be transferred to the NE Programmer and displayed 211 Data Tracing Section 7 21 e Data tracing is performed by the CPU Unit itself which enables high speed sampling in comparison to time chart monitoring E Number of traceable bits and words Bits 31 Words 6 7 21 2 Opening and Closing the Data Trace Window Monitoring data traces is performed in the Data Trace Window Opening Select Controller Data Trace The following Data Trace Win
190. e Controller PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Trademarks and Copyrights ControlNet and EtherNet IP are registered trademarks of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Other product names and company names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies OMRON 2008 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of
191. e The network variable conversion attribute described below of the vari able being created must be set to disable network variable conversion e It may not be possible to automatically create variables if there are vari ables with the same name but different data types Automatically created variables can be checked in the Variable Editor Z Caution Support for converting to physical addresses is achieved by inputting a com ment If a comment is not input variables will not be automatically created even if the settings have been made and the necessary conditions have been met If a physical address is created without a comment however variables can be created automatically if a comment is input later Automatically Created Variable Names The following variable names are created automatically Word Addresses address_ An underscore character is inserted before and after the physical address Example _D10000_ EO 10000_ Bit Addresses wordaddress_bitaddress_ An underscore character is inserted before and after the physical address and also between the word address and bit address Example _0000_12_ A100_15 Variables that are automatically created from physical addresses cannot be accessed externally Note Physical addresses may remain unchanged if variables cannot be automatically generated due to mismatching data types with exter nal variables of the same name Input Procedure Example Using Bit Addres
192. e With NE1S CPU01 Rev 3 0 or earlier revisions multiple ladder rungs cannot be edited even if there are line comments included with the rungs Broadly speaking the following two types of online editing operations are sup ported e Editing or deleting the selected rung e Inserting rungs before or after the selected rung The following editing functions are supported for online editing e Inserting deleting and changing basic instructions e Inserting deleting and changing special instructions e Adding external or internal variables e Changing differentiated instructions setting releasing upward or down ward differentiation or adding deleting changing differentiated instruc tions 199 Online Editing Section 7 14 e Adding global variables e Adding changing and deleting function block parameters Z Caution Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected even if the cycle time is increased before performing online editing An increased cycle time may prevent input signals from being read Note 1 When online editing is performed changes will be written first to the nor mal RAM in the CPU Unit and then they will be backed up in the flash memory in the CPU Unit Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit while the settings are being backed up to flash memory i e while the BKUP indicator is lit The following display will appear in the status bar while data is being written to flash memory BQNEIS
193. e enabled disabled by the user default disabled 7 19 2 Enabling Disabling the Change Log Set whether to enable or disable the change log The default setting is dis abled Select Controller Change Log and then either Enable Mode or Disable Mode When Enable Mode is selected for change log the Change Log Dialog Box will be displayed when downloading editing online creating clearing I O tables or clearing memory 7 19 3 Change Log Input Examples Creating I O Tables e When creating I O tables the following Change Log Dialog Box will be displayed Change Log Comment Displays the number of bytes input number of bytes that can be input Version Author Mode operation r Data Create LOT able zi Input the comment and other required data and then click the Write But ton 209 Change Log Section 7 19 Editing Online e When online editing is completed the following Change Log Dialog Box will be displayed xl Comment Select Append or OverWrite This operation is enabled E 06 Oosration during online editing only Append C OverWrite Author 0 36 r m ae r Data Online Edit Program Variable e Input the comment and other required data select Append or OverWrite and then click the Write Button To record several online editing operations as a single change log select Overwrite To record each operation as a separate change log select Append 7
194. e even if its forced status is cleared To remove a bit from the Force Status Tab Page right click the Watch Window and select Update Status e If multiple BOOL TIMER or COUNTER variables have been selected all the variables can be set reset force set or force reset 1 2 3 1 Right click the Watch Window and select Add to Watch from the popup menu The New Watch Item Dialog Box will be displayed Configuration NE1S_1 NE1S_CPU01_RevO3 X Variable Scope Global Variables a Name xl C Address 192 Monitoring Section 7 8 Changing the Display Format Setting the Watch Range 2 To register a variable select the Variable Option input the variable name and then click the OK Button To register a bit or word select the Address Option input the address and then click the OK Button The specified variable bit or word will be added to the Watch Window and the present value will be monitored Example when D700 Is Designated Variable Name Vae Address Data Type ASCII POU Name Comment OODDHEX D0000 WORD NE1S NE1S_CPUOI 3 Repeat the previous step to monitor multiple variables bits or words Note Consecutive addresses e g D101 D102 can be easily input when watch items are repeatedly added after registering address es of bits or words To change the display format select the items in the Watch Window multiple items can be selected right
195. e if the Retain Option is selected Initial Values of Internal Variables VAR in Function Blocks NE1S series CPU Units Only An initial value can be set for an internal variable VAR that is not being retained i e when the Retain Option not selected An initial value cannot be set for an internal variable if the Retain Option is selected Internal variables that are not being retained will be initialized to 0 The initial value will be set regardless of the value of the IOM Hold Bit A50012 With a CJ2 CPU Unit initial values cannot be specified for input variables out put variables and internal variables in function blocks If you convert an NE1S project to a CJ2 project any initial value settings used in the NE1S project must be set from the program or function block algorithm 2 3 3 Function Block Specifications Function Block Specifications Function Block Elements Item Description Number of function block definitions 1 024 max per NE1S series CPU Unit and 2 048 max per CJ2 CPU Unit Number of instances 1 024 for the NE1S and 2 048 for the CJ2 Number of instance nesting levels 8 levels max Number of input variables VAR_INPUT per 64 variables max function block Number of output variables VAR_OUTPUT per 64 variables max function block The following table shows the items that must be entered by the user when defining function blocks tem Ci escription O Function block POU
196. e number for these instructions Specifying with EPATH Type Specify the data in the following format if it is accessed using EPATH type Use this format is used if the data is specified using Class Instance Attribute and the size of the logical value is specified in detail If the logical values are all 16 bits the same message will be sent as when specifying with Class Instance Attribute described above Reception Buffer Size Offset word C Reception Buffer Size C 1 0 Comm Port 0 0 No C 2 0 0 0 0 C 3 Service Execution Time C 4 8 0 IOI size N C 5 IOI_1 a z IOI Size in words C 4 N ION_N J C 4 N 1 Link Path Size M i C 4 N 2 LinkPath_1 LinkPath_2 Link Path Size in words C 4 N 1 M LinkPath_X LinkPath_Y Size of area for storing received data area specified by D data Unit WORD When a response larger than the reception buffer size is received the part that exceeds the buffer will be cancelled Comm Port No Internal logic port number Eight ports from 0 to 7 Service Execution Time Service execution time in the other node Normally specify 0000 hex IOI Size Specifies the size of IOI in word increments IOI_1 to IOI_N Specifies IOI in EPATH format Link Path Size Specifies the length of the Link Path Unit WORD Link Path_1 to LinkPath_Y Link Path Up to 16 nodes can be rela
197. e opened from the Properties Window for the registered library right click on the library and select Properties Delete Cancel 3 Input the name of the part and any other required items and then click the OK Button The part will be registered in the library and displayed in the Library Win dow as shown below Library B 43 Local Library i StageNod 5 10 4 Registering Rung Groups in the Library 1 2 3 1 Select one or more rungs in the Ladder Editor and select Library Rung Register to Library Click the rung header area to select the rung Click the rung header area while holding down the Shift Key to select multiple rungs The following dialog box will be displayed 145 Using the Library Section 5 10 Add Library x POU Name StageNo0 Library Local Library e To create a new folder in the library tree select the insertion location and click the New Folder Button 2 Select the folder in which to register the library part Local Library the de fault folder in this example and then click the OK Button e The Register Library Dialog Box will be displayed Register Library Item x r Description m Part Name Description Author Version e When the rung group used to pone register a library has a text file Name Folder the rung group can be linked to the relevant text file e Click the Add Button and specify the text
198. e or one output variable to represent all of the input or output variables 1 2 3 1 On the Input Tab Page or Output Tab Page of the Local Variable Editor se lect the variables to be grouped The following example shows a selection to group input variables Name Data Type Initial Value Retain Nonretain Comment EN BOOL Nonretain EN input z Run STA TRE Eo a e a _ oO e ea oo ooo ea a ki ET D Output a System Extemal 121 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 2 Right click the variables that were selected and select Group Input Out put Variables Group The Add FB I O Group Dialog Box will be displayed Add FB 1 0 Group xj m FB 1 0 Group Cancel 3 Input the name of the I O group and then click the OK Button As shown below the variables have been grouped under the specified I O group name e The following example shows a group called RB1_IN Name Data Type Initial Yalue Retain Nonretain Comment jen BOOL Nonretain EN input LA Run BOOL Nonretain ft RB1_IN e To ungroup the variables right click the I O group name and select Group Input Output Variables Release Group e To delete elements from the group open the group folder right click the element and then select Release Member from the Group Input Output Variables Menu To change the display order of the group elements right click the element and then select Up or Down
199. eased from 256 to 32 000 elements Item Using the NE1S Elements 1 to 255 elements Using the CJ2 1 to 32 000 elements The restriction on specifying variables as array subscripts has been removed Using the NE1S Using the CJ2 Specifying variables A variable can be specified Variables can be specified for for array subscripts only for the rightmost array array subscripts regardless of in multilevel arrays subscript the position including members Example aaa index0 bbb index1 ccc i ndex2 Structure members can be specified for array subscripts Example aaa str member Specifying structure members for array subscripts Array variables cannot be specified for elements With the CJ2 it is possible to set read protection for program POUs Note With the NE1S it is possible to set protection only for function blocks Password protection can be used for program uploading from the CPU Unit Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units Section 1 4 1 4 2 Restrictions for CJ2 CPU Units Compared with NE1S series CPU Units The following restrictions apply to CJ2 CPU Units in comparison to the NE1S series CPU Units Using the NE1S Initial values for variables Supported Using the CJ2 Not supported Change log Supported Not supported SEND MAIL instruction Supported MLSND Not supported This section describes the structure of the programs
200. ecks whether an external variable and global variable match Up Ctrl T Shifts the selected member up one rung Down Ctrl 4 Shifts the selected member down one rung Add to Watch Adds a variable to the Watch Window Import CSV Format Imports variables from a CSV format file Export CSV Format 4 4 8 Data Type Menu Insert Struct Shortcut Exports variables to a CSV format file The Data Type Menu is displayed only when the Data Type Editor is active Function Inserts a data structure Insert Element Inserts an element into a data structure Edit Edits a user defined data structure Move Upward Moves a user defined data structure upward Move Downward Moves a user defined data structure downward Check Checks a data structure for errors Import CSV File Imports a data structure from a CSV format file Export CSV File Exports a data structure to a CSV format file 67 Menu Item Lists 4 4 9 Build Menu Compile Shortcut Ctrl F7 Section 4 4 Function Compiles and performs a program check on the active program or function block Build F7 Builds the entire program Stop build 4 4 10 Controller Menu Connect Shortcut Ctrl W Stops building a program Function Used to select the communications port and then connect online to the PLC Disconnect
201. ect a variable from the global variables The mismatching external variables will be displayed in the external list Global i External Variable Name o TET ET e van DINT PROG_OI Extermal variables with the same a name must be Global variables and extemal variables are overwritten changed with a selected external variable Global gt gt External E Enter Close b Unifying to the External Variable s Data Definition Select the variable in the External variable mismatch list and click the Global lt lt External Button Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box that is displayed Note For consistency the comments of the external variable global vari able are overwritten by the selected external variable s comment In addition the global variable s AT specification initial value and network variable settings will be deleted 135 Editing Comments 5 7 Editing Comments Section 5 7 5 7 1 Overview The following comments can be input and edited Comment type Description Display location Variable comments Comments for variables Refer to the following figure Instruction com Comments for instructions ments Line comments Comments that are input on comment lines inserted above or below rungs Pe Line comment 0 svol auto 000000 E E lt 4 Variable comment set to two lines lt _ Instruction comment set to two lines MOV 021 Dat
202. ed REPEAT REPEAT a a b UNTIL a lt 10000 END_REPEAT Repetition Evaluates the expressions of one group repeating until the condition a lt 10000 is true The condition for this expression is evaluated at the end of the loop i e even if it is not true the loop is evaluated at least once FOR a 1 TO 2 DO IF flag THEN EXIT END_IF SUM SUM a END_FOR Functions ADD End This statement can be used to exit an evaluation for a repetition state ment Description Adds MUL Multiplies SUB Subtracts MOD Finds remainder DIV Divides MOVE Assigns Bit manipulation SHL Shifts 1 bit left SHR Shifts 1 bit right ROR Rotates 1 bit right without carry bit ROL Rotates 1 bit left without carry bit Logic operation AND Logical AND OR Logical OR XOR Logical exclusive OR NOT Logical NOT Character string manipulation LEFT Gets character string from the left RIGHT Gets character string from the right MID Gets character string from any position DELETE Deletes character string CONCAT Concatenates character strings INSERT Inserts character string REPLACE Replaces character string LEN Gets character string length FIND Finds character string j Selection 224 MAX Gets maximum value MIN Gets minimum va
203. ed I O Tables Real I O Tables Registered I O Tables The real I O tables are tables that are created by the CPU Unit in the PLC to show the Units actually mounted in the PLC When the I O table creation operation is performed the real I O tables are registered in the CPU Unit as the registered I O tables The real I O tables cannot be changing from the NE Programmer The registered I O tables in the CPU Unit are used by the CPU Unit when allo cating I O Use either of the following procedures to register I O tables in the CPU Unit e Execute the I O table creation operation online to register the real I O tables in the CPU Unit as the registered I O tables e Create and edit I O tables offline and then transfer them to the CPU Unit 7 5 3 Creating I O Tables 1 2 3 Use the following procedure to create the real I O tables online 1 Connect online to the CPU Unit 2 Select Controller I O Table Create The following dialog box will be displayed x t I O table will be created e 4re you sure re 3 Click the Yes Button The real I O tables will be registered in the CPU Unit as registered I O ta bles 181 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data Section 7 6 7 5 4 Deleting I O Tables Use the following procedure to delete the registered I O tables online 1 2 3 1 Connect online to the CPU Unit 2 Select Controller I O Table Delete The following dialog box will be disp
204. ed by D data Unit WORD When a response larger than the reception buffer size is received the part that exceeds the buffer will be cancelled Comm Port No Internal logic port number Eight ports from 0 to 7 Service Execution Time Service execution time in the other node Normally specify 0000 hex Class Specifies the Class Instance Specifies the Instance ID Attribute Specifies the Attribute The attribute will be 00 if it is not specified Link Path Size Specifies the length of the Link Path Unit WORD Link Path_1 to LinkPath_Y Link Path Up to 16 nodes can be relayed by specifying the link path CSND instructions may time out even when network and node status is normal if more than 16 nodes are relayed If the link path is specified with more than 16 nodes a constant time must be specified for the service execution time normally 0000 hex Communications Port Number Eight logical communications ports are provided Eight communications instructions can be executed simulta neously 247 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Only one instruction can be executed at one time for each communications port When executing 9 or more communications instructions you have to prepare exclusive control This communications port number is shared with NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS instruction CSND and PROTOCOL MACRO instruction PMCR Therefore you must be careful not to designate the sam
205. ed for CIP to use CSND instructions to help you understand CSND instruction specifications deeply Refer to Data Access for NE1S Series on page 244 when the using CSND instructions Refer to Data Type on page 264 and Response Code on page 268 as required for a lists of data types and error codes supported by NE1S Series CIP Object Object Model Each device is modeled as a group of Objects in the conception of CIP Object represents something that a particular element of a device is abstracted You should access to each Object when accessing from the outside Object represents the processing and the data resulted from abstraction of a function in the device A request from the outside of Object such as Read Data is called Service Data belonging to Object is called Attribute The entity of Object is called Instance or Object Instance When Object is generalized it is called Class For example Japan is one of Instances Object Instances of Class Nation External request Example Read Write oo Processing Object Instance 229 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Reference Information In CIP Common Specifications Object Class Instance Attribute and Service are explained as follows Extracts from CIP Common Specifications Object An abstract representation of a particular component within a product Class A set of objects
206. ed whether or not the specified structured variable is defined correctly CRC Code Cyclic Redundant Code calculated from the structure definition is used for con firming that it is identified with the structure definition Although the format of Request Data is the same that of Response Data is different Type will be AO hex CRC Code is stored in the channel next to Type Field Service Code 4D hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004D D 4 None S 2 AO 02 3 CRC S 4 0100 S 5 Data to be written Array Variable In case of an array variable access to the whole of an array variable is the same as in the case of Predefined Data Type Access to an array element is access to a member of Instance Service Code 4D hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004D D 4 None S 2 Type 00 3 0100 S 4 Data to be written S n Data to be written Type Data Type Code of a variable which was read Refer to the following Data Type Code Data to be written Set the data to be written in order from the lower byte to the upper byte 254 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example 1 In case that an array variable with ten INT type elements ArrayData 10 exists and that you access to the whole of this array variable Service Code 4D hex Request Data Response Data Word Word S 1 004D D 4 None 2
207. elated flags and words Related flags and words Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Next cycle PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units Appendix E Serial Port SYSWAY Mode Unit Number Settings 0 to 31 Default 0 Function This setting determines the CPU Unit s unit number when it is connected in a 1 to N N 2 to 32 Host Link Serial Port NT Link Max Settings O0to7 Default 1 Function This setting determines the highest unit number of PT that can be connected to the PLC Serial Port Response Monitor Time Settings 0 to 25 500 ms Default 0 ms Function Set the response monitor time in increments of 100 ms for the setting of the RS 232C port Related flags and words Related flags and words Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Next cycle New setting s effectiveness Next cycle 279 PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units FINS Write Protection FINS Write Protection Settings Related flags New setting s and words effectiveness As soon as changed Enable or disable FINS write protection Default Disable This setting specifies whether or not to e
208. ele ments Data structure members can be specified for array subscripts Read Protection for Programs as One Logical POU Element A password can be set for a program to prevent reading the program Read protection was possible only Read protection is also possible for without password verification for function programs blocks Support for Converting Physical Address Inputs to Variables Not supported Supported e lf a physical address is input directly into the Ladder Editor a variable will be automatically created if a comment is also input e If a variable is input or selected in the Ladder Editor and the Enter Key is pressed a comment can be input in the same continuous operation Expanded Variable Attributes e The Network Variable attribute for global variables was changed to a Convert to Network Variable attribute and a Network I O Variable attribute e Items for the Convert to Network Variable attribute and a Network I O Variable attribute were added to the following Option settings for vari ables Variable Editors and printer output Only a Network Variable attribute A Convert to Net work Variable attribute and a Network I O Vari able attribute Variables Used List Improvement 1 Comments were added to the Variables Used List and Cross reference Report No comments Comments were added Variables Used List Improvement 2 The Variables Used List was changed to a window so that i
209. ent Value Current value of the timer Up Flag Count up 01 hex Others 00 hex Information of Forced Reset Reset Forced 01 hex Not Forced 00 hex Only current values can be written STRING Data CPU Unit Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Data 1 Data 2 1 Data m Data n N 0 hex 0 hex All data up to 00 hex is treated as string data If there is an odd number of characters in the string 00 hex is stored in the lower byte of the word CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Size 00 1 Data 1 Data 2 N Data m Data n Size Data Size unit byte Data Data of letters When Data Size is an odd number pad the lower side of the last word with 00 hex 266 CIP Message Communications Appendix D REAL Data READ data conforms to the definition of single precision floating point data in IEEE 754 Single precision data uses 32 bits in the following format Actual value 1 s2 127 1 4 s e f 31 30 23 22 0 CPU Unit Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 f bits 08 to 15 f bits 00 to 07 1 S e f bits 16 to 22 CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 f bits 00 to 07 f bits 08 to 15 1 e f bits 16 to 22 e 267 CIP Message Communications Response Code General Status Code General Status Code is stored in the response reception area D 2 after execution of CSND Instruction
210. eoe dreen eS beet toed bg Gees Henge eg age aoe 175 7 3 2 Executing the Automatic Upload Function 175 7 4 Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected 000 177 T 4 1 OVELVIEW on cides hn oe oy Be Ee see ee es Se EES 177 7 4 2 Changing to a CPU Unit on the Same Ethernet Network 178 7 4 3 Changing to a CPU Unit on a Different Network 179 7 5 Online Operations for I O Tables 0 00 0 cee eee eee 181 TES VO Tables tex seh g fs hocks Saas ihe ha Maes ooh ERAS 181 7 5 2 Real I O Tables and Registered I O Tables 181 7 5 3 Creating O Tabless 2 os vont ose tiee ches eh E een ces 181 7 5 4 Deleting I O Tables 0 00 0 0 eee eee eee 182 7 5 5 Verifying I O Tables 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 182 7 6 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data 182 T2021 OVERVIEW aai sce bees at adie eb ae Waianae 182 76 25 Uploading sec 35 0403 Sai Awe Sed w Met 4 oe Sek Mee wath ee Peed 183 7 6 3 Downloading ciias cee ee eee 185 7 624 Comparing aren eee ee ded aaa deed eae Hg bead eet 188 7 7 Changing the Operating Mode 0 0 e eee eee eee 189 7 8 gt Monitoring r o3 04 dove jes r EREA E TA tae sare ee we 189 T58 OVELVIEWS os ccc c seed Sb ie ccs We toe ee eles eb eee eee ee ets 189 7 8 2 Starting Monitoring Functions 000 190 7 8 3 Monitoring in the Ladder Editor
211. eplace operations can be performed in the tions in the Variable Editor active Variable Editor 5 8 2 Searching Programs 1 2 3 1 Press the Ctrl Shift F Keys Alternately select Edit Find in Programs The Find in Programs Dialog Box will be displayed Find in Programs Find what Input the search string Search Variable Select the area to be searched MV Match case Logical POUs AlPOUs C Target POU tr_data 7 Physical Configuration Select this option and specify a POU from the list to search only one POU f C AllTasks Select this option to include FB NI Sinit instances in the Select this option and specify a search E funeiion task from the list to search only one task Cancel 2 Setthe range to be searched the text string to search for and the search conditions and then click the OK Button The search results will be displayed in the Output Window Variable Scanning Ready NE1S POU ctr_data Program Address 1 OUT ReadyOperand Ready 4 y Cli j NE1S POU ctr_data Program Address 4 LD Ready Operand1 Ready Double click to jump to NE1S POUMIF_RB Program Address 5 OUT Ready Operand Ready the relevant location in NE1SSPOUMIF_RB Program Address 11 OUT Ready Operand1 Ready the program Found 4 items Bald Compare Find 138 Search Replace Function Section 5 8 5 8 3 Search Replace Jump Operations in the Ladder Editor Searching in the Ladder
212. er Clear Error Clears errors Ctrl J Controller Set Force On Force sets forces ON a bit Ctrl K Controller Set Force Off Force resets forces OFF a bit 4 6 Option Settings This menu contains various settings for NE Programmer displays and opera tions Select Tool Option The following Integrated Options Dialog Box will be dis played General Sets general displays and operation for the NE Programmer Outline Sets display items in the Outline Window and timing linked with the ladder editor Variable Specifies which variable properties will be displayed Ladder Specifies whether variable names physical addresses and com ments will be displayed hidden in the Ladder Editor and how many lines will be displayed Displays hides grid lines sets fonts cell widths and colors for items in the Ladder Editor Specifies whether instance names will be generated automatically Mnemonic Specifies whether values comments addresses and data types will be displayed hidden in the Mnemonic Editor ST Sets the font properties and colors of items in the ST Editor Library Specifies whether to edit local variables when rung elements are inserted Also specifies whether prefixes are added to global vari ables when using the library s POUs Program Check Sets the program check level Data Trace Sets the colors of items in the data trace display 73 Option Setti
213. ernately double click an empty row The Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed 131 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks Parameter Path Edit ariable Global x Path CJ2_Project4 CJ2H_CPU67_EIP Section 5 6 Variable 4 Input variable name Data Type BOOL Array Size Q Size 2 Byte Q Initial Value to set Address Network Variable Enable Network 1 0 Setting None Retain Nonretain Nonretain Comment Cancel 2 Input the variable name 3 Set the variable parameters 4 When all settings have been completed Double click parameter click the OK Button Parameters are displayed as described in the following table Note Meaning Displays the valid scope of the variable Refer to 2 2 for detailed variable specifications Values Global variables Project_name configuration_name Data Type Set the data type of the variable BOOL INT UINT DINT UDINT WORD DWORD TIMER COUNTER STRING REAL or user defined Array Size Set the number of elements for a one dimensional array or a two dimensional array Two dimensional arrays can be set only for CJ2 CPU Units When not specifying an array leave this settings blank for both a one dimensional and two dimensional array When specifying a one dimensional array set the number of array ele ments for a one dimensional array and leave the setting for a two dimensional array blank Whe
214. es for Consistency 134 5 7 Editing Comments si csat cobs sok sae tech bw a da Saale a 136 D721 COVELVIEW aie oie ei ee oes Ca lees 136 5 7 2 Inputting Variable Comments 0 0000 137 5 7 3 Inputting Instruction Comments 0 000 137 5 7 4 Inputting Line Comments 0 00 0 000000000 137 5 8 Search Replace Function 0 0 e cece eee 138 5 821 OVERVIEW vn f oder eats ee eg Oh SLE ee 138 5 8 2 Searching Programs 0 0 eee eee eee 138 5 8 3 Search Replace Jump Operations in the Ladder Editor 139 5 8 4 Search Replace Operations in the Variable Editor 141 87 88 5 9 Cross Reference Function 0 0 0 0 ccc eee cece eee 5 9 1 OVELVICW ici its dels ne ears we Ga Ree eae on 5 9 2 Cross Reference Pop up Window Displays and Operations Using the Library on ici Sok Ot ee la SMa ocd Sodas ate A ats S TORAT OVERVIEW era e Er ee chats windy a E ates ete tee aA OMe Steals 5 10 2 Displaying the Library Window 0008 5 10 3 Registering Logical POUs in the Library 5 10 4 Registering Rung Groups in the Library 5 10 5 Registering Folders in the Library 0004 5 10 6 Using the Library 0 0 eee eee 5 10 7 Transferring Library Items for the NEIS to CJ2 Outline Window ss ea pe bese ee ee dos ge se S
215. et for the function block specified in step 1 After the password is set the function block cannot be displayed or edited without inputting the password 3 The following message will be displayed when you attempt to open a func tion block or program for which a password has been set Input the pass word to temporarily release the protection and perform the editing x This POU has a read protect password Please enter the password Password I Cancel Display Icons The three display icons for function blocks are shown in the following table POU type Protection OFF Protection ON Protection ON but temporarily disabled Function block Program Clearing Read Protection When protection is temporarily disabled input the current password in the Old Password Field input an empty i e blank password in the New Password Field and click the OK Button The set read protection will be cleared 128 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks Section 5 6 5 6 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks 5 6 1 Creating a Configuration Use the following procedure to create a new configuration 1 2 3 A 1 Right click the project name in the Workspace and select Create Con figuration Alternately select File New Configuration The following New Dialog Box will be displayed LL xl By Configuration Project fy CJ2H_CPUGS_EIP Bly CJ2H_CPUG7_
216. et with the Variable Editor Variables and data structures cannot be declared VAR END_VAR in the ST Editor Creating an ST Program 118 1 2 3 Note 1 Right click the Logical POUs in the Project Window and select Create POU Alternately select File New POU The following New Dialog Box will be displayed SS xj E LogicaiPoU Project I Copy POU POU Name Source PUL J Addipretiz to external variable Type Select ST Program Function Block Language gi JL Cre CEE SFC Cancel 2 Input the program name or function name in the POU Name field In this example ST_PROGO7 is used 3 For Type select Program or Function Block in this example Program is selected 4 For Language select ST 5 Click the OK Button The logical POUs that are created will be displayed under Logical POUs in the Project Window Also an ST Editor will be displayed for the program or function block that was created Ladder programs ST program that was created Local Variable Editor inj Comment OB Proifct om Instructions ST Editor E EN Programs Internal ExtemalA System External jg ST PROGON Bij NE1S_CPUO1_Rev01 5 Global Variables This completes creating a program 6 Finally code the program Refer to Appendix B for operators and conditional statements Refer to page 103 in 5 3 7 for procedures to use the Local
217. f CPU 2 is 9 so that the fourth byte will be 09 239 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Link Address of CPU Unit on the backplane is 0 Therefore the fifth and sixth bytes will be 01 and 00 respectively Link Path will be as follows 01 13 02 09 01 00 Example 2 In case of accessing from CPU 1 to CPU 2 via Ethernet Structure IP Address of CPU 1 192 168 200 1 IP Address of CPU 2 192 168 200 33 IP Address IP Address 192 168 200 1 192 168 200 33 CNS CPU 2 Ethernet Link Path The route is as follows Ethernet Port of CPU 1 CPU 2 IP Address 192 168 200 33 The route above is explained below Port Segment is used for setting Link Path Therefore the top 3 bits Segment Type of the first byte will be 0 inevitably In this example data is transmitted via Ethernet Port Port No of Ethernet Port is 2 IP Address is used for describing Link Address on Ethernet IP Address is larger than 1 byte so that Extended Link Address Size will be 1 Therefore the first byte will be 12 Link Address Size falls into the second byte IP Address of the target CPU 2 is 192 168 200 33 The number of the letters of this IP Address should be counted including dot because the whole IP Address must be described with ASCII code In this case there are 14 letters OE hex Link Path is as follows 12 OE 31 39 32 2E 31 36 38
218. file location and file name to save in and then click the Save Button The project will be saved with an nlx filename extension 5 2 5 Changing the Controller Series 92 A Caution Note A project for an NE1S series CPU Unit can be converted to a project for a CJ2 CPU Unit by changing the Controller series The CJ2 CPU Units do not support initial value settings for variables If you convert an NE1S project to a CJ2 project any initial value settings used in the NE1S project will be lost and must be set from the program Also the instruc tion set and execution timing are different between the NE1S series PLCs and the CJ2 CPU Units After conversion sufficiently check the user program e g ladder program and parameters to be sure that they operate correctly before using them for actual system operation Always perform a program check on the program before downloading it to the PLC A project for a CJ2 CPU Unit cannot be changed to a project for a NE1S series CPU Unit Creating Projects and Logical POUs Section 5 2 1 2 3 1 Right click to select the project in the Project Window s Project om Instructions lies Workspace SRGZENEIS Project_1 NE15 US Data Types Create Configuration B lt Logical POUs BJ Function Blocks F0 f Flicker E E Programs By NE1S_CPU01_Rev01 4 Global Variables Sy Task Rename 2 Select Convert Series from the menu The Convert Controller Series
219. first remove the cause of the error 2 Select Controller Clear Error Alternately press the F4 Key Errors however cannot be cleared when another Programming Devices has the access right or the CPU Unit is in RUN mode The information will be displayed in the status bar when an error occurs Ready IO Table verify error Information will also be display on the Error Tab Page of the Error Log Win dow Refer to 7 18 Displaying Errors and the Error Log for information on errors and the Error Log Window Controller Clear Error is the same function as that executed for the Clear Button on the Error Tab Page in the Error Log Window 203 Clearing Memory Section 7 16 7 16 Clearing Memory Memory in the CPU Unit can be cleared in the following units e All user programming multiple programs e I O Memory Area e Parameter Area Perform all of the following operations online Before starting connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Clear Memory The following dialog box will be displayed Clear Memory Target Memory Memory Card Bey Parameters 2 Select the data to be cleared and then click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed NE Programmer Are you sure i p Memory will be cleared 3 Click the Yes Button The data specified in step 2 will be cleared 7 17 Restarting Services Use the following pr
220. g P_LE CF002 Instruction Execution Error ER Flag P_ER CF003 Carry CY Flag P_CY CF004 Greater Than GT Flag P_GT CF005 Equals EQ Flag P_EQ CF006 Less Than LT Flag P_LT CF007 Negative N Flag P_N CF008 Overflow OF Flag P_OF CF009 Underflow UF Flag P_UF CF010 Access Error Flag P_AER CF011 Always OFF Flag P_Off CF114 Always ON Flag P_On CF113 Clock Pulses 0 02 second clock pulse bit P_0_02s CF103 0 1 second clock pulse bit P_O_is CF100 0 2 second clock pulse bit P_0_2s CF101 1 minute clock pulse bit P_1mim CF104 1 0 second clock pulse bit P_1s CF102 Auxiliary Area Flags Bits First Cycle Flag P_First_Cycle A200 11 First Task Execution Flag P_First_Cycle_Task A200 15 Maximum Cycle Time P_Max_Cycle_Time A262 Present Scan Time P_Cycle_Time_Value A264 Cycle Time Error Flag P_Cycle_Time_Error A401 08 Low Battery Flag P_Low_Battery A402 04 Output OFF Bit P_Output_Off_Bit A500 15 227 External Variables Appendix C 228 Appendix D CIP Message Communications This document describes CIP message transmission for NE1S Series by using CSND instructions CIP Object on page 229 through Example of Use for NE1S Series on page 238 describe the basic information requir
221. g s effectiveness 10 to 4 000 ms Default 1 000 ms This setting is valid only when Enable Minimum Cycle Time Setting is set to Enable The Cycle Time Too Long Flag A40108 will be turned ON if the cycle time exceeds this set ting Power OFF Interrupt Settings Function A40108 Cycle Time Too Long Flag Related flags and words Start of opera tion Can t be changed during operation New setting s effectiveness Invalid Valid Default Invalid When this setting is set to Enabled the power OFF interrupt task will be executed when power is interrupted Power OFF Detection Time Settings Function Related flags and words At startup or at start of opera tion Can t be changed during operation New setting s effectiveness 0 to 10 ms 1 ms increments Default 0 276 This setting determines how much of a delay there will be from the detection of a power interruption approximately 10 to 25 ms after the power supply voltage drops below 85 of the rated value for an AC power supply or below 80 for a DC power supply to the confirmation of a power interruption The default setting is 0 ms When the power OFF interrupt task is enabled it will be exe cuted when the power interruption is confirmed If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled the CPU will be reset and oper ation will be stopped At startup or at start of opera tion
222. g Ladder Mode Function Block the Edit Function Block Dialog Box will be displayed Select the function block input the in stance name and click the OK Button EE Project E Instructions Workspace al faa NE1S_Project_1 NE1S mS Data Types 24 Logical POUs 1 8 Function Blocks E Programs The function block will be inserted into the ladder diagram and displayed as shown below Pion Ficker001 Automatically allocated instance name Automatically Generated Instance Variables If the Create Function Block Instances Automatically setting is enabled default in the Edit Tab of the Ladder Window under Too Option instance variables will be automatically generated and an instance name will be au tomatically displayed as shown in the above diagram The instance name consists of the FB body name _XXX where XXX indicates a serial num ber starting from 001 When the Create Function Block Instances Auto matically setting is enabled default the procedure described in step 3 is not required 2 Input the function block operands e Method 1 Double click the operand input position or select it and press the En ter Key to display the Edit Function Block Argument Dialog Box Input the function block operands in this dialog box e Method 2 It is also possible to select the input position and input the value direct ly from the keyboard or drag and drop the variable from the Variab
223. g Lines with the Mouse 1 2 3 1 Click the Draw Line Icon in the toolbar to enter line connection mode X Je H se o o NGA See ae 2 Move the cursor to the starting point of the line indicated as a light green dot and click the left mouse button to set the starting point J 1 1 3 Move the cursor to the end point of the line The line to be created will be indicated in blue J 1 E as A 4 Click the end point of the line The line will be displayed 101 Programming Methods Section 5 3 To leave line connection mode click the Select Icon Inputting Lines from the Keyboard 1 2 3 1 Move the cursor to the starting point for the line and then press the Ctrl L Keys 2 Move the cursor to the end point of the line using the cursor keys The line to be created will be indicated in blue 3 Press the Ctrl L Keys at the end point for the line The line will be displayed Deleting Vertical and Horizontal Lines Line Deletion Mode Deleting Lines with the Mouse 1 2 3 1 Click the Erase Line Icon in the toolbar to enter line deletion mode k e A oo E gl aI i A a 2 Move the cursor to the starting point of the line to be deleted indicated as a light green dot and click the left mouse button to set the starting point AA J E J E J 2 3 Move the cursor to the end point of the line to be deleted The line to be deleted will be indicated in gray
224. h an icon showing that the library cannot be used because the Library Window that is open is for a project for the CJ2 CPU Unit Check the library properties to determine whether the library items are for the NE1S or the CJ2 Double click or right click and select Properties from the pop up menu Generic AM A FB_01_forCJ2 Controller CJ2 Author Create Date 2008 08 07 13 48 09 Version Description l Documents Name Folder Open 5 10 3 Registering Logical POUs in the Library 1 2 3 1 Right click the logical POU program or function block in the Workspace and select Register to Library from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed ba POU Name StageNoO Library a Local Library oa 144 Using the Library Section 5 10 e To create a new folder in the library tree select the insertion location and click the New Folder Button 2 Select the folder in which to register the library part Local Library the de fault folder in this example and then click the OK Button The Register Library Dialog Box will be displayed Description Parts Name Description Author Revision Document e When the logical POU used to Name FolderName register a library has a text file the library can be linked to the relevant text file e Click the Add Button and specify the text file e The added text file can b
225. he error Invalid parameter A parameter associated with the request was invalid This code is used when a parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and or the requirements defined in an Application Object Specification Write once value or medium already written An attempt was made to write to a write once medium e g WORM drive PROM that has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be changed once established Invalid Reply Received An invalid reply is received e g reply service code does not match the request service code or reply message is shorter than the minimum expected reply size This status code can serve for other causes of invalid replies Reserved by CIP for future extensions Key Failure in path The Key Segment that was included as the first segment in the path does not match the destination module The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed Path Size Invalid The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included Unexpected attribute in list An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time Invalid Member ID The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class Instance Attribute Member not settable A request to modify a non
226. he system can allocate memory to global variables automatically or specific physical addresses can be allocated manually direct specification To use global variables within logical POUs global variables must be refer enced from external variables as local variables For details on external vari ables refer to External Variables VAR_EXTERNAL in 2 2 10 Details on Local Variables Logical POU Programa Global variables Name Data type Address Physical address a WORD b WORD D00100 I O memory used for automatic allocation Automatic allocation User selected I O memory used for manual allocation D001 oo Physical addresses can also be directly specified without using variables 2 1 4 Programming Languages The algorithms in programs and function blocks FB can be written as ladder diagrams LD or structured text ST Logical POU Language Ladder diagram a 0 b a 1 IF a gt 20 THEN FB Algorithm 15 Variables Section 2 2 Creating Programs in NE Programmer When creating logical POUs in NE Programmer select LD when creating a ladder diagram or ST when creating structured text Note 1 When using ladder diagrams the program can be input directly in the lad der diagram with mnemonics Mnemonics can also be input in a mne monics only editing screen by select
227. i N I Show Physical Addresses 1 Line Show Rung Number and Ladder Program Address ja 7 Comments Show Instruction nemonic ad ea Description or IV Show Variable Comments 1 Line r A ra F gt ha ST IV Show Instruction Comments 1 a Line M Show Grid END H Comment Display Style m Library C OmitHead Omit Tail Program Check a Data Trace Reset All Variables Show Variable Name Select this option to display the variable names The style of the variable name display can be selected Variable Name Display Style e Omit Head If all of the variable name cannot be displayed select this option to display only the last part of the variable name Omit Tail If all of the variable name cannot be displayed select this option to display only the first part of the variable name Physical Addresses Show Physical Addresses Select this option to display the physical addresses in addition to variable names default OFF A physical address will be displayed however if it is directly specified to the bit The number of lines of physical addresses can be set Comments Show Variable Comments Select this option to display the variable comments The number of lines of variable comments can be set Show Instruction Comments Select this option to display the instruction comments The number of lines of instruction comments can be set Comment Display Style e Omit Head If all of the comment cannot be disp
228. iateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyers application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities iii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equip ment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iv Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop erty Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod uct NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON S PRODUCT IS PROP ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM Programmable Products Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Performance Data Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabi
229. ift 0 Switches to the next window as the active window in the following order MDI Window Library Cross Reference Property Watch Output Outline Workspace Toggle Split Window F6 Switches between the Variable Editor and Program Editor Toggle POU Task Window Alt F6 Switches between the program window and the task window Close All Closes all windows Cascade Cascades all open windows Tile Horizontally Tiles all open windows vertically Tile Vertically Tiles all open windows horizontally Arrange Icons Arranges the icons for minimized windows 69 Shortcut Keys 4 4 14 Help Menu Topics Shortcut Section 4 5 Function Displays the NE Programmer help function Instruction Reference Displays the instruction reference About 4 5 Shortcut Keys The following tables list the NE Programmer s shortcut key operations 4 5 1 Shortcut keys Window View Operations Menu name Displays information on the NE Programmer version Function Ctrl PageUp Switches the Tab Page PageDown Shift F10 Displays the popup menu at the cursor position same as right clicking Ctrl F4 Closes the program window F6 Window Toggle Split Window Switches between the Variable Editor and Program Edi tor Alt F6 Window Toggle POU Task Window Switches bet
230. iguration Setting Window The Ethernet Tab Page shown below will be displayed Setup NE1S_CPU01_Rev03 ioj x Groups Parameters Select the group gt TCAP Setro ra rs FTP Server Settings IP Address 192 168 200 200 Emal See Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Patcsler tings Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Host Name Q MAC Address Basic help is help displayed on the Display BOOTP client used or not Default 72 The current settings are displayed Double click here to change the settings Parameters with a mark cannot be changed The default value and setting range for the current parameter are displayed This parameter is read only is current pa rameter displayed when having not Returns all gt set Defaults parameters to their default settings 159 Build Settings Build Tab Page Section 6 4 2 Make all of the required settings and then click the OK Button 6 4 Build Settings Build Tab Page This section describes the setting procedure for the Build Settings Refer to 6 4 7 Build Settings for details on the individual settings 1 2 3 1 Click the Build Tab from the Configuration Setting Window The Build Tab Page shown below will be displayed Setup NE15_CPUD1_Re 03 liol x Groups Parameters The current settings are displayed Double click here to change the settings Parameters with a 9 mark cann
231. iguration of the PLC system 6 OVEIVICW e g site et be bathe ited a ENA AS Re AA 158 6 1 SStt gs asier Tiec ebb SOR ee ie dhe Gi rented a Tyee eae 158 6 1 2 Displaying the Setup Window for the System Configuration 158 6 2 PLC Setup PLC Setup Area Tab Page 0 00 000004 159 6 3 Ethernet Setup Ethernet Tab Page 0 00 00 0 00008 159 6 4 Build Settings Build Tab Page 0 00 0 160 6 4 1 Build Settings ossen E E ee teen ees 160 6 5 I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page 0 00 00 0008 161 6 5 1 Online Operations Creating Deleting Comparing 161 6 5 2 Offline Operations Editing I O Tables 161 157 Overview Section 6 1 6 1 Overview This section provides an overview of the settings and describes how to display the setting windows 6 1 1 Settings The following PLC system configuration settings can be made Setting tab name Setting PLC Setup Includes settings such as startup settings CPU Unit settings timer interrupt settings Special I O Unit refresh settings and communications settings Ethernet Includes the built in Ethernet Setup Build Includes settings such as detailed timer counter settings and IR DR sharing settings for tasks I O Table Used to create I O tables online or edit I O tables offline 6 1 2 Displaying the Setup Window for the System Configuration Use the following proce
232. ile there is forced status remaining in the CPU Unit 5 The program in the NE Programmer and the program in the CPU Unit must be the same to enable forcing bits ON or OFF If they are not the same upload the program An option in the Integrated Options Window s General Tab Page must be selected in order to allow write operations PV change force set reset and set reset operations on array variables specified with an index such as Afi To enable these write operations select Tool Option to display the Inte grated Options Window click the General Icon and select the Permit a write operation to the Array element with index variable e g A i Option An array variable s index value is based on the index value the last time that the value was monitored so a write operation may operate on a different array element if the variable s index value was changed since the last write opera tion 7 10 2 Turning Bits ON OFF Forcing Bits ON OFF and Clearing Forced 196 Status ExeState Note To change the status of a bit select it in the Ladder Editor or Watch Window and select one of the following from the Set Menu On Off Force On Force Off Release Force Status Example for Force ON Force OFF 420 Accel 5 16 0003 RbSetAcc 15 Forward RbSetDir Run et See lt gt Termenii ExeStateReset ExeState H e The icon shown below will be displayed on the Ladder Editor to indicate forced status if a b
233. imum recommended Memory 512 bytes minimum Hard disk 200 Mbytes minimum free space Monitor SVGA 800 x 600 pixels or better CD ROM drive 1 minimum OS Windows 2000 XP or Vista 1 Supported languages Japanese and English Method of connection to network 3G8F7 DRM21 PCI Board 3G8F5 DRM21 ISA Board 3G8E2 DRM21 PCMCIA Card Board or card Serial connection using gateway func tion from CIP to DeviceNet network Connection is made to a USB or RS 232C port on the CPU Unit of the PLC to which the DeviceNet Unit is mounted Note 1 The Network Configurator can also be connected to a ControlNet or Ethernet network 2 The NE1S series USB driver does not support Win dows Vista Connecting the NE Program mer using a Board or Card Relation to network The NE Programmer is allocated 1 node address Number of NE Pro grammer nodes con nected to network 1 per network PLCs supported by NE Programmer NE1S series CPU Units NE1S CPU01 CJ series CJ2 CPU Units CJU2H CPULILI EIP Main functions Creating logical POUs Instructions and function blocks Languages Ladder diagrams or structured text ST as required Creating configura tions Tasks and global variables PLC system configu ration PLC Setup Ethernet settings build settings I O table settings Online operation Automatic uploading when using a serial connectio
234. in the Browse Network Dialog Box xl m Address Z 192 168 200 201 Edit OK Cancel Click the Add Button The following Browse Address Dialog Box will be dis played xi Address Cancel Directly input the IP address in the Address Field To change the network or host portion of the IP address first change them in the Ethernet Setup IP address settings from the NE Programmer and then download the Ethernet Setup to the CPU Unit Refer to the manual for the relevant CPU Unit for information on setting the rotary switches 1 2 3 1 Right click the configuration name i e the PLC name in the Project Workspace Alternately select Controller System Configuration x Project Sm Instructions Workspace 5l PreumaticSystem NE1S I Data Types Logical POUs f8 Function Blocks a f Programs BR 5 Global Variables Task B 43 Cycle Execution 6 4 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 P 000 FisherTech 3 001 Common B Interrupt Execution I Extermal Interrupt Tasks 0 Right click Select System Configuration from the popup menu The System Configuration Setting Window shown in step 4 will be dis played Click the Ethernet Button Select TCP IP Settings in the Group List The following dialog box will be displayed to set TCP IP 173 Connecting Online via Ethernet 6 Section 7 2 Setup NE1S_CPUO1_RevO3 l
235. indow Output Window Function Title Bar Displays the file name Main Menu Commands are selected from this menu Tool Bar Functions are selected by clicking the icons Project Window Used to manage programs and data Outline Window Displays an outline of the ladder program currently being edited If any part of the outline is clicked a jump will be made to the corresponding location in the program Variable Editor Used to register and edit variables There is a Variable Editor for local variables and one for global variables Ladder Editor Used to create and edit ladder programs Up to 15 Ladder Editor Windows can be displayed at the same time Library Window Used to manage user defined libraries programs function blocks and program parts Cross Reference Displays other instructions that use the variable at the cursor location If any cross referenced Popup Window instruction is clicked a jump will be made to the corresponding location in the program Watch Window Displays the present values of registered variables and physical addresses 61 Project Window Section 4 3 Name Function Output Window Displays various information such as compiling error information and the results of program com parison Property Window Displays the properties of the instruction at the cursor position Status Bar Displays information such as the configuration name and online offline status
236. ing Edit Edit Using Mnemonic Editor from the menus It is not possible however to create logical POUs that call function blocks 2 When using ladder diagrams it is possible to import a text file txt con taining the mnemonics To import a file 1 Select the logical POU in pro gram view right click and select Change View and then 2 Right click in mnemonic view right click and select Import 2 1 5 Libraries Converting a Logical POU or Rungs to a Library With the NE Programmer logical POUs programs or function blocks or rungs in a program can be converted to a library file and reused Program Library file LIB Project Reuse Program Local variables FB Local variables FB Program section variables y Program section Local variables Creating Library Files in NE Programmer Either select the desired logical POU and select POU Register to Library from the Library Menu or select the rungs from the Ladder Window and select Rung Register to Library 2 2 Variables 2 2 1 Naming Variables The following rules apply to the CPU Units NE1S series CPU Units e CPU Units comply with the IEC 61131 3 standard e Allowed characters numbers 0 to 9 letters a to z letters A to Z and the underscore character e Encoding ASCII Number of characters 48 characters max 16 Variables CJ2 CPU Units Section 2 2 e Upper and lower case characters are distinguished b
237. ing Tab Page from the NE Programmer is set to match the setting on the rotary switches e The network portion of the IP address however must be changed using the Ethernet Settings on the NE Programmer CPU Unit Rotary Switch Settings Changes to the Ethernet Settings are effective the next time the CPU Unit is started For information on setting rotary switch for CJ2 CPU Units refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W472 Network Mask A subnet mask can be set Class A 255 0 0 0 Class B 255 255 0 0 Class C 255 255 255 0 Set the same subnet mask for all nodes on the same subnetwork Default Gateway Select the IP address of the default gateway Do not set anything if a default gateway is not being used 282 Ethernet Settings for CJ2 CPU Units Appendix F Host Name Set a host name for the IP address of the CPU Unit Do not set anything if a host name is not being used MAC Address The MAC Address of the CPU Unit is displayed 283 Ethernet Settings for CJ2 CPU Units Appendix F 284 A access right releasing 219 Add to Watch 192 addresses allocation areas 39 inputting 109 applications precautions xvii arrays 20 settings 221 specifying 105 assigning keys 95 auto indent 82 background execution settings 274 battery low battery error detection 274 bits forcing ON and OFF 195 inputting addresses 109 turning OFF 196 turning ON
238. ing is sup ported up to 8 levels Program Instance A FB1 Instance X FB2 Instance A Up to 8 levels 42 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Placement of Instances in Program Branches Allowed on the Left and Right Sides of the Instance Multiple Instances in a Single Rung Connections between Instances are Allowed Note AND and OR Conditions Allowed on Input Side Branches can be placed on the left side of the instance EN input side as well as the right side of the instance to the left of ENO Correct Correct hnstra tion A single program rung can have more than one instance Correct Correct FB OF O FB j O FB jO An instance s ENO output can be input directly to another instance s EN input Furthermore an instance s output parameter can be input directly to another instance s input parameter The data type of the input parameter must match the data type of the output parameter As long as the data types match other data types can be used besides BOOL BOOL including WORD WORD and DWORD DWORD FBI FB2 FB3 FB4 EN ENO EN ENO EN ENO JEN ENO OUTI INi OUT2 N2 ouT3 n Up to 4 instances can be connected between the left and right bus bars in the ladder diagram If more than 4 are entered the additional instructions will wrap around There can be up to 15
239. ing procedure to move the cursor from the function block body to the location that called the function block Select View To Upper Layer Alternatively click the toolbar icon The cur sor will move to the function block instance of the call source 5 5 Read Protection for Logical POUs Passwords can be set to set read protection for logical POUs in function blocks or programs This function is also enabled offline If read protection is set a function block cannot be displayed or edited without inputting the password Printing can be performed only if Read Protection is OFF or is ON but tempo rarily disabled 127 Read Protection for Logical POUs Section 5 5 Note Read protection is ON but temporarily disabled when a read pro tected function block is displayed after inputting the correct pass word 1 2 3 1 Right click the function block or program to be read protected and select Protect from the popup menu 8 Project ne Instructions Workspace 9 NE1S_Project_1 NE1S mS Data Types Logical POUs Function Blocks a Fo Flicker ay a DNI lt Right click the function block or program fq LD_02 and select Protect S ST_PROGOI ml NFIS CPIM Revit The following Set Password Dialog Box will be displayed xi Set read protect password for this POU Old Password New Password Reenter Password Cancel 2 Input the password and then click the OK Button A password will be s
240. ion in program Information in Controller PV status after downloaded information information before download download Retain Non retain and BOOL VarA BOOL VarA Not retained Address specification with address specification automatic allocation retain non retain BOOL VarA BOOL VarA Not retained with address specification with address specification BOOL VarA BOOL VarA Retained automatic allocation retain with address specification BOOL VarA BOOL VarA Retained automatic allocation retain automatic allocation non retain BOOL VarA BOOL VarA Not retained automatic allocation non retain automatic allocation retain Variable exists in both VarA VarA Retained project and Controller Variable does not exist VarA None Not retained in Controller Variable does not exist None VarA Not retained in project Data types match BOOL VarA BOOL VarA Retained Data types do not BOOL VarA WORD VarA Not retained match DWORD VarA WORD VarA Not retained TYPE stA TYPE stA STRUCT STRUCT Member1 BOOL Member2 BOOL Retained Member2 WORD Member1 WORD Retained Members UINT Members UDINT Not retained Member4 DWORD Not retained END_STRUCT END_STRUCT END_TYPE END_TYPE VAR VAR VarA stA VarA stA END_VAR END_VAR TYPE stA TYPE stA STRUCT STRUCT Member2 BOOL Member1 BOOL Retained Member1 WORD Member2 WORD Retained Members UDINT Members UINT Not retained Member4 DWORD Not retained
241. ions instruction_loperand_loperand_loperand Refer to 5 3 4 Inputting Constants and 5 3 5 Inputting Operand Numbers for the methods for inputting constants and operand numbers 5 3 3 Inputting Bit and Word Addresses The inputs used to specify bit and word addresses are listed in the following table Refer to 5 3 4 Inputting Constants and 5 3 5 Inputting Operand Numbers for the methods for inputting constants and operand numbers Bit address Word address CIO Area bit address word address Work Area word Wbit address Wword address bits Holding Area Hbit address Hword address Auxiliary Area Abit address Aword address Timer Area Ttimer_number Ttimer number Counter Area Ccounter number Ccounter number Task Area TKtask number DM Area Dword address 109 Programming Methods 5 3 4 Unsigned Hexadecimal Input 16 Positive or Zero Decimal Input 10 Negative Decimal Input 10 Real Number Decimal or E To input a fixed character string insert it between single quotation marks
242. ired for using CSND instructions 232 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Port Segment Port Segment is employed for describing the above mentioned path E fi egment Type Address Size Port Identifier 7 6 5 4 A 0 O Set ID of that port in Port Identifier Port Identifier is 4 bit so that it can take a value of 0 to 15 0 is reserved and not available 1 is to indicate the backplane port 15 has a special meaning indicating that the size of Port Identifier is larger than 1 byte In this case Port Identifier is followed by 2 byte Port Identifier This case is not explained here because for EN1S Series Port Identifier will not exceed 1 byte Set 1 in Extended Link Address Size when Link Address of that port is larger than 1 byte Shown below is the description method of Port Segment when 0 is set in Extended Link Address Size S Extended Link me egment Type Address Size Port Identifier Link Address 7 6 5 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A EO Designate the size of Link Address when 1 is set in Extended Link Address Size Shown below is the descrip tion method of Port Segment Adres Size fi i i egment Type Address Size Port Identifier Link Address Size 5 4 3 2 1 he H LUO Link Address eee ee ee ee eee Link Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Set even number byte in Link Address without fail If it is an odd number surely change it to an even number by padding with OO
243. is completed This code is also reflected in the upper byte of A203 to A210 When Additional Code is added only part for 1 Appendix D byte is reflected in the lower byte of A203 to A230 General Status Code hex Status Name Success Description of Status Service was successfully performed by the object specified Connection failure A connection related service failed along the connection path Resource unavailable Resources needed for the object to perform the requested service were unavailable Invalid parameter value See Status Code 20 hex which is the preferred value to use for this condi tion Path segment error The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the processing node Path processing shall stop when a path segment error is encountered Path destination unknown The path is referencing an object class instance or structure element that is not known or is not contained in the processing node Path processing shall stop when a path destination unknown error is encountered Partial transfer Only part of the expected data was transferred Only part of the expected data was transferred The messaging connection was lost Service not supported The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object Class Instance Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data detected Attribute list error An
244. is in MONITOR or RUN mode and the current task is active the background will be light blue Light blue is the default color Variable Name Value Address Data Type ASCII POU Name Path Comment Ready On BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 g RbSetExecution On BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 Q WaitTimer 33 Ott TIMER RbContral NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbStatus1 35 UINT RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbStatel off BOOL RbControl NE1S NE15_CPU01 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 kd gt eN watch Watch A Watch Watcha Forced Status NE1S_CPUOT e If the Watch Window is not currently displayed select View Window Watch Operations that can be performed in the Ladder Editor or Watch Window dur ing monitoring are described in the following sections 190 Monitoring Section 7 8 7 8 3 Monitoring in the Ladder Editor In online status double click the task to be monitored in the Project Window to display the Ladder Editor The following Ladder Editor Status Monitor Window will be displayed RbSetDir RbSetExecution fpa ExeState WaitTimer f F RbStatet RbState2 E f 7 RbState2 RbState1 m Jit e PV Present value SV Set value e Depending on the operating status of the CPU Unit ON execution status i e the power flow in the ladder diagram will
245. it is forced ON or forced OFF Variable Name Value Address Data Type ASCII POU Name Path Comment RbSetExecution R Off BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 Ready S On BOOL RbContral NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 e In the Watch Window S On will be displayed for bits that are forced ON and R Off will be displayed for bits that are forced ON When bits are turned ON or OFF the icon S On and R Off will not be dis played in the Ladder Editor or Watch Window and only the normal display for ON and OFF status will be displayed Changing the PVs of Variables Section 7 11 7 10 3 Forced Status Display Click the Force Status Tab in the Watch Window to display all the forced sta tuses for connected CPU Units The following screen shows an example of the forced status display Variable Name ASCII _ POU Name Path RbSetExecution R Off BOOL RbControl NE1S NE15_CPU01 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 Ready SOn BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 Comment 4 A EA Watch A Watch Watcha Watch4 Forced Status NE1S_CPUOT The forced status can be read from the CPU Unit using the following two methods e Click the Force Status Tab the first time the NE Programmer is started e Select Scan Force Status after right clicking the Force Status Tab When the forced status for the connected CPU Unit is changed by the NE Pro grammer the cha
246. ith a CJ2 CPU Unit the Backplane will be added immediately after the project is created Setup CJ2H_CPU67_EIP 15 x Build 5 1 0 Table Backplane Delete The CPU Backplane is added first The display will automatically change to Expansion Backplanes after a CPU Backplane is added PLC Setup Area Y Ethemet X m Structure E e Rack00_ 00000 4 CPUBackPlane 00_ 00000 Empty Slot 01_ 00000 Empty Slot 02_ 00000 Empty Slot 03_ 00000 Empty Slot M NA INNNNNI FE mnt Slot Settings Jeagister Variables m Unit List m Basic 170 Unit E CPU Bus Unit E Dummy H E Special 10 Unit I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page Section 6 5 In this example the _ gt first address is set to Automatic so Rack 00 is assigned Drag and drop Units to register them in the Structure at the top of the window PLC Setup Area Ethernet M Structure Rack00_ 00000 4 CPUBack Plane 3 Click the OK Button The following CPU Backplane Window will be displayed Setup NE1S_CPUO1_Rev03 E PLC Setup Area 2 Ethemet Deletes a Unit registered in the structure lol x m Structure EFENE1S CPU01_Rev03 E e Rack00_ 00000 4 CPUBackPlane 00_ 00000 Empty Slot 01_ 00000 Empty Slot 02_ 00000 Empty Slot 03_ 00000 Empty Slot NALINNNNN Fronts Slot sa aaa Used to make
247. ithm Instead directly input a physical address to pass the value Likewise output values VAR_OUTPUT are passed from output variables to parameters just after the algorithm is processed Consequently a parameter cannot be used to pass a value if it is necessary to write the value during pro cessing within the execution cycle of the algorithm Instead directly input a physical address to pass the value E Reference Information A variety of processes can be created easily from a single function block by using parameter like elements such as fixed values as input variables VAR_INPUT and changing the values passed to the input variables for each instance Example Creating 3 Instances from a Single Function Block Definition 35 Function Blocks Instance CASCADE_01 Algorithm Internal and I O variables Function Block Definition Example CONTROL Instance CASCADE_02 Algorithm _ gt Algorithm Variables Internal and I O variables Example There are 3 FB instances and each has its own I O and Instance internal variables CASCADE_03 Algorithm Internal and I O variables Section 2 3 Cyclic task 0 CASCADE_01 P_On CONTROL 1 en mo O 10 20 ON_TIME 10 10 OFF_TIME CASCADE_02 P_On CONTROL 1 EN ENO ON_TIME 10 10 OFF_TIME Cyclic task 1 CASCADE_03 P_On C
248. its 8 NE Programmer Introduction Section 1 1 1 1 NE Programmer Introduction 1 1 1 What Is the NE Programmer The NE Programmer is a programming tool that provides an integrated devel opment environment for PLCs i e Programmable Controllers built with NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units The NE Programmer can be used for the following CPU Units e NE1S series CPU Units NE1S CPU01 e CJ2 CPU Units CJ2H CPULILI EIP The functions that can be used depend on the CPU Unit that is connected For details refer to 1 4 Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units 1 1 2 NE Programmer Features Flexible Connection Environment You can connect the NE Programmer to an NE1S series CPU Unit by using any of the following interfaces USB RS 232C EtherNet IP ControlNet or DeviceNet CIP communications is used for all these interfaces You can also connect the NE Programmer to a CJ2 CPU Unit by using any of the following interfaces USB RS 232C or EtherNet IP CIP communications is used for all these interfaces Integrated Development Environment Each Programming Device can be started centrally from a window displaying the NE1S series CPU Units connected through serial communications USB and RS 232C EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet Integrated Window NE Programmer Launch a EtherNet IP CPU Unit Integrated development e
249. ive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL 15 16 ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth erwise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Omron s sole obli gation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided that in no event shall Omron be responsi ble for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were prop erly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamina tion abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return
250. k icon from the logical POU in the NE Programmer workspace and drop it in the program E Number of Instances Multiple instances can be created from a single function block definition Up to 1 024 instances can be created for a single PLC CPU Unit The allowed number of instances is not related to the number of function block definitions or the number of tasks in which the instances are inserted Parameters Each time an instance is created set the values constants local program variables or physical I O memory addresses used to exchange data with the function block s local I O variables These values are called parameters Instance of Function Block Definition A Set the value const program variable or pl address that is the sourd the input data Actual data is passed Here all three are BOOL so either 0 or 1 is passed 34 Input 0 00 a b Output 2 00 4 _A Inpu 3 00 t ocal Set the local program variable sical or physical address that is the of destination of the output data Function Blocks Note Section 2 3 The data passed from the input parameter to the function block is not the source address but the data within the source address with the data format and size specified by the variable s data type In a similar fashion the data passed from the function block to the output parameter is not an address but the actual data for the output address with the data form
251. l 2 Select the Controller from the list box and click the OK Button 3 The following confirmation message will be displayed The Yes Button xi a Re building project will be required before downloading it is 5 Are you sure to change the controller model 4 A backup file of the project before converting the type of CPU Unit will be automatically created with the name previous project name_Oxxxxxxxxxxx nlx The Xs in the filename are numbers for the year month day hour minutes and seconds NE Programmer i x 1 The former project file was saved as a following file name for back up C CNSS_V 3 NE P_080626_080807132002 nIx 5 The CPU Unit specified as the type of CPU Unit for the new controller will be set a z Project om Instructions Workspace EE CJ2_ProjectA CJ2 mS Data Types 2 4 Logical POUs J Function Blocks E E Programs Big CJ2H_CPU67_EIP 4 Global Variables B 44 Task Ey Cycle Execution E Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 B4 Interrupt Execution I External Interrupt Tasks 0 C Power OFF Interrupt Tasks 1 C Scheduled Interrupt Tasks 2 3 I Extemal Interrupt Tasks 4 99 J 170 Interrupt Tasks 100 131 J Extemal Interrupt Tasks 132 255 130 Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks Section 5 6 5 6 2 Creating and Editing Global Variables Displaying the Global Variable Editor 1 2 3 1 Create a new configuration File New Configuration
252. l ity and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application require ments Actual performance is subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt spe cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product Errors and Omissions Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions OMRON Automation simple powerful OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS Schaumburg IL USA 847 843 7900 800 556 6766 www omron247 com OMRON CANADA INC HEAD OFFICE OMRON ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE Toronto ON Canada 416 286 6465 866 986 6766 www omron ca Cono Sur 54 11 4787 1129 OMRON ELETR NICA DO BRASIL LTDA HEAD OFFICE OMRON CHILE SALES OFF
253. l A is selected a stricter program check will be per formed Refer to the following table The check items can be customized by selecting User Definition Refer to the following table for check items e Select whether to perform the check by selecting the check item in the list e Select either Error or Warning as the error notification e If the Reset All Button is pressed the levels will be set to level A Note Check items cannot be selected and error or warning cannot be specified if level A or level B is selected Check item Duplicate CNT number Check Normal POUs Function block POUs Compiling Building Compiling Building Duplicate TIM number Check Duplicate FAL FALS Check Check Duplicate Bit Output and Channel Output Check only the Duplicate Bit Output Duplicate FB Instance Variable Check Coil without contact Contact without coil Check that auto allocation area is not used Check FOR NEXT Instructions 83 Option Settings Section 4 6 Level B User Definition 84 Check item Check the following of END Instruc tions Normal POUs Function block POUs Compiling Building Compiling Building Check IL ILC Instructions Check JMP JME Instructions Check the Auto variables Check operand size and variable type Check operand size and array length when the element number is 0 Check the u
254. layed 4 t I O table will be cleared e Are you sure 3 Click the Yes Button The registered I O tables will be created 7 5 5 Verifying I O Tables Use the following procedure to compare the registered I O tables and the real I O tables online 1 2 3 1 Connect online to the CPU Unit 2 Select Controller V O Table Compare The registered I O tables will be compared to the real I O tables and the results will be displayed NE Programm x i J Verify was successful Ad Verify Failed 7 6 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data 7 6 1 Overview The following data can be uploaded to the NE Programmer downloaded to the CPU Unit or compared between the CPU Unit and NE Programmer I O tables PLC Setup and Ethernet Setup The CPU Unit operating modes during which uploading downloading and comparing are possible are shown in the following table Menu command MONITOR PROGRAM Controller Upload from Controller Controller Download to Controller Controller Compare with Controller 182 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data Section 7 6 A Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before editing or transferring a pro gram PLC Setup I O table I O memory data or parameter data to another node Doing either of these without confirming safety may result in unex pected operation and injury Z Caution Before actual operation check the
255. layed select this option to display only the last part of the comment e Omit Tail If all of the comment cannot be displayed select this option to display only the first part of the comment 77 Option Settings Section 4 6 Print Tab Page Color Tab Page 78 Font Click the Font Button to set the font used in the Ladder Editor Cell Width Sets the width of cells in the Ladder Editor in pixels Show Rung Number and Program Address Clear this option to increase the ladder display width by not displaying the rung number or step number Show Instruction Description Clear this option to not display descriptions of special instructions Show Grid Clear this option to hide the Ladder Editor s grid options x Item Setup A Display A Print bA Color Edit 2 Mouse i PU General gt Variable Names Eont a l 1 4 Line Bem la Outline Variable Name Print Style OmitHead Omit Tail FA Variable 5 r Physical Addresses T Print Physical Addresses 1 a Line A Print Rung Number and iHe N Ladder 5 F Program Address m r Comments Vv Print Instruction nemonic e zz i Description IV Print Variable Comments 1 Line IF fv ST IV Print Instruction Comments l 1 Line Comment Display Style Libraiy C OmitHead Omit Tail Program Check a Data Trace m Reset All Cancel Apply Contains the same settings as the Display Tab
256. le The object name is displayed within brackets Nol Line_Left_Rb Otud Rb_Ctrl Rb Control Library Comment entered in the Edit Comment Dialog Box KickSwitch 0 g 2 000006 cremaxminctrl Comment entered in Description field when registering rung group SampleNum First and last rung of group displayed in lime green default Colors can be changed on Color Tab Page of View Settings Dialog Box View Option 1640000 1640000 The comment entered in the Edit Comment Dialog Box is displayed Va Outline StageN oO 000001 RbSetNoEr 000002 RbSetReady 000003 Run a ga NolLine_Left_Rb_Ctri Rb_Ctrl 000006 fread_ready 000007 cremaxminctrl CreMaxMinCtrl 000008 fb_tmp3 000018 Ready 000023 RbSetDir 000026 RbSetExecute 000030 ExeState 000034 ExeStateReset 000039 0K 000053 L1_RAbMoveLeft_Fr M 000054 END 5 10 7 Transferring Library Items for the NE1S to CJ2 1 2 3 Library items for NE1S series CPU Units cannot be added to projects for CJ2 CPU Units without making changes Perform the following procedure to con vert library items for CJ2 CPU Units into library items for NE1S series CPU Units The following procedure is recommended to convert the items 1 Create a project for an NE1S series CPU Unit and add library items for the NE1S series CPU Unit to be converted for a CJ2 CPU
257. le 1 In the Ladder Editor select the instruction with the variable for which to search 2 Press the Shift Alt O Key Alternately select Edit Jump Next Output The cursor will jump to an output instruction with the same variable Search Replace Function Back Shift Alt B Keys Section 5 8 The cursor can be returned to the previous instruction from which a search was made Press the Shift Alt B Key Alternately select Edit Jump Previous Jump Point The cursor will return to the previous instruction 5 8 4 Search Replace Operations in the Variable Editor Search Operations in the Variable Editor 1 2 3 1 2 Place the cursor in the Variable Editor to be searched Press the Ctrl F Keys Alternately select Edit Find The Find Dialog Box will be displayed Find what Eind Next Search Object Variable Name Dd Cancel Match case I Hold the previous Search object Direction C Up Down Input the search string Set the range to be searched the text string to search for and the search conditions and then click the Find Next Button e If the text string is found the line in the Variable Editor containing it will be highlighted e Press the F3 Key to find the next occurrence e Press the Shift F3 Keys to return to the previously found location Replace Operations in the Variable Editor 1 2 3 1 Place the cursor in the Variable Editor in which to perform a replace
258. le Editor to the operand Note 1 Addresses can also be specified for operands but data types and sizes will not be checked Always use the proper data type so that data is not corrupted 2 Refer to 5 3 4 Inputting Constants and 5 3 5 Inputting Operand Numbers for the methods for inputting constants and operand numbers 123 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 e Input Example Operand Input Method 1 a Double click the function block operand input position to display the Edit Function Block Argument Dialog Box N x Input output r Parameter List Variable List Parameter bolic ONAN Variable or Address Data Type UINT Work _Position Comment g Work Posi REAL r Variable g Conveyer BOOL Data Type Limito BOOL r start fl BOOL Digs oa B00 g P01 WORD Name Data Variable or Addr g Sheettype INT 5 ON_TIME UINT 10 00015 fb_exec BOOL y OFF_TIME UINT 1000010 Flicker fL BOOL amp start BOOL start_fle Q Temp_Ala BOOL g data WORD Q sec2signal BOOL fbout BOOL direction BOOL Q SP01 WORD Unregister All Unregister Parameter List gt gt lt lt Register Parameter List seven b Inthe Parameter List area select the desired variable in the function block The selected variable will be highlighted in gray In this exam ple select an input variable such as startin the Input Tab Page Select the
259. les Dialog Box to a value between 1 and 255 e Arrays can be specified for internal variable VAR input variables VAR_INPUT output variables VAR_OUTPUT or external variables VAR_EXTERNAL e With NE1S series CPU Units only one dimensional arrays can be cre ated With CJ2 CPU Units one dimensional and two dimensional arrays can be created 105 Programming Methods Section 5 3 e When specifying the name of an array variable in a program the index must be placed in brackets after the variable name example ARRAY O Refer to 2 2 5 Array Elements Array Specification for details on using indices Use the following procedure to specify an array variable 1 2 3 1 Add a variable in the Variable Editor Alternately double click an empty row To edit an existing variable double click the variable to be edited The Edit Variables Dialog Box will be displayed Click the Array Size Row The dialog box for setting the number of elements for one dimensional and two dimensional arrays will be displayed Edit var x Path CJ2_Project4 POUNFB_01 Input variable name Variable Local vari Double click to change Data Type INT data type Array Size F ah O Size 1st dimension d Q Initial Value ee 2nd dimension 3 Address Q Network Variable Network 1 0 Setting None Click here and then enter the Retain Nonretain Nonretain number of array elements For the Comment NE1S only a one dimensional
260. lick the OK Button to continue 2 Amessage box for confirmation will be displayed Click the OK Button NE Programmer x Directly specified physical addresses in the programs will be f t replaced by a global variable with the same address Are you sure Cancel 3 The Find Tab of the Output Window will show the progress of the conver sion replacing or completed 5 3 7 Support for Converting to Physical Addresses This function automatically creates an AT specified global variable for a physi cal address when a physical address is input for an input condition or output bit and then converts it to a corresponding external variable 111 Programming Methods Section 5 3 If the physical address is directly input into the Ladder Editor and then a com ment is input the variable will be automatically created It is also possible at the same time to input comments during continued oper ation by inputting or selecting a variable in the Ladder Editor and pressing the Enter Key Enabling Support for Converting to Physical Addresses The following settings must be made in Option Settings to enable support for converting to physical addresses e Select the One Key Input Mode Option in the Input Mode Field on the Edit Tab Page of the Ladder Window and select the In comment inputting Option default OFF The following precautions apply to using this function e To use this function there must be a configuration
261. lue Structured Text Keywords Name INT_TO_UINT Type Data type conversion Appendix B Description Converts INT to UINT INT_TO_DINT Converts INT to DINT INT_TO_UDINT Converts INT to UDINT INT_TO_WORD Converts INT to WORD UINT_TO_INT Converts UINT to INT UINT_TO_DINT Converts UINT to DINT UINT_TO_UDINT Converts UINT to UDINT UINT_TO_WORD Converts UINT to WORD DINT_TO_INT Converts DINT to INT DINT_TO_UINT Converts DINT to UINT DINT_TO_UDINT Converts DINT to UDINT DINT_TO_DWORD Converts DINT to DWORD UDINT_TO_INT Converts UDINT to INT UDINT_TO_UINT Converts UDINT to UINT UDINT_TO_DINT Converts UDINT to DINT UDINT_TO_DWORD Converts UDINT to DWORD WORD_TO_INT Converts WORD to INT WORD_TO_UINT Converts WORD to UINT WORD_TO_DWORD Converts WORD to DWORD DWORD_TO_INT Converts DWORD to INT DWORD_TO_UINT Converts DWORD to UINT DWORD_TO_WORD Converts DWORD to WORD ST Language Reserved Words The following ST language reserved words cannot be used as identifiers N END_RESOURCE DATE F_TRIG R RETAIN TIME_OF_DAY CTU i L RETURN TIME CTD D STEP AND CTUD MOD P END_STEP OR TP SD STRUCT NOT TON DS END_STRUCT SHL TOF lt SL TASK SHR RTC gt ACTION TRANSITION ROR LD lt END_A
262. mation is mainly useful for the following points e Judgment criteria when changing the model of CPU Unit e As part of hardware management 151 Building and Compiling Programs Section 5 12 152 1 2 3 1 Right click the configuration in the Project Window and select Properties from the menu Click the Build Detailed Info Tab z General Build detailed info Detailed information Detailed information na LE lt Code information gt Size of program 6 25 FB Body Num 10 1024 E FB InstanceNum 14 1024 Size of literal 0 7 45406 byte 4 lt Variable information gt Variable Count 448 20000 E Retain Variable A 14638 151072 byte Non Retain Varia 46512 327680 byte E TIMER Variable 720 3072 v FE coimitco iain COR N72 zi Graph of Size of program i 6 0 100 Close Note The Build Detailed Info Tab Page will be displayed only if the pro gram has been built without error 2 The percentage graph at the bottom of the dialog box will switch according to the elements selected in the list NE15_CPU01_Rev03 Property xi NE1S_CPUO1_Rev03 Property x General Build detailed info General Build detailed info Detailed information Detailed information Detailed information name Value FB Body Num 10 1024 Ere Instance Num 14 1024 amp Size of literal O 45406 byte 5 lt Variable information gt Variable Count 448 20000 Retain Variable Area 14638
263. me File New Project Function Creates a new project Ctrl O File Open Opens an existing project Ctrl S File Save Saves the project being edited overwrites current project data Ctrl Shift S 70 File Save Changes to project Updates the project for the program or function block that is being edited Shortcut Keys Section 4 5 Shortcut keys Alt G Menu name File Configuration Edit Global Vari ables Function Edits global variables Ctrl Shift R File Configuration Replace physical addresses in programs Replaces physical addresses in the program with global variables specified by that physical address Ctrl P File Print 4 5 3 Edit Operations Shortcut keys Ctrl Z Menu name Edit Undo Prints the specified items Function Undoes the previously performed operation Ctrl Y Edit Redo Redoes the operation that was undone with Undo Ctrl X Edit Cut Cuts the specified range of data Ctrl C Edit Copy Copies the specified range of data Ctrl V Edit Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard Delete Edit Delete Deletes the specified range of data F2 Edit Rename Used to change the name of a project function block pro gram or configuration Ctrl A Edit Select All Selects all data in the selected window Ctrl
264. ment option and then click the Next Button The Customer Information Window will be displayed 5 Enter the User Name Company Name and Serial Number and then click the Next Button The following Select Features Window will be displayed NE Programmer Online Manual 6 Select CIP Communication Link and any other programs to be installed CIP Communication Link must be selected specify the installation desti nation and click the Next Button The Ready to Install the Program Win dow will be displayed 7 Click the Install Button to start installation When installation completes normally the InstallShield Wizard Complete Window will be displayed 8 Click the Finish Button 3 2 2 Uninstallation Procedure Use the following procedure to uninstall the NE Programmer 1 2 3 1 Select Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs or Add Re move Applications from the Start menu 53 Installing the NE Programmer Section 3 2 2 Select Control amp Network Support Software v3 in the Add Remove Pro grams Dialog Box or Add Remove Applications Dialog Box as shown be low and click the Change Remove Button fgg Add Remove Programs 5 x m op Currently installed programs Sort by Name Fe neua su auuu sec Pwo Change or Remove S Control amp Network Support Software v3 Programs 2 Click her i infe Last Used On Lo Ba Rees t From your Add New 6 xX 956MB Programs 25 3MB p
265. ments and local variables used in the function block definition Refer to 2 2 1 Naming Variables for information on the specifications of local variables that can be made E Variable Notation aes we Variable table ENO Usage Name Type ___ BOOL BOOL Internal tim_a WORD ON_TIME Internal tim_b WORD INT Input ON_TIME INT OFF_TIME Input OFF_TIME INT INT LL Output variables Input variables i im TIMX tim_a i i tim_a i H TIMX tim_b i S ae 3 __ Internal variables Function Blocks Section 2 3 2 3 4 Instance Specifications Composition of an The following table lists the items that the user must set when registering an Instance instance Item Description Instance name Name of the instance Parameters Input parameters Pass data to input variables constants local pro gram variables or physical addresses Output parameters Receive data from output variables local pro gram variables or physical addresses Instance Name This is the name of the instance e Number of characters 48 characters max e Allowed characters Numbers 0 to 9 letters a to z letters A to Z the underscore character e Upper and lower case characters are distinguished but do not make vari ables different For example aBc and AbC are treated as the same variable but the variable aBc is recorded as aBc e Instance
266. ming A function block is a basic program element containing a standard processing function that has been defined in advance Once the function block has been defined the user just has to insert the function block in the program and set the I O in order to use the function As a standard process a function block is not created with actual physical addresses but rather with local variables The user sets parameters con stants variables or physical addresses in those variables to use the function block Program 2 Copy of function block A Function block A Program 1 F Hk 3 FB Output C f function block A Standard eA AA variable program section T written with VT variables rN Input FB FB Output variable variable Define in advance N Insert in program Drag and drop Set Set Copy of function block A HNI Input FB FB Output variable variable Function blocks allow complex programming units to be reused easily Once standard program sections have been created in a function block and saved in a file they can be reused just by placing the function block in a program and setting the parameters for the function block s I O Reusing standardized func tion blocks will reduce the time required for programming debugging reduce coding errors and make the program easier to understand Structured programs created with function blocks have better design quality
267. modifiable member was received Group 2 only server general failure This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported Attribute not supported and Attribute not settable Reserved by CIP for future extensions Reserved for Object Class and service errors This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object Class specific errors Use of this range should only be performed when none of the Error Codes presented in this table accurately reflect the error that was encoun tered 269 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example of Additional Status in case that General Status Is 01 Hex Status of Connection Manager Object General Status hex Additional Status hex 0100 Explanation Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open 0103 Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported 0106 Ownership Conflict 0107 Connection not found at target application 0108 Invalid Connection Type Indicates a problem with either the Connection Type or Pri ority of the Connection 0109 Invalid Connection Size 0110 Device not configured 0111 RPI not supported May also indicate problem with connection time out multiplier or production inhibit time 0113 Connection Manager cannot support any more connections 0114 Either the Vendor Id or the
268. mple c i a 0 c i af 1 Item Number of elements Description NE1S 1 to 255 Section 2 2 Using variables as subscripts for array data struc tures to specify members CJ2 1 to 32 000 Data size per variable 255 bytes max 64 Kbytes Setting not sup ported Setting not sup ported Initial values One variable 256 bytes max Total data size 250 K bytes max When specifying the starting address or end address of multiple words in an instruction operand see note the address cannot be passed to a local vari able by an input parameter or output parameter Note For example multiple words are accessed when specifying an in struction s control data or the starting and end words of the BLOCK SET instruction BSET 071 In this case prepare arrays or structured variables with the required number of elements set the data in the arrays or structures in the function block defini tion and specify the start or end of the array or structure in the operand This method effectively specifies the starting address or end address of mul tiple words Example Function block definition Instance Variables SCL EN ENO SCL WORD 10 s p 10 SCL BODY Ean pner SCL Pree 5 T JON ol 16 0000 Specifying this value in 16 0000 1 10 0 the SCL instruction is
269. mple of Grouped Variables BB21 RBI po RunStop ExeStatu BOOL BOOD ExeStatu Run OKH GROUP GROUP ErrarGod RB1 Input RB1 _ErrSt H RunStop ForwardB ForwardB ErrStatu ErrorCod Grouping FB I O Variables in NE Programmer Select the input or output variables to be grouped right click and select Group Input Output Variables Group from the popup menu 2 2 13 Importing and Exporting Variables Exporting Variables With NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units variable data can be exported in the following file formats e OPC Server CSV file for use with SCADA Software e Text file for use with the CX Designer e Text file for use with the SPU Console e CSV file for use with external Programming Devices or programs such as Excel Exporting with NE Programmer e OPC Server CX Designer or SPU Console Format Select File Export Variable and select the desired file format 30 Function Blocks Importing Variables Section 2 3 e CSV Format Right click in the variable table and select Export The following data can also be imported e CSV files for use with external Programming Devices or programs such as Excel Importing with NE Programmer Right click the local or global variable table and select Import CSV Format 2 3 Function Blocks 2 3 1 Function Block Features and Operation Overview Advantages of Function Blocks Structured Program
270. ms and Conditions of Sale omRON Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all quotes agreements purchase orders acknowledgments price lists catalogs manuals brochures and other documents whether electronic or in writing relating to the sale of products or services collectively the Products by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Omron Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer s purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Prices Payment Terms All prices stated are current subject to change with out notice by Omron Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Omron s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts Interest Omron at its option may charge Buyer 1 1 2 interest per month or the maximum legal rate whichever is less on any balance not paid within the stated terms Orders Omron will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in ob
271. n Configuration A configuration is the element that corresponds to an entire PLC system Global variables can be declared for a configura tion Resource Resources consist of programs allocated to tasks and local variables With the NE1S one resource folder exists in the configuration 62 Menu Item Lists Section 4 4 4 4 Menu Item Lists 4 4 1 File Menu Menu New Project Shortcut Ctrl N This section lists the functions on the main and submenus in the Main Win dow of the NE Programmer Function Creates a new project New Configuration Creates a new configuration New POU Creates a new logical POU Open Ctrl O Opens an existing project Save Ctrl S Saves the project being edited overwrites current project data Save As Saves the project being edited under a new name Save Changes to project Ctrl Shift S Updates the project for the program or function block that is being edited Edit Data types Opens the Data Type Editor Configuration Edit Global Vari ables Alt G Edits global variables Configuration Replace physical addresses in programs Ctrl Shift R Replaces physical addresses in the program with global variables specified by that physical address Task Create Adds a task Task Allocate program name Allocates a program to the selected task Task Releas
272. n changing the connection target creating I O tables uploading downloading comparing programs and other data changing the operating mode monitoring the program force setting and force resetting bits online editing displaying errors displaying the cycle time tracing data etc 1 System requirements for Windows Vista CPU Pentium 1 GHz min Memory 1 GB Basic Operating Procedure Section 1 3 1 3 Basic Operating Procedure This section describes the basic operating procedure and the relationship to the NE Programmer and the CPU Unit The relationship and order is given for each step and setting 1 2 3 1 Installation Set the DIP switches on the front of each Unit as required Mount the CPU Unit Power Supply Unit and other Units to the Backplane Install the Memory Card if required Note Refer to the operation manual for each Unit Wiring Connect the power supply wiring I O wiring and Programming Device NE Programmer Connect communications wiring as required Note Refer to the operation manual for each Unit for information on pow er supply wiring I O wiring and the NE Programmer connection Initial Settings Hardware Set the DIP switches an Rotary switches on the front of the CPU Unit and other Units Note Refer to the operation manual for each Unit Checking Initial Operation Turn the power on after checking the power supply wiring and voltage Check the Power Supply Unit s POWER in
273. n Blocks Instructions Restricted in Ladder Programs Instructions Prohibited in Function Block Definitions I O Variable Restrictions Unsupported Data Areas Refreshing Timer and Counter PVs Interlocks The END 001 instruction cannot be used in function block definitions Any other instructions that can be used in the program can also be used in func tion blocks Addresses in the following data areas cannot be used as parameters for input and output variables e Index Registers and Data Registers Neither indirect nor direct address ing is supported e Indirect addressing of DM or EM Area addresses Neither binary mode nor BCD mode indirect addressing is supported Timer and counter PVs are always stored in binary mode so PVs of all Timer and Counter Instructions must be treated as binary data whether or not the instructions are in function blocks When a function block is called from an interlocked program section the con tents of the function block definition will not be executed The interlocked func tion block will behave just like an interlocked subroutine P_Off L pete FB_BODY IH Ho ihi ILC Interlocked Interlock will not affect instructions in the function block definition 47 Function Blocks Differentiation Instructions in Function Block Definitions Timer Instructions in Function Block Definitions 48 Section 2 3 An insta
274. n Blocks E Fe FB_INST S ST_01 H E Programs 5 S3 CJ2H_CPU68_EIP 5 Global Variables 4 Task B Cycle Execution E Cycle Execution Tasks 0 1 5 Interrupt Execution External Interrupt Tasks 0 3 Power OFF Interrupt Task E Scheduled Interrupt Tasks The Data Structure Table will be displayed All data structures that are cur rently registered will be displayed in the Data Structure Table Name Datatype Comment Logical Boolean with values TRUE and FALSE bit string 16 bits Signed 16 bit integer value GEIREAL bit string 32 bits GI STRING character string GE TIMER bit string 16 bits l UDINT Unsigned 32 bit integer value l UINT Unsigned 16 bit integer value l worD bit string 16 bits E gl Basic _IN16 Input Unit 16pt E gl Basic _IN32 Input Unit 32pt El l Basic_IN64 Input Unit 64pt E Basic _IN96 Input Unit 96pt E Basic_MIX32 Mix Unit 32pt E ca Basic_MIX48 Mix Unit 48pt E gl Basic_OUT16 Output Unit 16pt E l Basic_OUT32 Output Unit 32pt l Basic_OUT64 Output Unit 64pt E CS Basic_OUT96 Output Unit 96pt 2 Right click the last line where nothing is registered and select Insert Struct The Edit Structure Dialog Box will be displayed edit Structure x Name Data Type POOL z Array Size Comment Cancel 3 Input the name of the structure and any comment that is required and then click the OK Button The data structure will be inserted as a data type and displayed as
275. n finished 201 Online Editing Section 7 14 NE Programmer xj G Completed online edit 7 Click the OK Button The monitor window will be displayed with the changed applied RbSetReody RbSetGamp a This completes the online editing 7 14 3 Adding Global Variables Use the following procedure to add global variables in online editing The restrictions that apply are also given below Procedure 1 2 3 1 When a new variable is added during online editing the following Edit Vari able Dialog Box will be displayed Ea Path CJ2 POUSRbILSXrcE vb Variable Usage Internal Data Type BOOL Array Size Size 2 Byte Initial Value O Address Network Variable Network 1 0 Setting None Retain Nonretain Nonretain Comment cea 2 Change the Usage setting to Global Usage Internal z Data Type Array Size Global B Size 2 Byte Initial Value Addresses and network variables can be set for global variables 3 Click the OK Button The new variable will be registered as a global vari able The new variable will also be registered as an external variable Precautions The added global variable cannot be edited or deleted during online editing e The addition of a new variable to the global and external variables can be cancelled during online editing by ending global editing e When online editing has been completed and changes have been trans ferred it is necessary to close the connection edit dele
276. n specifying a two dimensional array set the number of array ele ments for a two dimensional array and leave the setting for a one dimensional array blank A two dimensional array cannot be specified for the NE1S Refer to 2 2 3 Variable Properties for other restrictions on elements Size Displays the size used by the variable in the memory Initial Value Set the values for when operation is started Note The initial values of variables cannot be set for CU2 CPU Units Set the initial value of the variable according to the data type BOOL WORD or DWORD Unsigned hexadecimal Input the number after 16 e INT or DINT Signed decimal Input the number after 10 or 10 e UINT or UDINT Unsigned decimal Input the number after 10 e REAL Real number e g 1 0 0 23 9 8E 3 e STRING Character string e g Data Address 132 Set when a specific address is manually set for the variable AT designation This setting is supported only for global variables Creating Configurations and Assigning Programs to Tasks Parameter Network Variable Meaning This property sets whether to convert variables to network vari ables It sets whether external access i e reading or writing is enabled for variable names This setting can be made only for global variables It cannot be made for local variables Section 5 6 Values Enabled Variable names c
277. n the Ladder Editor 1 2 3 1 Open the Ladder Editor in which to perform the replace operation 2 Press the Ctrl H Keys Alternately select Edit Replace The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed Input the search string Input the replacement string Find what Replace with Search Object I Match case I Hold the previous Search object Direction Cancel Variable Name Select the object to search C Up Down 3 Set the range to be searched the text string to search for the replacement text string and the search conditions and then click the Find Next Button If the text string is found the instruction in the Ladder Editor containing it will be highlighted selected 4 Click the Replace Button The text string will be replaced 139 Search Replace Function Section 5 8 Jumping in the Ladder Editor 1 2 3 1 Make the Ladder Editor active and press the Ctrl G Keys Alternately se lect Edit Jump The Step Rung No Jump Dialog Box will be displayed ump x Number 9 0 8 Jump to Bien Bung Cancel 2 Setthe step number program address or rung number and then click the OK Button The cursor will jump to the specified step or rung and the instruction or rung will be highlighted selected Searching for Address References in the Ladder Editor Shift Alt A Key 1 2 3 Jumps can be made from an input instruction at the cursor to an outpu
278. nable write pro tection on FINS commands sent to the CPU Unit through the network The write protection does not apply to direct serial connections Appendix E The following settings can be used to allow write commands from up to specified nodes in the specified networks Write protection will not apply to the specified nodes If the following settings are not made write protection will apply to all nodes other than the local node Network address 0 to 127 Node address 1 to 255 255 all nodes Default Network address 0 node address 1 Specifies the network address and node address of the 15t node that is not write protected As soon as changed Network address 0 to 127 Node address 1 to 255 255 all nodes Default Network address 0 node address 1 Specifies the network address and node address of the 32 4 node that is not write protected General Settings Enabling the Total Service Time Setting Settings Default 10 Default 10 Function Use this setting to set the total peripheral service time to a value other than 10 Related flags and words As soon as changed New setting s effectiveness Next cycle Setting the Total Service Time Settings 0 1 to 3276 7 ms 0 1 ms increments Default 0 280 Function This setting sets the total service time Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness Ne
279. names cannot begin with a number 0 to 9 e There cannot be two or more consecutive underscore characters _ e The instance name is displayed above the instance in the diagram Instance name Pulse_2sON_1sOFF CLOCK PULSE H EN ENO 10 20 ON_TIME 1010 OFF_TIME Function Block Instance Areas Calling an Instance from Multiple Locations A single instance can be called from multiple locations In this case the inter nal variables VAR will be shared E Making Multiple Instances Multiple instances can be created from a single function block definition In this case the values of internal variables VAR will be different in each instance Example Counting Product A and Product B Prepare a function block definition called Down Counter CTD and set up counters for product A and product B There are two types of programs one for automatic operation and another for manual operation The user can switch to the appropriate mode of operation In this case multiple instances will be created from a single function block The same instance must be accessible from multiple locations 39 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Operating Specifications Calling Instances 40 Product A counter rogram 1 automatic operation CTD cD Q LD pv cv P100 Product B counter CTD cD Q LD pv cv 0200 se a red Mando Instance A FB e SN Ins
280. nce will not be executed while its EN input variable is OFF so the fol lowing precautions are essential when using a Differentiation Instruction in a function block definition Differentiation Instructions include DIFU DIFD and any instruction with an or prefix e As long as the instance s EN input variable is OFF the execution condition will retain its previous status the last status when the EN input variable was ON and the Differentiation Instruction will not operate e When the instance s EN input variable goes ON the present execution condition status will not be compared to the last cycle s status The present execution condition will be compared to the last condition when the EN input variable was ON so the Differentiation Instruction will not operate properly If the EN input variable remains ON the Differentiation Instruction will operate properly when the next rising edge or falling edge occurs Example aa n FB1 EN ENO TLDEN TORINI Ni ouT1 SET OUTI These Differentiation Instructions do not operate when input condition 0 00 goes from OFF to ON the first time The instructions do not operate while input condition 0 00 is OFF If Differentiation Instructions are being used always use the Always ON Flag P_On for the EN input condition and include the instruction s input condition within the function block definition Example P_On Body i FB1
281. nd addresses of multiple word operands refer to Appendix D in the NE1S Series PLC Opera tion Manual Initial Value NE1S series CPU Units Only See note Note The initial values of variables cannot be set for CJ2 CPU Units For programs this property specifies the variable s value when operation starts For function blocks this property specifies the variable s value when the instance is executed When an instance is first executed internal variables VAR and output variables VAR_OUTPUT are set to there initial values Later the variable s value may change as the instance is executed Automatic allocation direct address Automatic allocation Initial value setting Cannot be set Can be set Can be set Can be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Cannot be set Held Not held CIO Area Work Area Holding Area Auxiliary Area Data Memory DM Area Extended Memory EM Area Cannot be set Timer Completion Flag PV Cannot be set Counter Completion Flag PV Cannot be set Direct address Input the desired value in the Initial Value Field in the Edit Variables Dialog Box Input a value consistent with the variable s data type as shown in the fol lowing table Initial value 16 0 or 16 1 Initial value input method Input as unsigned hexadecimal Input the value after 16 Integer 10 32768 to 10 32767 Input as signed decimal Input the value after
282. ndix D Specifying the network path for a SEND CIP COMMAND Instruction CSND 2 ControlNet Unit s unit address Example Unit address 3 3 Port Example Port Port B 4 ControlNet Unit s node address Example Node address 5 5 Backplane 6 Other CPU Unit Refer to Data Access for NE1S Series for information on the CSND instruction 237 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example of Use for NE1S Series Setup of Link Path Port Number Described below is the network port for designating Link Path For NE1S Series the base unit backplane is also recognized as part of the network when designating Link Address CPU Unit CPU Unit has two ports One is a backplane port and the other is Ethernet port The backplane port is CS1 bus base unit Communication from CPU Unit via a CPU Bus Unit surely goes through the backplane Pork Port Number Backplane 1 Ethernet 2 ControlNet Unit ControlNet Unit has two ports One is a backplane port and the other is ControlNet port The backplane port is CS1 bus base unit Communication via CPU Unit or other CPU Bus Unit surely goes through the backplane Pork Port Number Backplane 1 ControlNet 2 DeviceNet Unit DeviceNet Unit has two ports One is a backplane port and the other is DeviceNet port The backplane port is CS1 bus base unit Communication via CPU Unit or other CPU Bus Unit surely goes thro
283. network when a CPU Unit is currently connected via USB 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Change Controller The following dialog box will be displayed if there is any unsaved data NE Programmer 3 xj l Save changes to Unknown No Cancel 2 Click the Yes Button and save the data on the NE Programmer if the data is required Click the No Button is the data is not required e The Setup Interface Dialog Box will be displayed xl Serial Port S 6 gk Baud Rate 115200 Bit s x 3 The serial port and baud rate being used for the current connection will be displayed Check the settings and then click the OK Button The Browse Network Dialog Box will be displayed Browse Network x Select a device that you would like to connect Browse BackPlane gt DERE ic o 0 NE1S CNS21U 15 NE1S DRM21U a Joa eo o Select the Ethernet port TCP2 to connect externally OK Cancel 4 Select TCP 2 Ethernet port and then click the Refresh Button The Browse Address Dialog Box will be displayed Browse Address E x Address Add Edit 179 Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected Section 7 4 5 180 Click the Add Button and input the IP address in the dialog box that will be displayed The Browse Address Dialog Box will return The IP address that was input will be displayed as shown below Browse Address xj Address v 192 168 200 201 mo
284. nge is immediately shown on the Force Status Tab Page When the forced status is changed from another NE Programmer installation the change will not be shown until the forced status is refreshed with the most recent data 7 11 Changing the PVs of Variables Note 1 2 3 When the CPU Unit is online in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode the present values of words can be changed from the Watch Window or the Ladder Editor Any present values that are changed however are not forced and will change if the external input status changes or if the status changes as a result of lad der program execution Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected before changing a present value 1 Right click the PV to be changed in the Watch Window and select Set Value from the popup menu The Value Dialog Box will be displayed x Variable Position Data Type INT Input Format Hex C Bin Value 10 0 AGS eee Oe eo alee Beige Sees ae eles omei 2 Input the desired value and then click the OK Button The specified value will be displayed in the Watch Window and Ladder Ed itor 197 Changing Timer Counter Set Values Section 7 12 An option in the Integrated Options Window s General Tab Page must be selected in order to allow write operations PV change force set reset and set reset operations on array variables specified with an index such as Afi To enable these write operations select Tool
285. ngs 4 6 1 74 Section 4 6 General Window Note ES xi Item Setup EJ General we xd r Permit a write operation to the Array element F 5 Outi with index variable eg Afi Pres utine id 1 0 Address display format H Variable C No prefix Display IQ C Display XY A ae R Ladder To Lower Layer To Upper Layer mA Ew Mnemonic Vv Serach and move the key focus automatically Or to the related variable in program enD T ig Library Program Check ES Data Trace Reset All Index Variable Select this option to permit writing i e PV changes force setting resetting and setting resetting array variable elements with a variable index e g ALi An array variable s index value is based on the index value the last time that the value was monitored so a write operation may operate on a different array element if the variable s index value was changed since the last write opera tion I O Address Display If I O Units are allocated in I O tables the corresponding I O bits will be dis played in the ladder window with I O addresses Set whether to display the I O address and the display format No display The I O address will not be displayed Display IQ The I O address will be displayed with I for inputs and Q for out puts Display XY The I O address will be displayed with X for inputs and Y for outputs To Lower Layer To Upper Layer Select this option to a
286. not possible in the function block program Therefore either define the Communications Port Enabled Flags as local variables and reference them as external variables from the function block or specify the physical addresses e g A20200 222 Appendix B Structured Text Keywords Operators Operation Symbol Data types supported by Example Value Priority operator example 1 Lowest 11 Highest Parentheses and brackets expression arrayindex 2 3 4 5 Function evaluation identifier operand_list Exponential kk Not supported Complement INT DINT 10 Boolean complement NOT BOOL WORD DWORD NOT TRUE Multiplication INT DINT UINT UDINT 10 3 Division INT DINT UINT UDINT 6 2 Remainder calculation INT DINT UINT UDINT 17 MOD 10 2 3 4 2 4 gt 12 INT DINT UINT UDINT STRING INT DINT UINT UDINT BOOL WORD DWORD INT DINT UINT UDINT STRING BOOL WORD DWORD INT DINT UINT UDINT STRING BOOL WORD DWORD INT DINT UINT UDINT BOOL WORD DWORD BOOL WORD DWORD Addition Subtraction Comparisons Equality 10 16 16 10 Non equality 8 lt gt 16 TRUE amp FALSE TRUE XOR FALSE TRUE OR FALSE Boolean AND Boolean exclusive OR Boolean OR BOOL WORD DWORD Restrictions e Ladder programming special instructions cannot be used e Writing 100 means
287. nused FB instance vari ables Check item Normal POUs Function block POUs Duplicate CNT number Check Compiling Building Compiling Building Duplicate TIM number Check Duplicate FAL FALS Check Check Duplicate Bit Output and Channel Output Check only the Duplicate Bit Output Duplicate FB Instance Variable Check Coil without contact Contact without coil Check that auto allocation area is not used Check FOR NEXT Instructions Check the following of END Instruc tions Check IL ILC Instructions Check JMP JME Instructions Check the Auto variables Check operand size and variable type Check operand size and array length when the element number is 0 Check the unused FB instance vari ables Execution non execution of check items and error notification settings either ERROR or WARNING can be configured For details refer to Tool Option Program Check Option Settings Section 4 6 4 6 9 Data Trace Window Bit Area Colors Tab Page Word Area Colors Tab Page C ltemSetup E BitArea Color E Word Area Color iit General Variable Address he Change N Ad Outline Preview S HA Variable GH gt Ladder io my AD Mnemonic N Cancel The colors can be selected for the following items in the data trace bit area The Preview Area displays an example of the selected colors
288. nusi es tio ee yee ee Pee hee nek belie eda ee 65 4 4 5 ST Menu i ead ele ioe abana e tiene Meade g bb eee wb 66 4 4 6 Mnemonic Menu Displayed in Mnemonic Editor Only 67 4 4 7 Natiable MENU ss 2 2e 00 s Ponca enra gw eels Sere die PINS BES OH 67 4 4 8 DataType Menu 0 0 cee ee eee 67 4 4 9 Build Menu 0 0 ec eee 68 4 4 10 Controller Menu 0 0 eee eee 68 4 4 11 Library Men s uits tireur n EE E ee eee 69 4 4 12 ToL Menus Sree T resnun era oe DEG e eE E R OE EE ee RS 69 4 4 13 Window Meni scesi aare eed aoe E ER E ea 69 4 4 14 Help Men v 22 non 2 Gee Ge ed E eee 70 425 Shortcut Keys a ack ee teeta toe ba yee dae ba aie web heed ake 70 4 5 1 Window View Operations 0 00 02 c eee eee ee eee 70 4 5 2 File Operations 0 0 0 eee ee eee 70 4 5 3 Edit Operations 0 0 0 eee 71 4 5 4 Offline Programming Operations 004 72 4 5 5 Variable Operations 0 0 c eee eee eee 12 4 5 6 Build Operations 00 0 cee eee ee eee 72 4 5 7 Online Controller Operations 000000008 73 4 6 Option Settings 0 cc naaa cee cee eee ee nee ee nee 73 4 6 1 General Window 2 0 0 ce cee 74 4 6 2 Outline s e r aT as E a a ek 75 4 6 3 Variable Window 0 cece cee eee 76 4 6 4 Ladder Window 0 0 eee 77 4 6 5 Mnemonic Window 00 0 cee eee eee 80 4 0 0 ST Wind OW
289. nvironment Network Configurator ControlNet Launch DeviceNet CPU Unit Network Configurator Launch DeviceNet Note It is not possible to display three different network levels simultaneously on in the actual window NE Programmer Introduction Section 1 1 Remote Programming Monitoring from NE Programmer Serial Connection The networks share the common CIP communications protocol so that another NE1S series CPU Unit in an EtherNet IP ControlNet or DeviceNet network or a CJ2 CPU Unit on an EtherNet IP network can be remotely pro grammed or monitored from NE Programmer Programming Software con nected through a serial connection USB or RS 232C Remote Programming Monitoring from NE Programmer EtherNet IP or ControlNet Connection A computer running the NE Programmer Programming Software can also be connected directly to an EtherNet IP or ControlNet network In this case another NE1S series CPU Unit in an EtherNet IP ControlNet or DeviceNet network can be remotely programmed or monitored from NE Programmer Programming Software connected through ControlNet Directly Inputting Mnemonics in a Ladder Window Instructions with text mnemonics such as LD AND and MOV can be entered directly by moving the cursor to the desired insertion point in the Ladder Pro gramming Window and entering the mnemonic Inputs
290. o the CJ2 CPU Unit can be forcibly released e Perform troubleshooting if the access right is not released e This function is not required for NE1S series CPU Units and the menu commands will be disabled The access right is used to perform exclusive access control to a CPU Unit from Support Software on multiple computers CPU Unit access rights are obtained while communications are being processed for a series of opera tions such as downloading and online editing from the Support Software It is impossible to perform downloading or online editing from Support Software on another computer that does not have the access right The access rights may be obtained if an error occurs such as when the com munications cable is disconnected during downloading or during online edit ing If this occurs forcibly release the access right Use the following procedure to forcibly release the access right 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Release Access Rights The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation z t This operation may affect operation of the PLC e Do you wish to continue Ce 219 Forcibly Releasing the Access Right Section 7 24 2 Click the Yes Button NE Programmer t The access rights have been released 220 Appendix A Variable Applications Guidelines This section provides guidelines for using function blocks with the NE Programmer Using Variable Data Types Integer Data Types
291. ocedures to restart the SMTP and SNTP services Note This function can be used to make changes to the email settings SMTP and time settings SNTP in the Ethernet Setting valid eliminating the need to restart the CPU Unit Refer to the NE1S Series Operation Manual Cat No Z901 for information on making the SMTP email settings and SNTP time settings 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Restart Service The Restart Dialog Box will be displayed xl Target 1 oe eee 2 Select the service or services to be restarted and then click the OK Button The specified service or services will be restarted 204 Displaying Errors and the Error Log Section 7 18 CJ2 CPU Units do not support the SMTP service or as SNTP service There fore service restart menu items cannot be used for CJ2 CPU Unit projects 7 18 Displaying Errors and the Error Log This section describes the procedures to display current errors and delete error log displays Errors and the error log are displayed in the Error Log Win dow Messages generated by the MSG instruction are also displayed When an error that is stored in the error log occurs an error message will flash in red in the status bar Perform all of the following operations online Before starting connect the NE Programmer online to the CPU Unit 7 18 1 Displaying Current Errors Use the following procedure to display current errors 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Error Log The Error
292. of the Ladder Window In the same way the Comments Option in the Variable Area will not be enabled and it will not be possible to edit comments 113 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Converting Word There are two input methods The differences are given from step 2 Addresses to Variables 1 2 3 1 In the Ladder Editor right click and select an instruction from the Insert Menu In this example Instruction is selected and MOV is input e Press the Enter Key to input a comment 2 Press the Space Key The Edit Operand Dialog Box will be displayed Enter operand 1 and press the Enter Key Ee Marl i Edit gt gt x Cancel J 3 The Edit Operand Dialog Box will be displayed again Enter operand 2 and press the Enter Key east operand Destination am MOV Varl Vad zj Edit gt gt x Cancel F ter Key Edit Instruction Edit variable comment a MOV Varl Var2 vari Comments ox Cancel i 5 Enter a comment for operand 2 for Var2 in this example and press the Enter Key or click the OK Button Edit Instruction Edit variable comment Y x MOY Varl Var2 vaz Comments Cancel 114 Programming Methods Section 5 3 6 Automatically created variable names and input comments will be dis played in the Variable Editor and Ladder Editor 2 Name Data Type Local_var1 INT 2 3 Q sw01 BOOL auto BOOL start BOOL Yari UINT Initial Value Retain Nonretain
293. offer ing media or downloading services from the Internet And if the User discovers a defect in the media which is attributable to OMRON and returns the Software to OMRON within the above warranty period OMRON will replace the defective media without charge If OMRON is unable to replace the defective media or cor rect the Software the liability of OMRON and the User s remedy shall be limited to a refund of the license fee paid to OMRON for the Software LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY THE ABOVE WARRANTY SHALL CONSTITUTE THE USER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST OMRON AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUD ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL OMRON BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OF THE SOFT WARE OMRON SHALL ASSUME NO LIABILITY FOR DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE BASED ON MODIFICA TION OR ALTERATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY THE USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY OMRON SHALL ASSUME NO LIABILITY FOR SOFTWARE DEVELOPED BY THE USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY BASED ON THE SOFTWARE OR ANY CONSEQUENCE THEREOF Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE THE USER SHALL NOT USE THE SOFTWARE FOR A PURPOSE THAT IS NOT DESCRIBED IN THE ATTACHED USER MANUAL xiii Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS The software specifications and accessories may be
294. ol x CD PLCSetupArea X Ethemet J Build 2s 1 0 Table Groups Parameters IP Routing Settings BOOTP 222 lt ___ Double click Click FTP Server Settings IP Address 192 168 200 200 Eman trge Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Patcoler Satings Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Host Name Unit TCP IP Settings O MAC Address 777 There are only TCP IP settings for a CJ2 CPU Unit Display BOOTP client used or not a Default This parameter is read only is displayed when having not zj Set Defaults OK Cancel Apply Double click P Address and enter the IP address If required set the net work mask Click the OK Button This completes setting the IP address Refer to the following procedure Down loading Ethernet Settings and transfer the settings that have been made to the CPU Unit 7 2 4 Downloading Ethernet Settings Ethernet settings can be transferred to the CPU Unit Use the following procedure to download the Ethernet settings online to the CPU Unit 1 2 3 1 174 Connect online to the CPU Unit A serial connection can be used if de sired Select Controller Download to Controller Alternately press the Ctrl T Keys The following dialog box will be displayed xl Target B GAS O GPLC Setup Area O A Ethernet Settings O 510 Table Canoe Select only the Ethernet Settings option do not select any other options and click the OK Button
295. on Transfers a word of data to the specified word Edit Operand Destination Var2 Variable Data Type UINT Comment Yarl Comments Address 5 3 8 Programming in Standard Text Language Character Set The character set for characters other than those for identifiers used in pro grams conforms to IEC 61131 3 e Characters are not case sensitive e The character set conforms to the Basic Code Table in ISO 646 e Keywords can combine uppercase and lowercase letters e g iF or if Identifiers Overview Identifiers are text strings used to express the following language elements 116 Programming Methods Section 5 3 e Naming program control units e Naming I O and variables e Naming functions and function blocks Text Allowed for The same characters and the same number of characters as used for vari Identifiers ables in ladder diagram programming can be used for identifiers in ST pro gramming Note Refer to 2 2 Variables for detailed variable specifications Restrictions The following restrictions apply to identifiers e The first character must not be a number e Two underscores _ must not be used consecutively e Spaces cannot be used e In addition to the restrictions on characters and number of characters for variables in ladder programming reserved words for ST language pro gramming cannot be used Refer to ST Language Reserved Words on page 225 for details on reserved word
296. on Blocks Section 2 3 Instances 2 Local Variable Definitions The variable table lists each variable s usage input output or internal and properties data type etc For details on local variables refer to 2 3 2 Restrictions in Variables in Function Blocks E Number of Function Block Definitions Note Up to 1 024 function block definitions can be created for one PLC CPU Unit When a function block definition is inserted in a program the function block uses a particular memory region for its local variables Each function block definition that is inserted in the program and allocated a different memory region is called an instance Each instance is assigned an identifier called an instance name By generating instances a single function block definition can be used to pro cess different I O data with the same function Not yet in program and sted not yet Block instance in program with memory ened allocated object abstract object I Function Block Definition FB1 Program Instance 1 Algorithm Instance FB1_1 of function block definition FB1 Memory Insert in A Standard program mi area program unit allocation Memory with variable Input a b _ for FB1_1 names a b c data Output data etc c O j Memo 2 Parameters Automatic ry allocation for FB1_2 Table defining usage Insert in p and properties of p
297. on block definition has been edited A red line is displayed to indicate a circuit error 0 000000 2 Either select Edit Update Function Block Instance or select the in stance right click and select Update Function Block Instance from the popup menu The changes to the function block definition will be reflected in the program s instances and the yellow warning icons and circuit errors will be cleared N Caution Be sure to thoroughly check the arguments of locations used marked with a A if input variables or output variables are increased or decreased or if the order is changed 5 4 5 Moving to the Function Block Body Internal Moving to the Function Block Body 1 2 3 Note Use the following procedure to move the cursor to the body of the function block body selected with the Ladder Editor 1 Click the function block instance in the Ladder Editor 2 Select View To Lower Layer Alternatively double click press the Enter Key or click the toolbar icon The cursor will move to the corresponding function block body If the operation is performed by clicking the input variables or output vari ables of the function block instance the cursor will automatically move to the position in the program where the variable is used Ladder Editor only This function can be disabled using a setting under Tool Options Moving to the Location That Called the Function Block Use the follow
298. on of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products without regard to conflict of law princi ples d Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties e Severability If any provi sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision f Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice g Definitions As used herein including means including without limitation and Omron Compa nies or similar words mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1 Suitability of Use Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyers application or use of the Product At Buyers request Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod uct in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropr
299. oper ation Press the Ctrl H Keys Alternately select Edit Replace The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed Input the search Find what string Replace with Input the replacement Search Object Variable Name x string Match case I Hold the previous Search object V Match whole words only p Direction C Up Down Set the range to be searched the text string to search for the replacement text string and the search conditions and then click the Find Next Button If the text string is found the line in the Variable Editor containing it will be highlighted Click the Replace Button The text string will be replaced 141 Cross Reference Function Section 5 9 5 9 Cross Reference Function 5 9 1 Overview When the cursor is over a variable or address in the Ladder Editor or Variable Table the cross reference function can display a list in the Cross Reference Pop up Window showing the corresponding instructions in which that vari able or address is used Jumps can be made to the instructions by double clicking items displayed in the list A log is also kept of the instructions that are found to enable jumping to them by selected instructions registered in the log 5 9 2 Cross Reference Pop up Window Displays and Operations 1 2 3 1 If the Cross Reference Window is not currently displayed select View Window Cross Reference Tool 2 Move the cursor to the variable or address for
300. orce set and Force reset 7 10 1 Overview Force ON Force OFF Force ON Force OFF When the CPU Unit is online in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode input bits output bits and timer counter Completion Flags can be forced ON or OFF from the Ladder Editor or Watch Window The forced status is maintained until it is cleared or until it is forced ON or OFF again Forced status will not change regardless of external input status or the results of program execution When the CPU Unit is online in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode input bits output bits and timer counter Completion Flags can be turned ON or OFF from the Ladder Editor or Watch Window The set status however is not forced and will change if the external input sta tus changes or if the status changes as a result of ladder program execution This is the difference between turning bits ON or OFF normally and forcing bits ON or OFF 195 Forcing Bits ON and OFF Force set and Force reset Section 7 10 Note Note 1 Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected before changing the status of any bit in memory including turning bits ON and OFF forcing bits ON and OFF and resetting forced status 2 The status of bits forced ON and OFF while online will be maintained even after the NE Programmer is taken offline 3 Before going offline check the forced status on the Force Status Tab Page and clear the forced status 4 Do not unintentionally go offline wh
301. orced Status Hold Bit and set this setting to Retained Startup Operating Mode Settings Function A50013 Forced Status Hold Bit Related flags and words At startup New setting s effectiveness PROGRAM MONITOR RUN Default RUN Execution Setting This setting determines whether the Startup Mode will be the mode set on the Programming Console s mode switch or the mode set here in the PLC Setup Settings Function Related flags and words At startup New setting s effectiveness Invalid Do not start operation Valid Start opera tion Default Invalid This property sets the startup condition It sets whether to start CPU Unit operation without waiting for Special I O Units or CPU Bus Units to finish starting when the power supply is turned ON in RUN mode or MONITOR mode At startup 273 PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units Appendix E CPU Settings Detect Battery Error Settings Function Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness Detect Nondetect Default Detect Detect Duplicate Refresh Error Settings This setting determines whether CPU Unit battery errors are detected If this setting is set to Detect and a battery error is detected the ERR ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash and the Battery Error Flag A40204 will be turned ON but CPU Unit operation will continue Function A40204 B
302. ot already created in the project 79 Option Settings Mouse Tab Page x Item Setup A Display A Print EA Color Edt 2 Mouse ee General Wheel i Roll the wheel one notch to scroll rA Outline Tr Variable HHH Dip Ladder d u 1D C Use the Control Panel setting Reset All Wheel Set the amount to scroll for each notch on the mouse wheel Section 4 6 Roll the wheel one notch to scroll Input the number of lines to scroll for each notch default 1 Use the Control Panel setting Use the setting for amount of scrolling in the Control Panel 4 6 5 Mnemonic Window 80 PT Item Setup E Display General r View Items E gt I Values al Dutline T Comments bA Variable Iv Addresses I Data Types Program Check Reset All Cancel Apply Display Tab Page Select the following items to be displayed in the Mnemonic Editor Values Comments Addresses and Data Type Option Settings Section 4 6 4 6 6 ST Window Display Tab Page Color Tab Page Options 5 x E Display S Color EA Exit Item Setup i1 General Program display font i rA Outline en Variable HHH atte Ladder Mnemonic Library Program Check ES Data Trace Reset All Cancel Apply Font Click the Font Button to set the font used in the ST Editor Options x E Display E Color G Exit Item
303. ot be changed Eee Parameter Name Settings Select the group gt Jarea For FB ore PA General Settings TIMER Start Address 02 TIMER Variable Size 1024 Count COUNTER Start Address 1024 COUNTER Variable Size 1024 Count Help Basic help is Input address of a TIMER variable Default 1024 displayed on the P fo Global or Program Min 0 current parameter Returns all gt SetDefauts parameters to their default settings The default value and setting range for the current parameter are displayed Max 4095 Ek 2 Make all of the required settings and then click the OK Button 6 4 1 Build Settings NE1S series CPU Unit Build Settings Setting Default Setting range Area for Global Pro Timer Start Address 1 024 0 to 4 095 gram Timer Variable Size 1 024 0 to 4 096 Counter Start Address 1 024 0 to 4 095 Counter Variable Size 1 024 0 to 4 096 Area for FB Timer Start Address for FB 2 048 0 to 4 095 Timer Variable Size for FB 2 048 0 to 4 096 Timer Variable Reserve Size for Online 1 0 to 4 096 Edit Counter Start Address for FB 2 048 0 to 4 095 Counter Variable Size for FB 2 048 0 to 4 096 Counter Variable Reserve Size for 1 0 to 4 096 Online Edit General Settings IR DR Area Shared Between Tasks Independent Independent or share 160 I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page Section 6 5 CJ2 CPU Unit Build Settings Are
304. ough more than 16 nodes If the link path is specified with more than 16 nodes a constant time must be specified for the service execution time normally 0000 hex 246 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Communications Port Number Eight logical communications ports are provided Eight communications instructions can be executed simulta neously Only one instruction can be executed at one time for each communications port When executing 9 or more communications instructions you have to prepare exclusive control This communications port number is shared with NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS instruction CSND and PROTOCOL MACRO instruction PMCR Therefore you must be careful not to designate the same number for these instructions Specifying with Class Instance Attribute ID Specify the data in the following format if it is accessed using Class Instance Attribute ID The IOI is automati cally created in EPATH format and sent when the instruction is executed The logical value however is always specified as 16 bits Reception Buffer Size Offset word C Reception Buffer Size C 1 0 Comm Port 0 0 No C 2 0 0 0 0 C 3 Service Execution Time C 4 8 0 0 C 5 Class C 6 Instance C 7 Attribute C 8 Link Path Size M C 9 LinkPath_1 LinkPath_2 T F p Link Path size in words C 8 M LinkPath_X LinkPath_Y L Size of area for storing received data area specifi
305. output variable Flicker in the Output Tab Page c Inthe Variable List at the upper right select the variable that you want to be the input source and click the Register Parameter List Button In this example start_flg is registered to input variable start If you want to input a constant input the constant directly in the Vari able or Address Field In this example 10 00070 is input directly for input variable ON_T IME and 10 00075 is input directly for input vari able OFF_TIME In the Variable List at the upper right select the variable that you want to be the output destination and click the Register Parameter List Button In this example Flicker_fL is registered to output variable Flicker Operand Input Method 2 Direct Input Select the position where you want to input the function block operand and directly input the value from the keyboard in mnemonic input mode only 124 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 Note Input 10 150 directly Dragging and Dropping a Variable Drag and drop the variable from the Variable Editor to the desired input posi tion The data types of the source and destination variables must be the same g Q start fle Flicker fL Drag and drop fb exec sh oy E Variable is entered If I O groups have been created for input variables or output variables the group names will be displayed as shown below when the func
306. ox will be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard Driver Files Search Results The wizard has finished searching for driver files for your hardware device The wizard found a driver for the following device D OMRON PLC Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next SJ dAdriver usb win2000 vcomport inf i Cancel 7 Click the Next Button The following dialog box will be displayed if the USB driver is installed nor mally Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard AN USB Virtual Comm Device Vv Windows has finished installing the software for this device To close this wizard click Finish 8 Click the Finish Button This completes the installation of the USB driver 57 Installing the USB Driver Section 3 3 58 SECTION 4 Outline of Operations and Functions of the NE Programmer This section provides an outline of the operations and functions of the NE Programmer 4 1 Starting the NE Programmer 0 0 00 02 cee eee eee eee 60 4 2 Main Window 025 e20 csp eee Sts BGP ea Gis ee ee Wek Dk ee ee 61 4 3 a Project WINdOW Ss tas tod cue tees oe Re ay a SA ee ee gh cele Ved 62 4 4 Men Item Lists is ac i5 2048 m e eee RS a S 63 4 4 1 File Menu iela cca eed ded ei eB hs 63 4 4 2 Edit Menis eenei ka he Vee hea RO lat eal ee eee 63 4 4 3 View Mehus see eee Sled hee aa re te aa 65 4AA Badder Me
307. p it on the task folder In this example the program TESTO1 is assigned to Cycle Execution Task 0 127 Workspace EER NEIS m Data Types Logical POUs H E Function Blocks B f Programs sf By NE1S_CPU01_Rev Global Variables B Task EY Cycle Execution C Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 Interrupt Execution The following Allocate Task Dialog Box will be displayed xi POU x Task Kind Task Number Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 v p 4 Execute Option Execute on Startup Standby on Startup oesi 2 Set the Execute Option and Task Number these are automatically set if the program is dragged and dropped and then click the OK Button The program will be assigned to the task and displayed as shown below Sy Task 49 Cycle Execution 5 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 Program assigned toa fea 000 TESTOI task Assigning a program to a task makes it possible to execute the task Note Logical POUs and tasks can be switched in the workspace The window can be switched by selecting Window Toggle POU Task Window or by pressing Alt Key and F6 Key Function blocks however can be switched from tasks to logical POUs only The window can also be changed when the Controller is connected online 5 6 4 Checking External Variables for Consistency The NE Programmer can check whether there are any inconsistencies between the configuration s global variables and the external variables of the logic
308. perate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli cations Safety Precautions N WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occ
309. peration related to the Ladder Editor can be changed To make changes select Tool Option Out line For details refer to 4 6 2 Outline 5 11 2 Displaying the Outline Window 1 2 3 1 If the Outline Window is not currently displayed select View Window Outline The Outline Window will be displayed If a logical POU is being edited at the time an outline will be displayed in the Outline Window 2 To display an outline of a specific logical POU double click it in the Work space When the logical POU is opened an outline will be displayed in the Outline Window at the same time 5 12 Building and Compiling Programs 5 12 1 Building and Compiling 150 A project is build all of the programs in the project are checked and an exe cutable file for the CPU Unit is generated Always build the project before downloading it to the CPU Unit Compiling can be used to perform program checks on individual logical POUs programs or function blocks Only one active logical POU i e the one being edited can be compiled at the same time The program check level can be set Building and Compiling Programs Section 5 12 5 12 2 Building Press the F7 Key Alternately select Build Build The project will be built Any errors or warning generated during building will be displayed in the Output Window Display Example NE1S_CGPU01_Rev03 sample Checking syntax Error Invalid operand type Address 0 Operand 1
310. put parameter will retain its previous value 41 Function Blocks Section 2 3 Operation when the When the input to the function block s EN input variable is OFF the function Instance Is Not Executed block is not called so the internal variables of the instance do not change Program FB definition Body P_Off FB 1 0 jp EN ENO LO ae a LO Internal variable a Execution results Output variable 1 0 is turned OFF but internal variable a retains its previous value Program If the programming were entered directly into the program instead of in a P_Off P_On 1 0 function block definition both bit 1 0 I C and variable a would be turned OFF Vy Internal variable a Output Variables when a FB Is Not Executed NEO will have the status of the power flow P F execution condition User defined output variables will retain their previous status Instance OFF OFF H EN ENO LC OUT Previous status A Caution An instance will not be executed while its EN input variable is OFF so Differ entiation and Timer instructions will not be initialized while EN is OFF If Differ entiation or Timer instructions are being used use the Always ON Flag P_On for the EN input condition and include the instruction s input condition within the function block definition Nesting A function block can be called from another function block i e nest
311. r Global Variable Editor removes the selected member from the group Ctrl E Variable Rename Changes the group name Ctrl T Variable Up Shifts the function block s selected input variable or out put variable up one position in the Variable Editor Ctrl 4 Variable Down Shifts the function block s selected input variable or out 4 5 6 Build Operations Shortcutkeys Menuname Funn Ctrl F7 Build Compile put variable down one position in the Variable Editor Compiles the active program or function block F7 72 Build Build Builds the project Option Settings Section 4 6 4 5 7 Online Controller Operations Shortcut keys Menu name Function Ctrl W Controller Connect Connects to the Controller Ctrl Shift W Controller Disconnect Disconnects from the Controller Ctrl Shift A Controller Auto upload from Controller Automatically uploads from the connected Controller Ctrl Shift T Controller Upload from Controller Uploads from a Controller Ctrl T Controller Download to Controller Downloads to a Controller Ctrl 1 Controller Operating Mode Program Switches the Controller to PROGRAM mode Ctrl 3 Controller Operating Mode Monitor Switches the Controller to MONITOR mode Ctrl 4 Controller Operating Mode Run Switches the Controller to RUN mode Ctrl M Controller Monitor Starts monitoring F4 Controll
312. ramming Methods This section describes how to program using ladder diagrams or standard text and how to edit local variables 5 3 1 Ladder Diagrams This section describes basic ladder programming methods Refer to SEC TION 2 for details on variables and methods for inputting constants and oper and numbers Note 1 The default input mode is the insert mode Press the Insert Key to change to overwrite mode The mode will switch between overwrite and insert mode every time the Insert Key is pressed Either INS or OVR will be displayed in the status bar to indicate the input mode COM3 TOOLBUS NETS GPUO1 19200 Bits Off line INS CAP NUM 2 After programming always select File Save Changes to project Alter nately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys An alarm will be displayed if there is an error in the program Correct the error and then select File Save Change to project again Alternately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys 3 Always place an END instruction at the end of each program Changing the Display Zoom The display zoom can be changed by using the View Menu shortcut keys or the toolbar The display can be magnified or reduced in 20 increments from 20 to 200 Magnifying the Ladder Editor Select View Zoom In or Alt gt The Zoom In Icon in the toolbar can also be clicked Reducing the Ladder Editor Select View Zoom Out or Alt lt The Zoom Out Icon in the toolbar can also be clicked Zooming to Fit
313. reating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs This section describes basic methods for creating function blocks Refer to 2 3 for information on the function of function blocks 5 4 1 Creating Function Blocks 1 2 3 1 Right click the Logical POUs in the Project Window and select Create POU Alternately select File New POU The following New Dialog Box will be displayed LL xl E Logical POU Project REIS I Copy POU POU Name i late z I Adds Type C Program Function Block Language ip rc Crap Csr CS Cancel 2 Input the function name in the POU Name field In this example Flicker is used 3 For Type select Function Block Note If Program is selected a new program will be created 4 Click the OK Button The function block will be created and displayed in the Workspace as shown below Also a Ladder Editor and FB Variable Editor will be dis played for the function block that was created 4x Project ote Instructions Workspace EEF NE1S_Project_1 NE1S mA Data Types Logical POUs Function Blocks AF A Flicker t Programs NE1S_CPU01_Rev01 5 Global Variables Function block Data Type RFI BOOL Nonretain First instance execution flag Initial Value Retain Comment FI is an FB local variable that turns ON the first time the instance is executed It can be used for initialization the first time an instance
314. riable table s in ternal variable sheet 2 Inputting the variable table first Right click the variable table select Add and register the variable in the variable table When the instructions are input later the registered variable name can be input in the operands Physical addresses cannot be input directly for local variables by inputting the physical address in the Edit Variables Dialog Box 29 Variables Section 2 2 Global Variables After creating an NE Programmer project select File New from the menus change the configuration name in the Configuration Setting Window if neces sary and create a new configuration In the project workspace double click the global variables under the configuration Right click the variable table select Add and register the variable in the variable table When the instruc tions are input later the registered variable name can be input in the oper ands Physical addresses can be input directly for global variables by inputting the physical address in the Address Field in the Edit Variables Dialog Box 2 2 12 Grouping Variables In function blocks the input variables VAR_INPUT and output variables VAR_OUTPUT can be placed in separate groups and displayed with input and output group names When grouping input or output variables the group name is displayed on the input and output side when the function block is pasted into a program Display Example of Ungrouped Variables Display Exa
315. riables Variable property Network variable Value Enabled Variable names can be accessed i e read and written externally Disabled Variable names cannot be accessed i e read and written externally Local variables can always be accessed exter nally Network I O variable When using cyclic communications select Input when disclosing the variable as an input from the network select Output when disclosing the variable as an output to the network and select None when the variable will not be disclosed None Do not disclose the variable as a connec tion target Input Disclose the variable as an input from the network Output Disclose the variable as an output to the network Global variables that have been set to nput or Output can be imported to the Network Configu rator after the project has been saved After the global variables have been imported variable names can be used in programming to set con nections for ControlNet cyclic communications Local variables are always set to None Retain nonretain This property specifies whether the variable s value is retained when operation starts and the power is reset Retained or not retained Use this property to input a comment for the variable Comment 256 bytes max The properties listed in the table are described in detail below 2 2 4 Data Type The data format of the variable is called the data type The follo
316. riables that are used to access global variables They include both system variables that are registered in the NE Programmer in advance as well as user defined local variables When handling I O with variables always define I O as global variables and access the global vari ables through external variables System variables are registered in advance as external variables User defined global variables are automatically regis tered as external variables when they are used as operands for instructions in logical POUs If a variable is first created as an external variable the user must manually register it as a global variable in the External Variable Tab Page of the Variable Editor to use it as a global variable We thus recommend that the required global variables are defined before starting to program the ladder diagrams 2 2 11 Creating Variables in NE Programmer Internal Variables 1 2 3 In NE Programmer variables are not declared by inputting a declarative state ment To create variables insert the variables in the variable tables and input the properties When a logical POU program or function block is created the unit s individ ual variable table is displayed automatically Variables can be registered in the table with either of the following methods 1 Inputting the instructions first If a new variable name is input in an operand when inputting the instruc tion the variable will be registered automatically in the va
317. ring Programs and Other Data Section 7 6 3 Select the data to be uploaded and then click the OK Button Upload from Controller x Target ap pPrograms O PLC Setup Area O Ethernet Settings O aro Table 4 The data selected in step 3 will be uploaded from the CPU Unit to the NE Programmer The following dialog box will be displayed if the data is uploaded normally x i Completed upload 5 Click the OK Button Upload Protection for Programs Setting the Password Releasing the Password 184 It is possible to set an upload protection password for the program Upload protection will be enabled when a program in a computer that has a set pass word is downloaded to the PLC This enables prohibiting uploading of a program with a set password if the password does not match when it is checked The following describes the basic operation e Only programs can be upload protected The PLC Setup Ethernet set tings and I O table settings can be uploaded and edited e The password will not be checked if the password in the computer does not match the password in the PLC e Downloading and online editing can be performed and settings can be changed regardless of whether there is a password Right click the configuration in the Workspace and select Program Upload Protect P from the pop up menu The following dialog box will be displayed to set the password Set Password x Set upload protect
318. rogram variables a b c etc Different I O data can be processed with the same function A Instanc FB1_2 of function block definition FB1 4 Input Ja b Output data cK Output data Instances are managed by names More than one instance with the same name can also be inserted in the program If two or more instances have the same name and in the same POU they will use the same internal variables VAR If the instances are in different POUs they will use different internal variables For example if a function block that uses a timer as an internal variable VAR is inserted at several points in the POU each instance must be given a differ ent name If two or more of the instances have the same name the timer would be duplicated which is not allowed If however internal variables are not used or they are used only temporarily and initialized the next time an instance is executed the same instance name can be used to save memory 33 Function Blocks Section 2 3 instance_A Function Block Definition i TIMER_FB TIMER_FB i je Variable Definitions l Internal variable WORK_NUM gt Use same internal variables instance_A j TIMER_FB gt Use different internal variables instance _B j TIMER_FB Creating Instances Instances can be created just by dragging and dropping the function block icon Drag the function bloc
319. rs for this device so that can choose a specific driver lt Back Cancel 4 Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended option and click the Next Button The following dialog box will be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard a Locate Driver Files ae Where do you want Windows to search for driver files ey Search for driver files for the following hardware device oy OMRON PLC The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following optional search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations IV Floppy disk drives M CD ROM drives IT Microsoft windows Update lt Back Cancel 5 Select only the Specify a location option do not select any other options and click the Next Button The following dialog box will be displayed x Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive J selected and then click OK Cancel Copy manufacturer s files from JD x Browse 56 Installing the USB Driver Section 3 3 Click the Browse Button then in the dialog box that is displayed specify the CD ROM driver NE1S_usb win2000 folder for an NE1S series CPU Unit or the CD ROM driver CJ2H_usb folder for a CU2 CPU Unit and then click the OK Button The following dialog b
320. ructions are also not case sensitive The Edit Contact Dialog Box will be displayed v Edit gt gt OK Cancel Enter the variable name and press the Enter Key or click the OK Button Example sw01 Variable names are also not case sensitive even though they are regis tered with the case that is input Regardless of the case that is displayed variables are not case sensitive Example The following all specify the same variable abc Abc and ABC The Edit Contact Dialog Box will be displayed Edi Gontect T Edit variable comment sw01 xj T Press the Enter Key or click the OK Button after inputting a comment or leaving the entry blank In this example the Enter Key is pressed with the entry left blank 95 Programming Meth Using Mnemonic Inp 1 2 3 Inputting NC Conditions ods ut Using One key Input 96 1 2 3 1 Section 5 3 As shown below a NO input condition and the variable name will be dis played and the cursor will move to the next cell on the right If the variable that was specified above is not registered in the Variable Ed itor it will automatically be registered as an internal variable in the Local Variable Editor Name Data Type Array Size Initial Value Retain Nonretain sw0l BOOL Nonretain On the Ladder Editor move the cursor to the cell where the NC condition is to be input Input Idnot space variable_name from the keyboard and then press
321. rvice Execution Time C 4 8 0 IOI Size N C 5 9 1 Variable Name Size C 6 Variable Name_1 Variable Name _2 IOI Size in words C 4 N Variable Name _X Variable Name _Y J C 4 N 1 Link Path Size M C 44N 2 LinkPath_1 LinkPath 2 ay Se Link Path Size in words C 4 N 1 M LinkPath_X LinkPath_Y 245 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Reception Buffer Size Size of area for storing received data area specified by D data Unit WORD When a response larger than the reception buffer size is received excess part of the received data will be annulled Comm Port No Internal logic port number There are 8 ports 0 to 7 Service Execution Time Service execution time in the other node Usually 0000 hex should be specified Variable Name Size Size of Variable Name to be accessed to Unit Byte When Variable Name is ABC Variable Name Size will be 3 Variable Name_1 to Variable Name _Y Variable Name to be accessed to It should be designated with ASCII Code When Variable Name is ABC Variable Name_1 41 hex Variable Name_2 42 hex Variable Name _3 43 hex and Variable Name _4 00 hex Link Path Size Specifies length of Link Path Unit WORD Link Path_1 to LinkPath_Y Link Path Up to 16 nodes can be relayed by specifying the link path CSND instructions may time out even when network and node status is normal if the message is relayed thr
322. s There are two input methods The differences are given in step 3 Variables 1 2 3 1 In the Ladder Editor right click and select an instruction from the Insert Menu In this example a normally open condition is selected 112 Programming Methods Section 5 3 2 Enter a variable name in the Edit Contact Dialog Box In this example 0 0 is entered Edit contact x 0 0 7 Edit gt gt Cancel e Press the Enter Key to input a comment 3 Press the Enter Key The Edit Variable Comment Dialog Box will be dis played Enter a comment and click the OK Button Eh conta x 00 0 0 COMMENT Cancel e Enter a comment with the Edit Button 3 Click the Edit Button Detailed settings will be displayed in the Variable Area and elsewhere En ter a comment and click the OK button 5 0o vj Eat gt gt oK Cancel r Variable 0000_00 Name f Address P000 00 00L Comment 0 0 COMMENT M Global Detail Differentiation Nothing Positive Negative 7 Immediate Refres 4 Automatically created variable names and input comments will be dis played in the Variable Editor and Ladder Editor Name Data Type p Params DINT _0000_00_ BOOL 0 0 COMMENT Comment A Caution The Edit Variable Comment Dialog Box will not be displayed when the Enter Key is pressed in step 2 if the In comment inputting Option has not been selected on the Edit Tab Page in Option Settings
323. s a Sh a 5 11 1 Outline Window 0 0 eee eee 5 11 2 Displaying the Outline Window 0008 Building and Compiling Programs 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 12 1 Building and Compiling 00 00 00 0008 921222 BUUGIN Ss ie ieee wis ee eS oe RS ADRS E OE ad eee 5212 3 Comping sron 64 Shee oie Pe bad Soa ee Beles 5 12 4 Level Settings for Program Check 0004 5 12 5 Detailed Build Information 00 00 00008 Importing and Exporting 0 0 cece eee eens D3 POVERVICW i s cds es he he PBs oo oboe ons Hay edie ee 5 13 2 Importing Mnemonics 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 5 13 3 Importing and Exporting Variables 004 Pining 2 2h aie 8 Sebi os BH GRR a bE PSL e eae Cee Rae a S 14 1 gt Pape Setup daso Sree aed odes dew he A eS tans SaT422 PONNE 2 essed Bote a AE Reef Ae ae E ek 5 14 3 Print Preview 142 142 142 142 142 143 144 145 146 147 149 150 150 150 150 150 151 151 151 151 153 153 153 154 156 156 156 156 Overview Section 5 1 5 1 Overview 5 1 1 Basic Flow of Programming Reference 1 Create a project File New Project i 5 2 1 Create logical POUs programs or function blocks File New POU i 5 2 2 Programming in ladder diagrams or standard text and registering editing variables with local variable editor 5 3 4 Saving edited data in project File S
324. s a group of data items with the same data type Each variable ele ment is specified by the local variable name and a subscript The subscript indicates the position of an element within the array With a one dimensional array the subscript s number indicates the element in the array Example An array with 10 elements and local variable name SCL The following 10 local variables can be used SCL 0 SCL 1 SCL 2 SCL 3 SCL 4 SCL 5 SCL 6 SCL 7 SCL 8 and SCL 9 SCL OANDARWNM O WORD type WORD type WORD type WORD type _ To access this data specify SCL 3 WORD type WORD type WORD type WORD type WORD type WORD type 21 Variables Section 2 2 Array Data Types and Subscript Variable Data Types The subscript data types that can be set for each array data type are listed in the following table Subscript NE1S and CJ2 CJ2 only data type Basic data types Arrays and data struc tures Array data BOOL WORD COUNTER i Raa type ture mem ber 2 Refer to the Allowable Notations for Subscripts below INT UINT DINT UDINT BOOL WORD DWORD TIMER COUNTER REAL Data struc ture OJO X X O LO O O OJ O O OJO X X O LO O OJ OJ O O OJO X X O LO O OJ OJO O x x x x x xlx x x x x OJO X X O LO O JOJ O O O OJO X X O LO O JOJ OJO O x x x x x xlx x x x Ix x x x x x xlx x x x x x x x x x xl
325. s doesn t have to be described with ASCII code e DeviceNet The node address of DeviceNet is described as Link Address of DeviceNet port The node address of DeviceNet is 0 to 63 00 hex to 3F hex For DeviceNet Link Address doesn t have to be described with ASCII code Example of Path Example 1 In case of accessing from CPU 1 to CPU 2 via ControlNet Unit Structure ControlNet Unit of CPU 1 Unit No 3 Node Address 8 ControlNet Unit of CPU 2 Unit No 5 Node Address 9 Unit No 3 Unit No 5 Node No 8 Node No 9 ControlNet Link Path The route is as follows Backplane Port of CPU 1 ControlNet Unit Unit No 3 ControlNet Port of ControlNet Unit ControlINet Unit Node Address 9 Backplane Port of ControlNet Unit gt CPU 2 The route above is explained below Port Segment is used for setting Link Path Therefore the top 3 bits Segment Type of the first byte will be O inevitably The backplane port of CPU 1 comes first Port No of the backplane port is 1 Because it falls into 1 byte Extended Link Address Size will be O Therefore the first byte will be 01 Unit No of ControlNet Unit of CPU 1 is 03 hex so that Link Address will be 10 hex 03 hex 13 hex Therefore the second will be 13 Port No of ControlNet Port of ControlNet Unit is 2 so that the third will be 02 Node Address of the target ControlNet Unit ControlINet Unit o
326. s for ST language programming Data Types Basic Data Types The basic data types and their sizes are listed in the following table Variables are edited with the Variable Editor Variables can be registered with the ST Editor but they cannot be changed Data type Meaning Words Description allocated Integer 16 bits 1 word 32768 to 32767 Double word integer 32 bits 2words 2147483648 to 2147483647 Word 0 Lower 16 bits Word 1 Upper 16 bits Unsigned integer 16 bits 1 word 0 to 65535 Unsigned double 32 bits 2words 0 to 4294967295 word integer Word 0 Lower 16 bits Word 1 Upper 16 bits Bit string of 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1or0 Bit string of 16 bits 16 bits 1 word Bit string of 32 bits 32 bits 2words Word 0 Lower 16 bits Word 1 Upper 16 bits Real number 32 bits 2 words Conforms to IEEE754 Text string 64 words 64 words Basic Data Types That Are The following basic data types are not supported Not Supported Data type Meaning 8 bit integer Unsigned 8 bit integer 64 bit integer Unsigned 64 bit integer Double word real number Bit string of 8 bits Bit string of 64 bits 117 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Declaring Variables and Data Structures Variables and data structures are edited with the Variable Editor and Structure Editor Direct address AT specifications and variable parameters e g retain nonretain are s
327. s stored in the order from lower byte to upper byte 244 CIP Message Communications Appendix D D Data Details Offset word Receive data size in bytes D Size of Data received D 1 Service Code t D 2 General Status D 3 Additional Status D 4 Response Data Size of Data received Data Length of Service Code and the following data unit byte Service Code Transmitted Explicit Message Service Code of CIP The 8th bit is turned ON For example when Service Code is 4C hex it will be CC hex General Status Execution result of the transmitted Service 00 hex indicates a correct end Other values indicate an error Additional Status Additional information of General Status When Additional Status is larger than 1 Word only the top 1 Word is stored Content is different for each Object addressed and Ser vice Response Data C Data Details Response Data received Received data is stored in the order from lower byte to upper byte The C data depends on how the addresses data is specified The following section describes how to specify the data using a variable Class Instance Attribute ID or EPATH type Specifying with Variables Specify the data in the following format if it is accessed using variables Offset word C Reception Buffer Size C 1 0 Comm Port 0 0 No C 2 0 0 0 0 C 3 Se
328. se the following procedure to specify the bit variables or addresses to be sampled in the Trace Data Bit Area 4 Trace Data Bit Area El Regist nregist Click the Regist Button The following Regist Variables or Address Dialog Box will be displayed Regist Variable or Address x Regist Count Regist Available Count 0731 l Seo e Input the bit variable or address to be sampled and then click the Regist Button Repeat step 2 to monitor more than one bit Up to 31 bit variables and ad dresses can be registered Set all the required variables or addresses and then click the Close Button To delete a variable or address that has been set select the variable or address and click the Unregist Button Data Tracing Section 7 21 7 21 4 Setting Data Trace Display Colors This section described how to set the colors displayed on the Data Trace Win dow Bit Area Colors 1 2 3 1 Click the Option Button in the Data Trace Window The following Bit Area Color Tab Page of the Color Settings Dialog Box will be displayed i pisi l Select the item to Bit Area Color Channel Area Color change aise acid el Variable Address Preview Bit Status Background Grid Lines Graph All Reset eth 2 Select the item for which to change the color and then click the Change Button 3 The standard Windows color setting dialog box will be displayed Set the desired color Word Area
329. se_2sON_1sOFF P_On CLOCK PULSE 1 0 EN ENO O 10 20_ 1 The FB is called tim_b TIMX tim_a OFF_TIME ON_TIME TIMX tim_b ON_TIME 10 10 OFF_TIME 2 The system creates the instance variables and copies the algorithm FB instance 200 100ms_PULSE Usage Name Value Internal 200 100ms_PULSE_tim_a Internal 200 100ms_PULSE_tim_b Input 200 100ms_PULSE_ON_TIME amp 20 Input 200 100ms_PULSE_OFF_TIME amp 10 SES SSSR OE EO OE RO OH ORO ORE E EE H BH Po Roa 3 The contents of the Algorithm Image instance are executed Pulse_2sON_1sOFF tim_b TIMX Pulse_2sON_1sOFF tim_a Pulse_2sON_1sOFF OFF_TIME TIMX Pulse_2sON_1sOFF tim_b Pulse_2sON_1sOFF ON_TIME 200 100ms_PULSE ENO Pulse_2sON_1sOFF tim_a The order of execution is as follows 1 Read data from parameters to input variables VAR_INPUT 2 Execute the algorithm 3 Write data from output variables VAR_OUTPUT to parameters Input to EN is ON Parameters 1 Read values from parameters to input variables 2 Execute the algorithm 3 Write values from output gt Parameters variables to parameters Data cannot be exchanged with parameters while the algorithm is be ates the function ing exe cuted In addition if an output variable is not changed by the execution of the algorithm the out
330. sed over multiple cycle times i e processed in the background Settings Function Related flags and words Start of opera tion New setting s effectiveness Disable Enable Default Disable 274 This setting determines if Data Shift Instructions will be pro cessed over multiple cycle times i e processed in the back ground Start of opera tion PLC Setup for CJ2 CPU Units Appendix E Com Port Number Settings Function Related flags and words New setting s effectiveness 0 to 7 Communica tions ports 0 to 7 internal logical ports Default 0 The communications port number internal logical port that will be used for background execution The same port number is used for all instructions Stop CPU on Instruction Error Settings Function Related flags and words Start of opera tion New setting s effectiveness Continue Stop Default Continue This setting determines whether instruction errors instruction processing errors ER and illegal access errors AER are treated as non fatal or fatal errors When this setting is set to Stop CPU Unit operation will be stopped if the ER or AER Flags is turned ON even when the AER Flag is turned ON for an indirect DM EM BCD error Related Flags A29508 Instruction Processing Error Flag A29509 Indirect DM EM BCD Error Flag A29510 Illegal Access Error Flag
331. ses not only General Status Code but also Additional Status Code may be added The data which was read is stored in Data of D 4 It is stored in the way of Little Endian lining in order from the lower byte to the upper byte D Data D 0008 Response Data Size unit byte D 1 00CC Service Code The 8th bit goes to On 4C gt CC D 2 0000 General Status 0000 hex indicates correct end D 3 0000 Additional Status The upper 2 bytes will be stored if any addi tional information D 4 D200 Data Type Code WORD Type D2 D 5 Data Data that was read Example of Ladder Program No of Address Comment Elements Sdata wooo Operand S of CSND Instruction data to be sent Ddata W020 Operand S of CSND Instruction data received Cdata W040 Operand C of CSND Instruction control KickSW Switch to start CSND Instruction A202 03 Communications Instruction Execution Enable Flag 257 CIP Message Communications Appendix D P_First_Cycle A200 11 P_First_Cycle A200 11 258 MOV 021 16 0004 Sdata 0 w000 MOV 021 16 004C Sdata 1 woot MOV 021 16 0100 Sdata 2 W002 MOV 021 16 000A Cdata 0 W040 MOV 021 16 0300 Cdata 1 wo041 MOV 021 16 0000 Cdata 2 W042 MOV 021 16 0000 Cdata 3 W043 MOV 021 16 8004 Cdata 4 W044 MOV 021 16 9105 Cdata 5 W045 MOV 021 16 5661 Cda
332. setting with 10 elements variable names filename 0 to filename 9 e Ladder Programming MOV 16 5C31 file_name 0 MOV 16 3233 file_name 1 Set data in each array element MOV 16 0000 file_name 2 FREAD omitted omitted file_name 0 omitted lt Specify the first element of the array in the instruction operand 221 Variable Applications Guidelines Appendix A Handling Control Data in Multiple Words In this example an array contains the number of words and first source word operand S1 for an FREAD instruction e Variable Internal variable VAR data type DINT array setting with 3 elements variable names read_num 0 to read_num 9 e Ladder Programming MOVL 10 100 read_num 0 No _of_words MOVL 10 0 read_numf 1 1st_source_word J set data n Sach array element FREAD omitted omitted file_name 0 omitted FPP the fist element pf the array Handling a Block of Read Data in Multiple Words The allowed amount of read data must be determined in advance and an array must be prepared that can han dle the maximum amount of data In this example an array receives the FREAD instruction s read data oper and D e Variable Internal variable data type WORD array setting with 100 elements variable names read_data 0 to read_data 99 e Ladder Programming FREAD omitted omitted omitted read_data 0 Division Using Integer Array Variables Ladder Programming Only A two element array can be used
333. sh Button The CPU Unit and Communications Units mounted in be displayed as shown in the following diagram Browse Network Select a device that you would like to connect r Browse E BackPlane 1 0 NE1S_GPUO1_Rev03 4 0 NE1S CNS21U 4 15 NE1S DRM21U HY TOP 2 ton the CPU Rack will x Select the NE1S CPU01 Icon as shown below and then click the OK But Note This connection path can be saved See the note at the end of this procedure Browse Network J Select a device that you would like to connect r Browse x a Back Plane ERZ NEIS CPUOI_Rev03 2p 0 NE1S CNS21U H 2 15 NE1S DRM21U 6 4 TOP2 e If there is unsaved data a dialog box will be displayed that prompts you to save the data Follow the directions and save the data Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected Section 7 4 After connecting online to the CPU Unit the program PLC Setup Ethernet settings and I O table will be uploaded from the CPU Unit The following dialog box will be displayed when the data has been uploaded x 5 Completed upload 7 Click the OK Button Note When connected online there is a setting in the Browse Network Dialog Box to select whether or not to save the connection path e Clear default Each time the NE Programmer connects online it is necessary to browse to a network path e Save The connection path is displayed from the last time that the NE Program mer was conne
334. shown below Pl Basic_OUT32 Output Unit 32pt Basic_OUT64 Output Unit 64pt Basic_OUT96 Output Unit 96pt GL a onai La ROSON 107 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Inserting Elements 1 2 3 1 Right click the data structure that was added PositioningO1 in the above example and select Insert Element The Edit Element Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Element xl Name Data Type BOOL hee Array Size Comment Cancel 2 Input the name of the element the data type the array size if required and any comment that is required and then click the OK Button Note Ifan array size is specified the element will be defined as an array inside the data structure The element will be inserted and displayed as shown below Basic_OUT32 Output Unit 32pt cS Basic_OUT64 Output Unit 64pt l Basic_OUT96 Output Unit 96pt itioningO1 Areal Positioning i powcr ST c5 Positioning02 Area2 Positioning 3 Repeat the above steps to add other elements Setting Example Basic_OUT96 Output Unit 96pt E l Positioningo1 Areal Positioning GE x_Position DINT gl _Position DINT 2 SPEED INT BslPositioningt2 aveaz Postioning Grouping Variables Input variables VAR_INPUT or output variables VAR_OUTPUT can be grouped for function block to display a group name for the inputs or outputs Refer to page 121 in 5 4 2 Programming a Function Block for details 5 3 2 List
335. sional and two dimensional array When specifying a one dimensional array set the number of array elements for a one dimen sional array and leave the setting for a two dimensional array blank When specifying a two dimensional array set the number of array elements for a two dimen sional array and leave the setting for a one dimensional array blank A two dimensional array cannot be specified for the NE1S Refer to 2 2 3 Variable Properties for other restrictions on elements 104 Displays the size used by the variable in the memory Programming Methods Variable Parameter Initial Value Description For programs set the initial value of the variable when program execution is started For function blocks set the value of the variable when an instance of the function block is executed Note The initial values of variables cannot be set for CU2 CPU Units Section 5 3 Values Set the initial value of the variable according to the data type BOOL WORD or DWORD Unsigned hexa decimal Input the number after 16 e INT or DINT Signed decimal Input the number after 10 or 10 e UINT or UDINT Unsigned decimal Input the number after 10 e REAL Real number e g 1 0 0 23 9 8E 3 e STRING Character string e g Data Address This property cannot be changed for local vari ables Network Variable This property cannot be changed for
336. size per Unit 25 CH Double click here to DM size per Unit 100 CH h th tti Q Address per Unit 1 change the se ings Parameters with a 9 mark cannot be changed Basic help is pa i The unit number of this controller is Default 0 Unit Number displayed on the specified 4 Min O Unit Number The default value current parameter zj Max 15 Unit Number and setting range for the current parameter are displayed Returns all set Defauts parameters to their default settings OK Cancel Apply 6 Make all of the required settings and then click the OK Button The I O Table Tab Page will return 7 Make all of the required settings and then click the OK Button 164 SECTION 7 Online Operation This section provides the procedures for online operation 7 1 Connecting via Serial Communications USB RS 232C 167 7 1 1 Installing the USB Driver 000000000 167 7 1 2 Connecting Online via USB or RS 232C 1 0 2 2 167 7 2 Connecting Online via Ethernet 00 0 0 002 eee eee eee 170 7 2 1 Connecting Online via Ethernet 000 170 7 2 2 Connecting Online via Ethernet 000 170 7 2 3 Ethernet Setup cys sncee edge dig ae Hi ee i ee 173 7 2 4 Downloading Ethernet Settings 000 174 7 3 Automatic Upload Function 0 00 0 eee eee eee 175 T BP OVERVIEWS e de eich he a ci
337. sor to the cell where the NC condition is to be input Input Idnot space variable_name from the keyboard and then press the Enter Key The NC condition and variable will be displayed as shown below and the cursor will move to the next cell to the right Example Idnot auto Move the cursor to the cell to the right on the input conditions of the line in which to write the output as indicated by the position of the cursor in the above figure Press the O Key i e letter O The Edit Coil Dialog Box will be displayed Edit coil i x Edit gt gt ok Cancel Enter the variable name and press the Enter Key or click the OK Button Example start The Edit Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Press the Enter Key or click the OK Button after inputting a comment or leaving the entry blank In this example the Enter Key is pressed with the entry left blank As shown in the following figure the output and variable name will be dis played on the far right and the cursor will move to the beginning of the next line 97 Programming Methods Section 5 3 Using Mnemonic Input Mode 1 2 3 1 Move the cursor to the cell to the right on the input conditions of the line in which to input the output as indicated by the position of the cursor in the above figure 2 Input outnot space variable_name from the keyboard and then press the Enter Key To specify a negated output condition input as follows outnot
338. space variable_name The output and variable will be displayed in the rightmost cell as shown be low and the cursor will move to the beginning of the next line Example out start 000003 Note I O Display for I O Bits IP for inputs and Q for outputs or X for inputs and Y for outputs can be displayed before input bit addresses in the ladder window by selecting Display IQ or Display XY in the Display I O Address Field of the General Tab Page in the Option Menu inputting Special Instructions Using One key Input Mode 1 2 3 1 Move the cursor to the cell to the right on the input conditions of the line in which to input the special instruction 2 Press the I Key The Edit Instruction Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Instruction 3 Input special instruction space operand variable name space oper and variable name from the keyboard and then press the Enter Key or click the OK Button Example mov DataNo01 Speed01 The Edit Variable Comment Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Instruction p Edit variable comment Speed01 x MOV DataNo01 Speed 98 Programming Methods Section 5 3 4 Press the Enter Key or click the OK Button after inputting a comment or leaving the entry blank In this example the Enter Key is pressed with the entry left blank As shown in the following figure the special instruction and the operand variable name will be displayed on the far right and
339. specify a physical address enter the physical address directly for the operation instead of using a local variable Global variables are always accessed as external variables even if a physical address is specified When using ST language a physical address cannot be directly allocated For example if 100 is input in an ST program it is interpreted as the decimal value 100 10 100 If 100 is input in a ladder program it is interpreted as CIO address CIO 0100 2 2 8 Retain Nonretain This property specifies whether the variable will retain its data when the PLC is turned ON operation starts or a fatal error occurs If the CPU Unit is not equipped with a battery the data will be cleared regardless of the Retain set ting The following tables show whether variable data is retained or cleared when the power is turned ON operation starts or a fatal error occurs regardless of the Retain and IOM Hold Bit A50012 settings Retain Address Initial value Variable data Nonretain setting Retain Automatic Cannot be set Retained allocation Nonretain Automatic Set Initial value allocation Not set Cleared 0 Effect of Forced Status The status of forced variable data will be as follows when the PLC is turned Hold Bit A50013 Setting ON operation starts or a fatal error occurs regardless of the Forced Status Hold Bit A50013 setting Hold Bit condition Retain or Do not Automatic alloca Forced sta
340. ssPusherRunning PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR processPusher dvCmd PneumaticSystem POUSProcessor VAR powerOnDelay PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR_EXTERM tmpProcessPusherAdvCmd PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR Pb_Manual_Adv PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR_EXTERM fboutProcessPusher PreumaticSystem POU Processor VAR WorkProcessor PneumaticS ystem POU Processor VAR tmpProcessPusherFlg PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR timProcessPusherw ait PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR ioProcessPusherAdy PrneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR Pb_ForceStop PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR_EXTERM entPush PrneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR stsProcessPusherAdy PneumaticS ystem POU Processor VAR autoProcessPusherAdvCmd PrneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR y inManProcessFunc PneumaticS ystem POU Processor VAR_INPUT 7 inStsIndexT ableRunning PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR_INPUT 2y inLs_ProcessWorkDetect PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR_INPUT gt outStsProcessorPusherRunning PneumaticS ystem POU Processor VAR_OUTPU gt outSol_ProcessCenterPusherdy PneumaticSystem POU Processor VAR_OUTPU e Click the All Delete Button to delete all unused variables e To delete unused variables individually select the variable to be deleted multiple variables can also be selected and click the Delete Button 217 Variable Reference List Section 7 22 7 22 2 Cross Reference Report 218 1 2 3 Note 1
341. st esras rede Se aa HERS bales aw eG AW Re E chee 5 10 Using the Library 5 11 Outline Window 5 12 Building and Compiling Programs 0 0 00 c eee eee 5 13 Importing and Exporting 0 0 02 ccc eee ene 5 14 Printing SECTION 6 129 136 138 142 142 150 150 153 156 PLC System Configuration eeeeeeeeee 157 G21 OVELVICW a occ sieges lee eis ies Sood eee OE ee ge a ee ee 6 2 PLC Setup PLC Setup Area Tab Page 0 0 eee ee eee 6 3 Ethernet Setup Ethernet Tab Page 0 0 e eee eee ee eee 6 4 Build Settings Build Tab Page 00 ce cece eee 6 5 I O Table Settings I O Table Tab Page 0 00 SECTION 7 158 159 159 160 161 Online Operation 4 0 issedvate cise edie ctew nia 165 7 1 Connecting via Serial Communications USB RS 232C 0 0 2 0 cece eee ee 7 2 Connecting Online via Ethernet 2 0 00 0 ee cee eee nee 7 3 Automatic Upload Function 0 0 00 cc cece 7 4 Changing the CPU Unit That Is Connected 0000 0 eee eee eee 7 5 Online Operations for I O Tables 0 0 0 cece eens 7 6 Uploading Downloading and Comparing Programs and Other Data 7 7 Changing the Operating Mode 0 0 00 ee cece nee 7 8 Monitoring 7 9 Saving and Restoring Variable PVs 0 0 0 7 10 Forcing Bits ON and OFF Force set and Force reset 0 0 0 e
342. stance is executed Consequently even if instances of the same function block defini tion are executed with the same I O parameters the result will not necessarily be the same Example The internal variable tim_a in instance Pulse_2sON_1sOFF is different from internal variable tim_a in instance Pulse_4sON_1SOFF so the instances can not reference and will not affect each other s tim_a value sin tins ET ETEA Pulse_2sON_1SOFF Usage Name Type P_On CLOCK PULSE Internal tim_a WORD EN ENO Internal tim_b WORD 10 20 Input ON_TIME INT ON_TIME Input OFF_TIME INT 10 10 OFF_TIME Pulse_4sON_1SOFF P_On CLOCK PULSE EN ENO 10 40 ON_TIME 10 10 OFF_TIME Note In NE Programmer internal variables are created with a default variable name of FI which is a local variable that is ON the first time that an instance is exe cuted The FI internal variable can be used to initialize the instance 26 Variables Section 2 2 Retaining Data through Power Interruptions and Start of Operation Internal variables VAR retain the value from the last time that the instance was Called In addition the Retain Option can be selected so that an internal variable will also retains its value when the power is interrupted or operation starts the mode is switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode Initial Value An initial value can be set for an internal
343. t El oe DINT 256 50 CJ2_ProjectA CJ2H_CPU6 4 io DINT 50 CJ2_ProjectA CJ2H_CPU6 git DINT 50 CJ2_ProjectA CJ2H_CPUS iz DINT SO CJ2_Project CIJZH_CPUS 13 DINT 50 CJ2_ProjectA CJ2H_CPU6 14 DINT 50 CJ2_ProjectA CJ2H_CPU6 ae N watch AWatchZA Watcha Watcha Forced Status CI2H_CPU67 EIP 193 Saving and Restoring Variable PVs Section 7 9 7 9 Saving and Restoring Variable PVs 7 9 1 Function This function reads all of the variable PVs saved in the CPU Unit and saves the data in a CSV file it also restores the saved variable to the CPU Unit All of the variables are saved and restored together including global local retained and non retained variables Z N WARNING Restore variables only after confirming that doing so will not adversely affect the system Note Observe the following precautions e The force set force reset status of automatically allocated variables will not be preserved e The force set force reset status of automatically allocated variables is cleared when the CPU Unit is switched from PROGRAM mode to MONI TOR or RUN mode 7 9 2 Procedure Saving PVs 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Backup value of variables The Backup values Dialog Box will be displayed Backup values Save in 9 Prog Save as type CSV Format csv v Cancel Except Nonretain variables 2 Specify the file location and file name and click the Save But
344. t instruction using the same variable for from an output instruction to an input instruction using the same variable 1 In the Ladder Editor select the input or output instruction for which to search for address references 2 Press the Shift Alt A Key Alternately select Edit Jump Bit Address Reference The cursor will jump to an output or input instruction using the same vari able The cursor will jump to the next output or input instruction each time the Shift Alt A Key is pressed Other Search Operation in the Ladder Editor Next Operand Shift Alt N Keys 1 2 3 Next Input Shift Alt I Keys 1 2 3 Next Output Shift Alt O Keys 1 2 3 140 A jump can be made from the instruction at the cursor to an instruction with the same operand 1 In the Ladder Editor select the instruction with the address for which to search 2 Press the Shift Alt N Key Alternately select Edit Jump Next Oper and Reference The cursor will jump to an instruction with the same address A jump can be made from the instruction at the cursor to an input instruction with the same variable 1 In the Ladder Editor select the instruction with the variable for which to search 2 Press the Shift Alt I Key Alternately select Edit Jump Next Input The cursor will jump to an input instruction with the same variable A jump can be made from the instruction at the cursor to an output instruction with the same variab
345. t can be resized Resizing was not possible Resizing is possi ble Program Upload Protection A password can be set for uploading the configuration all programming Verification is necessary to upload the configuration from the CPU Unit Not supported Supported In the New Watch Item Dialog Box external variables can be specified for automatic completion Not supported External vari ables can be specified for auto matic completion TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS vores ei heen ee naaa TY 1 Intended Audience ie sect catered Sa AS Hee KER os EDA ate eal ey Raa ees XVi 2 General Precautions s ereen o E gise ei ese HEE awa W Cee E i eg eke eee XVi 3 Safety Precautions yo sees steep ee eae Shia eos E eewes E ea eee XVi 4 Application Precautions 0 0 0 0 cece eee ene esenee XVii SECTION 1 Introd cese sr6 ese ha Coe we She eee 1 1 1 NE Programmer Introduction 0 0 cece nee e nen ene nee 2 T2 Specifications sr i a latin ald a L E ets Ga PEE io oe Gel E S Ae ee aos ets 4 1 3 Basic Operating Procedure 2 0 0 ec eee eens 5 1 4 Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units 6 SECTION 2 Program Structure lt 00o4 cc aoe vene ete tie eeew ee fe 9 2 1 Outline of the NE Programmer 2 0 0 eee eee eens 10 2 25 Nariables veces seriene ea E esa tad Beta eees Hey eee oes a dike ees 16 223 Function BLOCKS eid tegdar ed E we Se
346. ta LL 1 Data HH Data HL CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Data LL Data LH 1 Data HL Data HH TIMER Data CPU Unit Data Placement The data size and meaning of TIMER variables depend on the instruction that is used When using instructions that require a bit operand e g LD AND OR or OUT the Completion Flag is accessed When using instruc tions that require other operands the PV is accessed Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Current Value H Current Value L CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Current Value L Current Value H 1 Up Flag Information of Forced Reset Reset Current Value Current value of the timer 265 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Up Flag Time up 01 hex Others 00 hex Information of Forced Reset Reset Forced 01 hex Not Forced 00 hex Only current values can be written COUNTER Data CPU Unit Data Placement The data size and meaning of COUNTER variables depend on the instruction that is used When using instruc tions that require a bit operand e g LD AND OR or OUT the Completion Flag is accessed When using instructions that require other operands the PV is accessed Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Current Value H Current Value L CSND Instruction Data Placement Bit Wd 15 8 7 0 0 Current Value L Current Value H 1 Up Flag Information of Forced Reset Reset Curr
347. ta 6 W046 MOV 021 16 725F Cdata 7 W047 MOV 021 16 4100 Cdata 8 W048 MOV 021 16 0003 Cdata 9 W049 MOV 021 16 0113 Cdata 10 W050 CIP Message Communications Appendix D MOV 021 16 0209 Cdata 11 W051 MOV 021 16 0100 Cdata 12 KickSW ne A202 03 CSND 489 Sdata 0 Wooo Ddata 0 W020 Cdata 0 W040 END 001 Write INT Type Variable via Ethernet Control Control Net Net pra E HA ooo IP Address IP Address 192 168 200 1 92 168 200 33 Ethernet Write data into a variable of the right CPU Unit 2 Var_INT from the left CPU Unit 1 The route is as follows Ethernet Port of CPU 1 CPU 2 IP Address 192 168 200 33 The path is described as follows 12 OE 31 39 32 2E 31 36 38 2E 32 30 30 2E 33 33 A variable to be accessed Var_INT is described as follows 91 07 56 61 72 5F 49 4E 54 00 Shown below is the parameter setting for CSND Instruction Service Code and Service Data are described in S data Link Path and IOI variable name are described in C data The received response is stored in D data 259 CIP Message Communications Appendix D The data to be written is stored in the way of Little Endian lining in order from the lower byte to the upper byte S Data S S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 C Data C C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8
348. taining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Products Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture production sale delivery importa tion consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Omron may without liabil ity and in addition to other remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Prod ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts including amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses Force Majeure Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from ca
349. tance B FB Program Product B counter CTD cD Q LD PV CV manual operation D150 Reading the same product s counter value from different locations Reading different products counter values Algorithm calculating counter value is the same Instance A I O variables Internal variables FB definition Body Variable definitions Instance B Body I O variables Internal variables Body Use the same internal variables Use different in ernal variables The user can call an instance from any location The instance will be executed when the input to EN is ON Instance 0 0 H EN ENO Do A B 1 0 Ld m D10 In this case the input to EN is bit 0 0 at the left of the diagram e When the input to EN is ON the instance is executed and the execution results are reflected in bit 1 0 and word D10 e When the input to EN is OFF the instance is not executed bit 1 0 is turned OFF and the content of D10 is not changed Function Blocks Section 2 3 Operation when the Instance Is Executed Note The system calls a function block when the input to the function block s EN input variable is ON When the function block is called the system cre instance s local variables and copies the algorithm registered in the block The instance is then executed Pul
350. tches between NO and NC input conditions and between out puts and negative outputs Transition Sensing Nothing Posi tive Negative Sets or releases a transition differential condition for an input condition Online Edit Begin Ctrl E Starts online editing Online Edit Cancel Ctrl U Cancels online editing Online Edit Finish Ctrl Shift E Ends online editing Add to Watch 4 4 5 ST Menu Add Variable Adds an instruction operand to the Watch Window This menu is displayed only when the ST editor is active Shortcut Ctrl R Function Adds the selected text string to the variable Sort Ascending sort by name Ctrl Q Sorts items in the ST Monitor Window by name in ascending order Sort Descending sort by name Ctrl Shift Q Sorts items in the ST Monitor Window by name in descending order Sort Ascending sort by value Ctrl U Sorts items in the ST Monitor Window by value in ascending order Sort Descending sort by value Ctrl Shift U Sorts items in the ST Monitor Window by value in descending order Display Monitor Window 66 Ctrl Shift M Displays hides the ST Monitor Window Menu Item Lists Section 4 4 4 4 6 Mnemonic Menu Displayed in Mnemonic Editor Only Change Variable Usage Input Output Internal Shortcut Function Changes a variable for a function block to an inp
351. te Use the following procedure to display the error log Click the Error Log Tab in the Error Log Window An error log like the following one will be displayed Error log NE1S GPUO1 E x Error Error Log Message Ethernet Error 2004 01 28 00 41 04 10 Table verify error 00E7 2004 02 29 22 21 48 Communication I F error 0080 2004 02 29 22 36 15 Communication I F error 0080 2004 02 29 22 37 18 Communication I F error 00B0 2004 02 29 22 37 20 Communication I F error oOBO 2004 02 29 22 37 22 Communication I F error 0060 2004 02 29 22 38 52 Communication I F error 0080 2004 03 01 16 56 35 Communication I F error OOBO 2004 03 01 18 10 18 Communication I F error 00B0 2004 03 09 14 23 30 Communication I F error ooBd 2004 03 17 09 44 49 Communication I F error OOBO 2004 03 17 15 46 38 SIOU Setting error 0400 _ 2004 03 17 15 46 38 10 Table verify error 00E7 Close e Error errors displayed on the Error Log Tab Page are the same as those display on the Error Tab Page Refer to the previous section for details e The error log contains up to 20 records If more than 21 error occur the oldest records will be deleted e The error log will be cleared if the Clear Button is pressed Current errors and the error log are not displayed in the Error Log Window when there is a CPU standby error fatal CPU standby status occurs when the POWER indicator on the Power Supply Unit is lit but the RUN
352. te data of this object was not saved prior to the requested ser vice 268 Store operation failure The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt CIP Message Communications Appendix D General Status Code hex Status Name Routing failure request packet too large Description of Status The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the destination The routing device was forced to abort the ser vice Routing failure response packet too large The service response packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path from the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service Missing attribute list entry data The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was needed by the service to perform the requested behavior Invalid attribute value list The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status informa tion for those attributes that were invalid Embedded service error An embedded service resulted in an error Vendor specific error A vendor specific error has been encountered The Additional Code Field of the Error Response defines the particular error encountered Use of this General Error Code should only be performed when none of the Error Codes presented in this table or within an Object Class definition accu rately reflect t
353. te the global vari ables build the program and download the project 202 Clearing Errors Section 7 15 7 14 4 Editing Function Block Parameters Online Function block parameters i e the inputs and outputs of the function block refer to the following figure can be edited online The following operations can be edited e Changing from a variable e g VarA to a different variable e g VarB e Changing from a variable to a constant e g 10 1234 or an address e g 0000 00 e Changing from a constant or address to a constant or address e Changing from a constant or address to a variable or address e Deleting a variable or constant to i e changing from allocate to omit e Adding a variable constant or address i e changing from omit to allo cate e Creating direct connections Connection lines from the left bus bar to function block input variables Connection lines from function block output variables to function block input variables e Deleting direct connection lines The parameters shown with circles in the following figure can be edited P First Cycle FB_Body1000 FB_Bb gt dy2000 0000 01 000000 FE Body1 Fi 2 P 0 02s KBOOL ANT INT am H oi AE go om cence BOOL B001 a py aaun P First Cycle Jt 7 15 Clearing Errors Use the following procedure to clear error displays 1 2 3 1 If an error is displayed
354. the Watch Window and its present value will be automatically monitored as shown below Example of Setting Multiple Variables F Variable Name Value I Address Data Type ASCII POU Name Path Comment Ready n BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUOI Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbSetExecution On BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUOT Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 WaitTimer 0021 HEX Off TIMER pi RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbStatus1 0023 HEX UINT RbContral NE1S NE1S_CPUON Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 RbStatel Ot BOOL RbControl NE1S NE1S_CPUO1 Cycle Execution Tasks 0 127 000 g E s gt Watch Wateho Watcha Watch Forced StatusNE1S_CPUDI Right click the tab to select Create Tab Delete Tab Move or Rename e S On will be displayed for bits that are forced ON and R Off will be dis played for bits that are forced ON e If the project is saved information on the variables that have been added to the Watch Window will be saved as well e The tab pages from Watch 1 to Watch 4 can be used to group the vari ables that are being monitored e Any variables that have been forced ON or OFF will be displayed on the Force Status Tab Page Execute Update Force Status the first time the Force Status Tab Page is selected A dialog box will be displayed automatically when the tab is clicked Once a bit has been forced ON or OFF it will remain on the Force Status Tab Pag
355. the main differences Support for Japanese Names in Japanese can be given to all types of identifiers in projects for the Identifiers CJ2 CPU Unit The term identifier refers to the following items e Data type names structure names and structure member names Differences and Restrictions between NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units Support for Two dimensional Arrays Reduced Restrictions Read Protection Upload Protection Section 1 4 e Variable names including FBIO group names e Function block and instance names e POU names program names and configuration block names e Configuration names It is possible to input and display two dimensional array variables The Vari able Editor Edit Variables Dialog Box and Watch Window all support two dimensional variables The maximum number function block FB definitions and number of instances have been increased Using the CJ2 CPU64 CPU65 CPU66 CPU67 EIP EIP EIP EIP Maximum number of 1 024 1 024 2 048 FBs instances Area size for automatic 8 banks variable allocation Using the NE1S 4 banks 8 banks The maximum size of each variable including array and structure has been increased from 128 to 32 000 words tem __ UsingtheNETS Usingthe C2 Size per variable 128 words 32 000 words including structure 256 bytes max 64 Kbytes max The maximum number of array elements has been incr
356. this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Version Upgrade Guide The following table lists the improvements made in the upgrade from NE Programmer version 1 7x ver vi sion 2 00 Upgrade NE Programmer NE Programmer Note All of the upgrades apply only to the CJ2 CPU Units version 1 7x version 2 00 Support for CJ2 CPU Units Not supported Supported e Added CJ2 USB Serial Port to interface selections e Enabled selecting CJ2 CPU Units CJ2H CPU64 EIP CJ2H CPU65 EIP CJ2H CPU66 EIP CJ2H CPU67 EIP and CJ2H CPU68 EIP Support for 2 dimensional Array Variables Not supported Supported In a CJ2 CPU Unit project 2 dimensional array variables can be used in the following windows and lists e Variable Windows e Watch Window e Cross reference Pop up Window e Variable Used List Reduced Restrictions in Using Variables for Array Subscripts Upgrade 1 Variables can be specified for array subscripts in multi level data struc tures including members Variables could be specified only for the last sub script in an array Variables can be specified for any subscript in an array Reduced Restrictions in Using Variables for Array Subscripts Upgrade 2 Data structure members can be specified for array subscripts Array variables could not be specified for
357. tion 7 3 2 Executing the Automatic Upload Function Note 1 2 3 Note Use the following procedure to execute the automatic upload function The automatic upload function cannot be used if another application is using the serial port on the personal computer 1 Select Tool Select Interface and then NE1S Serial PORT for an NE1S series CPU Unit or CJ2 USB Serial Port for a CJ2 CPU Unit 2 Select Controller Auto Upload from Controller The following dialog box will be displayed NE Programmer r xj Program will be uploaded automatically from the connected controller fe Are you sure Baud Rate 115200 Bit s z owes _ In some cases this dialog box will not be displayed If it is not displayed pro ceed to step 4 175 Automatic Upload Function 176 Section 7 3 This software retains the interface settings from the previous upload auto matic upload or regular upload When the Yes Button is c licked in step 3 the NE Programmer checks for a connection at this port If there is a connection the Setup Interface Dialog Box will not be displayed the Browse Network Dia log Box step 4 will be displayed instead 4 Set the USB port s communications port and baud rate and click the OK Button The Browse Network Dialog Box will be displayed Browse Network 7 Select a device that you would like to connect Refresh Option a 5 Click the Refre
358. tion block is pasted into a program Ungrouped Variables Grouped Variables ExeStatu ErrStatu ForwardB ErrorGod 3 Assign an instance name to the function block Note The procedure in step 3 is not required if the Create Function Block Instances Automatically setting is enabled default in the Edit Tab of the Ladder Window under Tool Option Proceed to step 4 e Select the function block in the ladder diagram and select Edit Instruc tions from the pop up menu The following dialog box will be displayed 125 Creating Function Blocks and Pasting Them into Programs Section 5 4 Edit Function Block Function Block Body Fici er z Instance Name l z omes e Input the instance name Flicker01 in this example and then click the OK Button The instance name will be displayed on the function block as shown below 0 000000 licker fL 4 Select File Save Change to project Alternately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys The program will be saved in the project A program cannot be assigned to a task unless the program has been saved in the project This completes pasting a function block Note 1 After programming always select File Save Changes to project Alter nately press the Ctrl Shift S Keys An alarm will be displayed if there is an error in the program Correct the error and then select File Save Change to project again 2 Re
359. to be compared and then click the OK Button The selected data selected will be compared between the NE Programmer and the CPU Unit The results of comparison will be displayed on the Compare Tab Page of the Output Window as shown below erifying configration name een Configuration NE1S_CPUO1 aaa A Verify program erify Failed Configration name is differet Project NE1S_GPUO1 PC t erifying Logical POU StageNoD erifying Logical POU StageNo1 erifying Logical POUCBB21_RB1 erifying global variable erifyine local yvariable StageNoD erifyine local variable StageNo1 erifyine local variable BB21_RB1 erifying task assignment erifying auto allocation area NETS _GPUO1 Program verify failed 1 X Build Compare Find 4 Changing the Operating Mode Section 7 7 7 7 Changing the Operating Mode Note 7 8 Monitoring 7 8 1 Overview A Caution Use the following menu commands to change the operating mode of the CPU Unit from the NE Programmer Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected before changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit Operating mode Menu command PROGRAM Controller Operating Mode Program MONITOR Controller Operating Mode Monitor RUN Controller Operating Mode Run The monitoring function enables ladder program execution to be monitored in a window The NE Programmer supports the following two
360. ton The fol lowing dialog box will be displayed if the save operation was completed normally NE Programmer i Complete backup values of variable 194 Forcing Bits ON and OFF Force set and Force reset Section 7 10 Restoring PVs 1 2 3 1 Select Controller Restore value of variables The Restore values Dia log Box will be displayed Restore values Look in CQ Prog Backupedvakues File name Files of type CSV Format csv 2 Specify the source file and click the Open Button The following dialog box will be displayed if the restore operation was completed normally NE Programmer Complete restore values of variable If none of the saved variables exist in the CPU Unit the following error message will be displayed Backup Restore values of variable Failed to backup restore followine variables Variable Information Task256 Loader LoadPu Not exist in controller or failed to write va Task256 Loader LoadPu Not exist in controller or failed to write va Task256 Loader LoadPu Not exist in controller or failed to write va Task256 Loader LoadPu Not exist in controller or failed to write va Task256 Loader LoadPu Not exist in controller or failed to write va Task256 Loader LoadPu Not exist in controller or failed to write va Taal ORAM asder l msdPi Mot int i teallar ow failed ta mirita va s 7 10 Forcing Bits ON and OFF F
361. trl Ladder Rung Insert Row Above Inserts an open row above the cursor position Ctrl Shift Ladder Rung Insert Row Below Inserts an open row below the cursor position Ctrl D Ladder Rung Delete Row Deletes the selected row Ctrl L Ladder Draw Line Switches the editing mode to Draw Line Mode Ctrl Shift L Ladder Erase Line Switches the editing mode to Erase Line Mode Gtia TA In a ladder program draws a line with the cursor position as a starting point Ctrl Shift 3 TH In a ladder program deletes a line with the cursor posi tion as a starting point Ladder Invert NOT Inverts the specified instruction Ctrl E Ladder Online Edit Begin Starts online editing Ctrl U Ladder Online Edit Cancel Cancels online editing Ctrl Shift E Ladder Online Edit Finish 4 5 5 Variable Operations Shortcut keys Menu name Ends online editing Function Ctrl G Variable Group Input Output Variables Group In Variable Editor or Global Variable Editor groups the selected I O variables Ctrl Shift G Variable Group Input Output Variables Release Group In Variable Editor or Global Variable Editor ungroups all of the I O variables in the group Ctrl Shift M Variable Group Input Output Variables Release Member In Variable Editor o
362. ts Array Specification A set of data with the same properties can be handled in a single structure array Input the array s maximum number of elements in this property to define the variable as an array Only one dimensional arrays can be created with the NE Programmer if a NE1S series CPU Unit is used 20 Variables Note Section 2 2 One dimensional and two dimensional arrays can be created if the CJ2 CPU Unit is used e The number of elements in an array can be set to between 1 and 255 for an NE1S series CPU Unit and to between 1 and 32 000 for a CU2 CPU Unit e The array specification can be used for internal variables VAR input variables VAR_INPUT output variables VAR_OUTPUT and external variables VAR_EXTERNAL e When entering the variable name specify the subscript in square brack ets after the variable name e The subscript for example the subscript in variable a can be specified in the following three ways a Directly specify the subscript number ladder or ST language Example a 2 b Specify a local variable as the subscript ladder or ST language Example a n where n is a local variable c Specify an arithmetic expression as the subscript ST language only Example a b c where b and c are local variables Note The four arithmetic operators and can be used in expres sions e Two dimensional arrays can be created for CJ2 CPU Units Example a 0 0 a i j An array i
363. tus retain tion cleared 25 Variables Setting the Property Section 2 2 Select Retain or Nonretain in the Retain Nonretain Field of the Edit Variables Dialog Box When allocating address to global variables they will be set to either Retain or Nonretain and cannot be changed 2 2 9 Local Variable Properties and Types of Local Variables The following table shows which properties must be set can be set and can not be set based on the local variable usage Property Variable usage Name Internal Must be set Input Must be set Output Must be set External Must be set Type Must be set Must be set Must be set Must be set Initial Value Can be set Can be set Can be set Can be set Array specification Can be set Can be set Can be set Can be set Retain Can be set Can be set Can be set Can be set AT direct allocation to a Cannot be Cannot be Cannot be Cannot be specific physical set set set set address global vari ables only Note Initial values cannot be set for CJ2 CPU Units 2 2 10 Details on Local Variables E Internal Variables VAR Internal variables are used within an instance These variables are internal to each instance They cannot be referenced from outside of the instance and are not displayed in the instance The values of internal variables are retained until the next time the in
364. uctions in logical POUs If a variable is first cre ated as an external variable the user must manually register it as a global variable in the External Variable Tab Page of the Variable Editor to use it as a global variable We thus recommend that the required global vari ables are defined before starting to program the ladder diagrams Global Variables Global variables are defined in the in the configuration and are shared by all logical POUs Global variables include system variables such as the Conditions Flags and some Auxiliary Area bits that are registered in the NE Programmer in advance as well as user defined global variables 2 2 3 Variable Properties The following table lists the variable properties Variable property Content Data type Selects the variable s data type BOOL INT UINT DINT UDINT WORD DWORD REAL TIMER COUNTER STRING or user defined Note For function blocks the logical POU name of the function block is displayed Array size Sets the number of elements for a one dimen When not specifying an array leave this settings sional or two dimensional array Two dimen blank for both a one dimensional and two sional arrays can be set only for CU2 CPU Units dimensional array When specifying a one dimensional array set the number of array elements for a one dimen sional array and leave the setting for a two dimensional array blank When specifying a two dimensional array set the number of arr
365. ugh the backplane C eon PortNumber___ Backplane 1 DeviceNet 2 Link Address Link Address is a node address on the network for designating Link Path The method to set up Link Address is different for each network For NE1S Series the base unit backplane is also recognized as part of the network when designating Link Address Backplane Base Unit e CPU Bus Unit For NE1S Series the base unit is recognized as a backplane port CPU Bus Units such as ControlNet Unit or DeviceNet Unit are also recognized as nodes on the back plane port Link Address of a CPU Bus Unit on the backplane is Unit No 10 hex For example when Unit No is 0 Link Address is 10 hex When Unit No is F Link Address is 1F hex 238 CIP Message Communications Appendix D e CPU Unit Link Address of CPU Unit on the backplane will be surely 00 hex IP address is employed to describe Link Address of Ethernet port of CPU Unit which is the same as that of Ethernet port mentioned below Network e Ethernet IP address is employed to describe Link Address of Ethernet port All of IP address must be described with ASCII code For example IP address of 192 168 200 200 will be 31 39 32 2E 31 86 38 2E 32 30 30 2E 32 30 30 e ControlNet The node address of ControlNet is described as Link Address of ControlNet port The node address of ControlNet is 1 to 99 01 hex to 63 hex For ControlNet Link Addres
366. update file and click the OK Button Installing a Release 1 2 3 1 Uninstall the software to be upgraded refer to 3 2 2 Uninstallation Proce dure 2 Install the new software version refer to 3 2 1 Installation Procedure 3 3 Installing the USB Driver Note Administrator privileges are required to install the software Use the following procedure to install the USB driver 1 2 3 1 Connect the CPU Unit and the computer with a USB cable 2 Turn ON the power supply to the CPU Unit The following dialog box will be displayed OMRONPLE wy After a few moments the following dialog box will be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install a device driver for a hardware device To continue click Next Bar i j Cancel 55 Installing the USB Driver Section 3 3 3 Click the Next Button The following dialog box will be displayed Found New Hardware Wizard Install Hardware Device Drivers ee device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with S an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this device a OMRON PLC A device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do lay a list of the known drive
367. urs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor affecting the PLC operation Not doing so may result in serious accidents e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits e The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a countermeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system e The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output relays or destruction of the output transistors As a counter measure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system e When the 24 V DC output service power supply to the PLC is over loaded or short circuited the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF As a countermeasure for such problems external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Application Precautions 4 N WARNING Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes Serious accidents may result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided Z Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will
368. uses beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Omron at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer provided that Omron shall retain a security inter est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only and e Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against nor mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Omron s exclus
369. ut condition with the same bit address Jump Next Operand Reference Alt Shift N Jumps to the next operand Jump Next Input Alt Shift Jumps to the next input Jump Next Output Alt Shift O Jumps to the next output Jump Previous Jump Point Alt Shift B Returns to the previous instruction found with Next Address Refer ence Jump Jump Variable Define Jumps to the position in the Variable Editor where the selected instruction operand s variable is defined declared Edit Instruction Used to edit the currently selected instruction or function block instance name Edit Variable Used to edit the selected instruction operand s variable Edit Comment Used to edit the comment for the currently selected instruction or function block Copy Operand Crtl Shift C Used to copy the operand only Update Function Block Instance Used to update changes in the input and output variables when the input and output variables of the logical POU s function block were changed after the function block was pasted as an instance The ZN icon will appear next to an instance when there has been a change Edit Using Mnemonic Editor Additional Menu Items when E Jump Jump diting Mnemon Shortcut Ctrl G Used to edit one rung of a ladder program with the Mnemonic Edi tor ic Programs Function Jumps to a specified step number
370. ut do not make vari ables different For example aBc and AbC are treated as the same variable but the variable aBc is recorded as aBc e Variable names cannot begin with a number 0 to 9 e There cannot be two or more consecutive underscore characters e Variable names cannot have the following characters followed by a num ber because these combinations are treated as actual data area addresses A W H T C D EO D D EU EL IR DR TK and TR e Also the actual address expressions of external variables preassigned variables cannot be used e Variables with only numbers are treated as actual addresses e g D00000 is treated as the word address D00000 and 0000 is treated as the word address CIO 0000 e Allowed characters numbers 0 to 9 letters a to z letters A to Z and the underscore character e Encoding UTF 8 e Number of characters 48 characters max e Upper and lower case characters are distinguished but do not make vari ables different For example aBc and AbC are treated as the same variable but the variable aBc is recorded as aBc e Variable names cannot begin with a number 0 to 9 e There cannot be two or more consecutive underscore characters e Variable names cannot have the following characters followed by only a number because these combinations are treated as physical addresses A W H T C D EO D D E
371. ut variable output variable or internal variable Immediate Refresh Changes an instruction between a immediate refresh instructions and a normally refreshed instruction Invert NOT Ctrl R Switches between NO and NC input conditions and between out puts and negative output Differentiate Nothing Positive Negative Sets or releases a transition differential condition for an input condition Add to Watch Adds an instruction operand to the Watch Window Import Imports mnemonic data from a CSV file Export 4 4 7 Variable Menu Add Shortcut Exports mnemonic data to a CSV file Function Adds new variables Edit Deletes existing variables Group Input Output Variables Group Ctrl G Creates a group of I O variables for a function block to make them the function block easier to understand Group Input Output Variables Release Group Ctrl Shift G Ungroups the I O variables for a function block Group Input Output Variables Release Member Ctrl Shift M Removes the selected members from the group Rename Ctrl E Changes the group name Change Variable Usage Input Output Internal External Changes the variable to an input variable output variable internal variable or external variable Register Global Variables Registers selected variables as global variables Check Consistent with Extern Ch
372. ute ID Each Object is accessed to by using Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID In the device you can designate Object by specifying these three IDs When requesting Service you should specify Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID Instance ID and Attribute ID may not be required depending on the Service These three IDs are called IOI Internal Object Identifier because they identify the location of Object in the device osm Attribute 3 Attribute 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 4 Instance ID 1 Instance ID 1 EZ Class ID 1 230 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Link Path Link Path For CIP different from the internet protocol the relay route from the transmission node to the reception node is all described in the transmission frame The described route is called Link Path Link Path is described as EPATH type The conception of Link Path is as follows First of all designate a network port of a transmission channel with the destination network and designate node address on that network which is called Link Address For the relay channel similarly designate a net work port with the destination network and node address on that network Then repeat the same procedure to the final destination X Y Z Object B Port D C Object A H 3 2 1 Port B Port C
373. utomatically search for function block instance variables default enabled If this option is disabled the automatic variable search function will not operate Option Settings Section 4 6 4 6 2 Outline Display Tab Page Operation Tab Page options x Item Setup QJ Display Operation En General r View Items M Comments Outine Function Blocks I Outputs Ra Variable hd I Libraries Hee Fa Ladder I Interlocks MV END im AD Mnemonic I Step No hy i enb 9 a Library Program Check l a Data Trace Reset All View Items Select the items to display in the Outline Window Comments Function Blocks Outputs Libraries Interlocks END Step No Reset All Use this button to reset all view item settings The settings will be as shown in the above figure a x QA Display i Operation Linkage to a program editor Item Setup it 2 General Outline j Hi Variable pi Ladd H AES Ladder anD our Mnemonic IF C Double Click Enter Key Program Check a Data Trace Reset All Cancel Apply Linkage to a Program Editor Select the timing for linking to the Program Editor Reset All Use this button to reset all settings The settings will be as shown in the above figure 75 Option Settings 4 6 3 Variable Window 76 options x Item Setup amp Display
374. uyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclu sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Export Controls Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws regulations and licenses regarding i export of products or information iii sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons and ii disclosure to non citizens of regulated technology or information Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron s written consent c Law These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdicti
375. value of any word or any set value in memory e Restoring the values of variables e Always clear the memory of a CJ2 CPU Unit before downloading pro grams the PLC Setup or the I O tables from the NE Programmer If the memory is not cleared before downloading the data unexpected opera tion may occur in the controlled system e Check that the DIP switches and data memory DM are properly set before starting operation e Before actual operation check the parameter settings and user program such as the ladder program for proper execution in trial operation Always check the program before transferring it e Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the con tents of the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Confirm that a Compact Flash Card containing the correct contents is inserted before starting operation e Be sure to set the network connection settings and network parameters correctly xvii Application Precautions xviii 4 The BKUP indicator lights when data is being written to flash memory Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit The data may not be written correctly e Set the startup mode only after confirming that the controlled facilities will not be adversely affected e Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit while a Memory Card is being accessed e Do not remove a Memory
376. ween the program window and the task win dow Ctrl Tab Window open window name Switches to an open program window Alt 0 Window Next Docked Switches to the next window as the active window in the following order Workspace Outline Output Watch Property Cross Reference Library MDI Window Alt Shift 0 Window Previous Docked Switches to the next window as the active window in the following order MDI Window Library Cross Reference Property Watch Output Outline Workspace Alt 1 View Window Workspace Displays hides the Workspace Window Alt 2 View Window Output Displays hides the Output Window Alt 3 View Window Watch Displays hides the Watch Window Alt 4 View Window Cross Reference Tool Displays hides the Cross Reference Popup Window Alt 5 View Window Library Displays hides the Library Window Alt 6 View Window Property Displays hides the Property Window Alt 7 View Window Outline Displays hides the Outline Window Shift F View To Lower Layer Jumps from a function block instance to its body program Alt gt View Zoom In Magnifies the program display Alt View Zoom Out Reduces the program display Alt T View Zoom to Fit Fits the program display to the window width G View Grid Displays hides the grid Ctrl Shift M ST Display Monitoring Window Displays hides the ST Monitor Window 4 5 2 File Operations Shortcut keys Ctrl N Menu na
377. wing data types are supported for NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units Data type Basic types INT integer DINT double integer UINT unsigned integer UDINT unsigned double integer BOOL 1 bit WORD 16 bits DWORD 32 bits REAL real number TIMER timer COUNTER counter Array variables can be created except for STRING TIMER or COUNTER STRING character string User set types E Structure Arrays can be created Structures can be set as arrays 19 Variables Section 2 2 Note Arrays and Structures With NE1S series CPU Units and CJ2 CPU Units one dimensional array vari ables and user defined data structures can be created e Array variables A one dimensional array variable can be created by setting the number of elements to an integer value between 1 and 255 for an NE1S series CPU Unit or to between 1 and 32 000 for a CJ2 CPU Unit e Two dimensional arrays can be created for CJ2 CPU Units e Structured variables A structure is a set of variables containing several variables members with different data types The user can configure the structure freely Members can be specified by specifying the variable name and member name Data Ranges of Data Types Data type Contents Data range Bit data 1 bit 16 0 or 16 1 Integer 16 bits 10 32768 to 10 32767 Unsigned integer 16 bits 10 0 to 10 65535 Double integer 32 bits 10 2147483648 to 10 2147483647 Double unsigned integer 32 bits
378. with a consecutive number attached Input Mode Select the input mode to be used when editing bits and special instructions Mnemonic Input Mode Mode for directly inputting mnemonics in the ladder display With this mode input characters are automatically added as internal variables The timing for automatic addition can be set to either of the follow ing two options In editing The input variable name is automatically added as an internal variable when ever editing is performed In online editing The input variable name is automatically added as an internal variable when editing is performed online One key Input Mode Mode for starting input by using shortcut keys assigned to bits and instructions Defaults include the following C Key LD Instructions O Key OUT instructions Key Special Instructions Input addresses are automatically added as global variables This is the default input mode Note The shortcut keys can be changed as desired in the Key Customize Window by selecting Tool Key Customize In comment inputting Support Option for Converting to Physical Addresses to use support for converting to physical addresses default disabled When a physical address is directly input in the ladder editor this function is used to automatically generate the AT specified global variable of that address and the corresponding external variable It is not possible to use this function how ever if the configuration is n
379. work is possible via USB port RS 232C ports or Ethernet ports 1 Requirements for Windows Vista CPU Pentium 1 GHz min Memory 1 GB 3 1 2 Installation Types Installing the NE For details on installing the NE Programmer refer to 3 2 Installing the NE Pro Programmer grammer One or both of the NE Programmer and Network Configurator can be installed Installing the USB Driver For details on connecting online using USB refer to 3 3 Installing the USB Driver 3 2 Installing the NE Programmer 3 2 1 Installation Procedure Use the following procedure to install the NE Programmer Note Administrator privileges are required to install the software 1 2 3 1 Insert the installation CD in the CD ROM drive 2 Execute setup exe from the CD ROM using either of the following meth ods e Click the icon to access the CD ROM and double click the setup exe file e Select Run from the Start menu browse the CD ROM for the setup exe file and then click the OK Button The following window will be displayed 52 Installing the NE Programmer Section 3 2 Control amp Network Support Software v3 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Control amp Network Support Software v3 The Ins izard will install Control amp Network Support Software v3 on your computer To contin 3 Click the Next Button The License Agreement Window will be displayed 4 Select the I accept the terms of the License Agree
380. x x x x Ix O oO oOjx xio oj o ojo o o O O O x O O x x x Data struc ture mem ber STRING 1 Example Specifying af i where i is an array variable Notation example d d 0 2 Example Specifying af i where i is a data structure member Notation example d c b 3 Example Specifying af i where i is a data structure Notation example d c Allowable Notations for Subscripts Notation Description example d 0 Using a number for an array subscript d i Using a variable of an allowed basic data type for an array subscript d d 0 Using an array variable of an allowed basic data type for an array subscript d d i Using an array variable that includes an index variable as a subscript for an array subscript dic Using a data structure variable for an array subscript d c b Using a member of a data structure of an allowed basic data for an array subscript In addition to the above formulas including addition subtraction multiplica tion and division and can be used for subscripts in ST programing Example d x y Allowable Notations for Subscripts in Array Data Structures cli Using variables as subscripts for array data struc tures c 1 ali Using variables in the subscripts for members of array data structures 22 Variables Restrictions on Arrays Note Notation exa
381. xt cycle Appendix F Ethernet Settings for CJ2 CPU Units List of Settings Setting TCP IP Settings BOOTP Default Unused IP Address 192 168 200 200 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Host Name MAC Address Basic Setting Procedures for Ethernet Settings Ethernet Settings are made on the Ethernet Tab Page of the Configuration Setting Window of NE Programmer The Ethernet Tab Page is shown below 1 2 3 1 Right click the configuration name i e the PLC name in the Project Workspace and select System Configuration from the popup menu The Configuration Setting Window will be displayed 2 Click the Ethernet Tab in the Configuration Setting Window The following Ethernet Setting Window will be displayed I PLC SetupArea Y Ethemet 8 Build S 1 0 Table 10 x Groups Parameters 9 BOOTP IP Address 192 168 200 200 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Host Name MAC Address mM Select the group At present only TCP IP settings can be made for CJ2 CPU Units The current settings are displayed Double click a parameter to edit it Parameters with the following mark cannot be edited 9 Mm Help Simple help is pisplay BOOTP client used or not a displ d th This parameter is read only is Isplayed on e displayed when having not xj current parameter Click here to return all
382. yed by specifying the link path CSND instructions may time out even when network and node status is normal if more than 16 nodes are relayed If the link path is specified with more than 16 nodes a constant time must be specified for the service execution time normally 0000 hex Communications Port Number Eight logical communications ports are provided Eight communications instructions can be executed simulta neously Only one instruction can be executed at one time for each communications port When executing 9 or more communications instructions you have to prepare exclusive control 248 CIP Message Communications Appendix D This communications port number is shared with NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS instruction CSND and PROTOCOL MACRO instruction PMCR Therefore you must be careful not to designate the same number for these instructions Specifying IOI Specify the value for displaying Class Instance Attribute when specifying IOI in EPATH format When specifying in EPATH format specify three items Segment Type Segment Format and Logical Value The Logical Value can be specified in 8 bits or 16 bits Whether 8 bits or 16 bits is used however depends on the addressed device Check the specifications of the addressed device For the NE1S Series operation will be normal if the logical value is 255 or less whether 8 bits or 16 bits is spec iffied If the logical value is 256 to 65535 specify 16 bits e Specifying 8 Bits

NE Programmer Ver. 2.0 Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents